784591

Nikon Z30 Manual

4
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/616
Next page
• Read this document thoroughly before using the camera.
•To ensure proper use of the camera, be sure to read “For
your safety” (page 20).
• After reading this document, keep it readily accessible for
future reference.
DIGITAL CAMERA
Reference Guide
When your rst photo can’t wait
2
When your rst photo can’t wait
Getting ready
❚❚
1Insert the battery and memory card (062).
For information on charging the battery, see “Charging the battery”
(065).
2Attach a lens (068).
･Align the indicator on the camera body with the indicator on the
lens (q) and rotate the lens in the direction shown (w).
･A strap can be attached to the camera. For more information, see
“Attaching the strap” (061).
3Turn the camera on and then choose a language and set the
clock (071).
Z 30 Model Name: N2121
When your rst photo can’t wait
3
Take (075) and view (086) pictures
❚❚
1Rotate the mode dial to b.
2To focus, press the shutter-release button halfway (i.e, lightly
press the shutter-release button, stopping when it is pressed
halfway).
3Without lifting your nger from the shutter-release button,
press the button the rest of the way down to take the picture.
4View the picture.
Package contents
4
Package contents
Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera.
❏Camera
❏BF-N1 body cap
❏EN-EL25 rechargeable Li-ion
battery
❏Strap (061)
❏Warranty
❏
User’s Manual
❏UC-E24 USB cable (0484)
･Memory cards are sold separately.
･Purchasers of the lens kit option should conrm that the package
also includes a lens.
DThe Nikon Download Center
Visit the Nikon download center to download the latest rmware for cameras
and lenses, NX Studio and other Nikon software, and documentation for
Nikon products including cameras, NIKKOR lenses, and ash units.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
About this document
5
About this document
Symbols
❚❚
This document employs the following symbols and conventions. Use
them to help locate the information you need.
DThis icon marks notes, information that should be read before using
this product.
AThis icon marks tips, additional information you may nd helpful
when using this product.
0This icon marks references to other sections in this document.
Conventions
❚❚
･This camera uses SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards, referred to
throughout this document as “memory cards”. SD, SDHC, and SDXC
may also on occasion be referred to as “SD memory cards”.
･Throughout this document, battery chargers are referred to as
“battery chargers” or “chargers”.
･Throughout this document, the display in camera monitor during
shooting is referred to as the “shooting display”.
･Throughout this document, smartphones and tablets are referred to
as “smart devices”.
･Throughout this document, the term “default settings” is used to
refer to the settings in eect at shipment. The explanations in this
document assume that default settings are used.
AFor your safety
“For your safety” contains important safety instructions. Be sure to read them
before using the camera. For more information, see “For your safety” (020).
Table of contents
6
Table of contents
When your rst photo can’t wait ..........................................................................2
Package contents .......................................................................................................4
About this document ............................................................................................... 5
For your safety .......................................................................................................... 20
Notices .........................................................................................................................25
Getting to know the camera 29
Parts of the camera ................................................................................................. 29
Camera body .............................................................................. 29
Monitor ......................................................................................... 33
Camera controls ....................................................................................................... 36
The mode dial .............................................................................36
The command dials ..................................................................37
The S button ..........................................................................37
The E (exposure compensation) button ..........................38
Monitor ......................................................................................... 39
Touch controls ............................................................................42
The DISP button ........................................................................48
The X and W (Q) buttons ......................................................50
The A (g) button ................................................................... 51
The G button ......................................................................... 52
The i button (the i menu) ....................................................56
The Fn1 and Fn2 buttons...................................................... 59
First steps 61
Attaching the strap................................................................................................. 61
Inserting the battery and a memory card .......................................................62
Battery level ................................................................................ 63
Number of exposures remaining........................................ 64
Charging the battery .............................................................................................. 65
Attaching a lens ........................................................................................................68
Table of contents
7
Detaching lenses .......................................................................69
Opening the monitor ............................................................................................. 70
Turning on the camera .......................................................................................... 71
Basic photography and playback 75
Taking photographs (b auto)............................................................................. 75
Recording videos (b auto)...................................................................................80
Taking photos in video mode ...............................................83
Viewing photos.........................................................................................................86
Viewing videos...........................................................................86
Deleting unwanted pictures................................................. 88
Basic settings 90
Focus ............................................................................................................................ 90
Focus mode.................................................................................90
AF-area mode .............................................................................92
The touch shutter...................................................................101
Manual focus ............................................................................103
Save focus position/Recall focus position.....................106
White balance .........................................................................................................109
Adjusting white balance......................................................109
Silent photography ...............................................................................................114
Rating pictures .......................................................................................................116
Protecting pictures from deletion ...................................................................118
Shooting controls 120
The mode dial .........................................................................................................120
Using the mode dial ..............................................................120
P (programmed auto) ........................................................... 121
S (shutter-priority auto) ....................................................... 121
A (aperture-priority auto) ....................................................123
M (manual) ................................................................................124
U1, U2, and U3 (user settings modes) .............................128
The S button ......................................................................................................131
Table of contents
8
Adjusting ISO sensitivity ......................................................131
Auto ISO sensitivity control................................................ 132
The E (exposure compensation) button ......................................................134
Adjusting exposure compensation ................................. 134
The c/E (release mode/self-timer) button ................................................136
Choosing a release mode ....................................................136
The self-timer ...........................................................................140
The A (g) button ............................................................................................... 142
Exposure lock ...........................................................................142
Focus lock ..................................................................................142
Locking focus and exposure.............................................. 142
The i menu 145
The i menu ............................................................................................................. 145
Still images .............................................................................................................. 147
Set Picture Control .................................................................147
White balance ..........................................................................153
Image quality ...........................................................................161
Image size ................................................................................. 162
Flash mode ............................................................................... 163
Metering .................................................................................... 163
Wi-Fi connection .....................................................................165
Active D-Lighting ................................................................... 165
Release mode .......................................................................... 167
Vibration reduction ............................................................... 168
AF-area mode .......................................................................... 169
Focus mode .............................................................................. 170
Videos ........................................................................................................................171
Set Picture Control .................................................................172
White balance ..........................................................................172
Frame size and rate/Video quality....................................172
Microphone sensitivity .........................................................175
Wind noise reduction ........................................................... 176
Table of contents
9
Metering .................................................................................... 177
Wi-Fi connection .....................................................................177
Active D-Lighting ................................................................... 178
Electronic VR ............................................................................ 178
Vibration reduction ............................................................... 179
AF-area mode .......................................................................... 179
Focus mode .............................................................................. 179
Playback 180
Viewing pictures ....................................................................................................180
Full-frame playback ............................................................... 180
Thumbnail playback ..............................................................181
Calendar playback ..................................................................181
Photo information ................................................................................................ 183
File information .......................................................................184
Exposure data .......................................................................... 185
Highlight display .................................................................... 185
RGB histogram .........................................................................186
Shooting data .......................................................................... 189
Location data ........................................................................... 193
Overview ................................................................................... 194
The i button (playback mode) ........................................................................ 196
Photos .........................................................................................196
Videos ......................................................................................... 198
Videos (playback paused)................................................... 199
Playback zoom ....................................................................................................... 206
Using playback zoom ............................................................206
Deleting pictures ...................................................................................................208
Using the delete button.......................................................208
Deleting multiple pictures ..................................................209
Menu guide 212
Defaults .....................................................................................................................212
Table of contents
10
Playback menu defaults .......................................................212
Photo shooting menu defaults ......................................... 213
Video recording menu defaults ........................................ 217
Custom Settings menu defaults ....................................... 219
Setup menu defaults .............................................................224
D The playback menu: Managing images ..................................................229
Delete ................................................................................................................... 229
Playback folder ..................................................................................................230
Playback display options ...............................................................................230
Picture review ....................................................................................................231
Rotate tall ............................................................................................................231
Slide show ...........................................................................................................231
Viewing slide shows.............................................................. 232
Rating ................................................................................................................... 233
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options ..................................... 234
Reset photo shooting menu ........................................................................235
Storage folder ....................................................................................................235
Renaming folders ................................................................... 236
Select folder by number ...................................................... 236
Select folder from list ............................................................238
File naming .........................................................................................................239
Choose image area ..........................................................................................240
Image quality .....................................................................................................241
Image size ...........................................................................................................241
RAW recording .................................................................................................. 242
ISO sensitivity settings ................................................................................... 242
White balance ....................................................................................................244
The white balance menu: Fine-tuning ........................... 244
The white balance menu: Choosing a color
temperature ............................................................................. 246
Preset manual: Copying white balance from a
photograph .............................................................................. 248
Set Picture Control ...........................................................................................251
Table of contents
11
Modifying Picture Controls from the menus ................251
Manage Picture Control .................................................................................253
Creating custom Picture Controls.................................... 254
Color space .........................................................................................................258
Active D-Lighting ............................................................................................. 258
Long exposure NR............................................................................................258
High ISO NR ........................................................................................................259
Vignette control ................................................................................................260
Diraction compensation .............................................................................260
Auto distortion control.................................................................................. 261
Flicker reduction shooting ............................................................................261
Metering ..............................................................................................................262
Flash control .......................................................................................................263
Flash control mode ................................................................263
Wireless ash options ........................................................... 264
Group ash options ...............................................................264
Flash mode ......................................................................................................... 265
Flash compensation ........................................................................................265
Release mode .................................................................................................... 265
Focus mode ........................................................................................................265
AF-area mode .................................................................................................... 266
Vibration reduction ......................................................................................... 266
Auto bracketing ................................................................................................266
Exposure and ash bracketing .......................................... 267
White balance bracketing................................................... 272
ADL bracketing ........................................................................275
Multiple exposure ............................................................................................277
Creating a multiple exposure............................................ 279
HDR (high dynamic range) ........................................................................... 285
Taking HDR photographs.................................................... 286
Interval timer shooting .................................................................................. 292
Interval-timer photography ................................................295
Time-lapse video ..............................................................................................305
Table of contents
12
Recording time-lapse videos ............................................. 306
Focus shift shooting........................................................................................314
Focus shift photography ......................................................316
Silent photography ......................................................................................... 322
1 The video recording menu: Video recording options ........................ 324
Reset video recording menu........................................................................325
File naming .........................................................................................................325
Frame size/frame rate.....................................................................................325
Video quality ......................................................................................................325
Video le type ................................................................................................... 326
ISO sensitivity settings ................................................................................... 326
White balance ....................................................................................................327
Set Picture Control ...........................................................................................328
Manage Picture Control .................................................................................328
Active D-Lighting ............................................................................................. 328
High ISO NR ........................................................................................................329
Vignette control ................................................................................................329
Diraction compensation .............................................................................329
Auto distortion control.................................................................................. 329
Flicker reduction ...............................................................................................329
Metering ..............................................................................................................330
Release mode (save frame) ...........................................................................330
Focus mode ........................................................................................................330
AF-area mode .................................................................................................... 331
Vibration reduction ......................................................................................... 331
Electronic VR ......................................................................................................331
Microphone sensitivity .................................................................................. 331
Attenuator .......................................................................................................... 332
Frequency response ........................................................................................332
Wind noise reduction ..................................................................................... 333
Timecode .............................................................................................................333
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings .................................... 335
Reset custom settings .................................................................................... 337
Table of contents
13
a: Autofocus ....................................................................................................... 338
a1: AF-C priority selection .................................................................... 338
a2: AF-S priority selection .....................................................................338
a3: Focus tracking with lock-on ......................................................... 339
a4: Focus points used .............................................................................339
a5: Store points by orientation...........................................................340
a6: AF activation ...................................................................................... 342
Out-of-focus release ..............................................................342
a7: Limit AF-area mode selection ...................................................... 343
a8: Focus point wrap-around ..............................................................343
a9: Focus point options .........................................................................344
Manual focus mode ...............................................................344
Dynamic-area AF assist ........................................................ 344
a10: Low-light AF.....................................................................................344
a11: Manual focus ring in AF mode .................................................. 345
b: Metering/exposure .....................................................................................345
b1: Easy exposure compensation......................................................345
b2: Center-weighted area.....................................................................346
b3: Fine-tune optimal exposure .........................................................346
c: Timers/AE lock .............................................................................................. 347
c1: Shutter-release button AE-L......................................................... 347
c2: Self-timer ............................................................................................. 348
c3: Power o delay ..................................................................................348
d: Shooting/display ......................................................................................... 349
d1: CL mode shooting speed .............................................................. 349
d2: Maximum shots per burst .............................................................349
d3: Exposure delay mode ..................................................................... 349
d4: Shutter type ....................................................................................... 350
d5: File number sequence ....................................................................350
d6: Apply settings to live view............................................................352
d7: Framing grid display ....................................................................... 353
d8: Focus peaking ................................................................................... 353
Peaking level ............................................................................ 353
Table of contents
14
Peaking highlight color........................................................353
d9: View all in continuous mode....................................................... 354
e: Bracketing/ash ........................................................................................... 354
e1: Flash sync speed...............................................................................354
e2: Flash shutter speed..........................................................................355
e3: Exposure comp. for ash ................................................................355
e4: Auto c ISO sensitivity control ...................................................... 356
e5: Auto bracketing (mode M)............................................................356
e6: Bracketing order............................................................................... 357
f: Controls ............................................................................................................358
f1: Customize i menu ..........................................................................358
Bluetooth connection ...........................................................359
f2: Custom controls (shooting) ...........................................................359
f3: Custom controls (playback) ...........................................................369
f4: Customize command dials.............................................................370
Reverse rotation ......................................................................370
Change main/sub ...................................................................371
Menus and playback ............................................................. 371
Sub-dial frame advance....................................................... 372
f5: Release button to use dial ..............................................................373
f6: Reverse indicators ............................................................................. 374
g: Video................................................................................................................374
g1: Customize i menu .........................................................................374
Bluetooth connection ...........................................................375
g2: Custom controls ................................................................................375
g3: AF speed ..............................................................................................383
g4: AF tracking sensitivity .................................................................... 384
g5: Highlight display .............................................................................. 384
Display pattern ........................................................................384
Highlight display threshold ................................................ 385
B The setup menu: Camera setup...................................................................386
Format memory card ......................................................................................387
Save user settings ............................................................................................ 387
Table of contents
15
Reset user settings ...........................................................................................388
Language ............................................................................................................ 388
Time zone and date.........................................................................................388
Monitor brightness ..........................................................................................389
Monitor color balance .................................................................................... 389
REC lamp brightness .......................................................................................390
Information display ......................................................................................... 391
AF ne-tuning options ...................................................................................392
Creating and saving ne-tuning values .........................393
Choosing a default ne-tuning value .............................394
Non-CPU lens data .......................................................................................... 394
Save focus position......................................................................................... 395
Image Dust O ref photo ..............................................................................395
Acquiring Image Dust O reference data ..................... 396
Pixel mapping ....................................................................................................398
Image comment ............................................................................................... 398
Input comment ....................................................................... 399
Attach comment .....................................................................399
Copyright information ................................................................................... 399
Artist/Copyright ...................................................................... 399
Attach copyright information ............................................400
Beep options ......................................................................................................400
Beep on/o ...............................................................................400
Volume ....................................................................................... 401
Pitch .............................................................................................401
Touch controls ...................................................................................................401
Enable/disable touch controls ...........................................401
Full-frame playback icks .................................................... 402
Self-portrait mode ........................................................................................... 402
HDMI .....................................................................................................................402
Airplane mode .................................................................................................. 402
Connect to smart device ............................................................................... 403
Pairing (Bluetooth) .................................................................403
Table of contents
16
Select for upload (Bluetooth) .............................................403
Wi-Fi connection .....................................................................404
Upload while o ..................................................................... 405
Location data (smart device) ..............................................405
Connect to computer..................................................................................... 405
Wi-Fi connection .....................................................................406
Network settings .................................................................... 406
Options .......................................................................................407
MAC address ............................................................................ 408
Wireless remote (ML-L7) options ................................................................408
Wireless remote connection ...............................................408
Save wireless remote controller........................................409
Delete wireless remote controller .................................... 409
Assign Fn1 button/Assign Fn2 button ............................409
Conformity marking ........................................................................................409
USB power delivery .........................................................................................410
Energy saving (photo mode)....................................................................... 412
Slot empty release lock ..................................................................................412
Save/load menu settings .............................................................................. 413
Save menu settings ............................................................... 416
Load menu settings...............................................................417
Reset all settings ...............................................................................................417
Firmware version ..............................................................................................417
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies................................... 419
Creating retouched copies ................................................. 420
RAW processing: Converting RAW to JPEG.............................................423
Trim ....................................................................................................................... 426
Resize ....................................................................................................................427
Resizing multiple images .................................................... 427
D-Lighting ...........................................................................................................431
Red-eye correction .......................................................................................... 432
Straighten ........................................................................................................... 433
Distortion control .............................................................................................433
Table of contents
17
Perspective control ..........................................................................................434
Monochrome .....................................................................................................435
Overlay pictures ................................................................................................436
Add .............................................................................................. 436
Lighten and darken ............................................................... 440
Trim video ........................................................................................................... 443
O My Menu/m Recent settings .......................................................................444
O My Menu: Creating a custom menu ...........................444
m Recent settings: Accessing recently-used settings.......
....................................................................................................... 450
Establishing wireless connections to computers
or smart devices 451
Network options ....................................................................................................451
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi................................................................452
What Wi-Fi can do for you ...................................................452
The Wireless Transmitter Utility ........................................ 452
Infrastructure and access-point modes ......................... 452
Connecting in access-point mode ................................... 454
Connecting in infrastructure mode .................................460
Uploading pictures ................................................................ 468
Disconnecting and reconnecting .....................................472
Connecting to smart devices ............................................................................474
The SnapBridge app ..............................................................474
What SnapBridge can do for you......................................474
Wireless connections ............................................................ 475
Connecting via Bluetooth (pairing) ................................. 475
Connecting via Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi mode).................................. 478
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................... 483
Cabled connections to computers and HDMI
devices 484
Connecting to computers via USB..................................................................484
Table of contents
18
Installing NX Studio ...............................................................484
Copying pictures to a computer using NX Studio ......484
Connecting to HDMI devices ............................................................................ 489
TVs ................................................................................................489
Recorders ...................................................................................489
On-camera ash photography 493
“On-camera” versus “remote” ........................................................................... 493
Camera-mounted ash units ............................................. 493
Remote ash photography .................................................493
Using an on-camera ash .................................................................................. 494
Flash control mode ...............................................................................................497
Flash modes ............................................................................................................ 498
Flash compensation ............................................................................................. 501
FV lock .......................................................................................................................502
Remote ash photography 505
What is remote ash photography? ...............................................................505
Controlling remote ash units ..........................................................................506
Using optical AWL with the SB-500 ................................. 506
Troubleshooting 510
Before contacting customer support .............................................................510
Problems and solutions...................................................................................... 512
Battery/display ........................................................................ 512
Shooting .................................................................................... 512
Playback .....................................................................................517
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (wireless networks)....................... 518
Miscellaneous .......................................................................... 519
Alerts and error messages ................................................................................. 521
Alerts ........................................................................................... 521
Error messages ........................................................................ 523
Table of contents
19
Technical notes 526
Compatible lenses and accessories................................................................526
Display in the monitor .........................................................................................527
Monitor .......................................................................................527
Compatible ash units ........................................................................................ 535
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)....................535
Features available with CLS-compatible ash units .. 535
Notes and tips for optional ash units ........................... 551
Other compatible accessories .......................................................................... 555
Charging the camera with the charging AC adapter.........
....................................................................................................... 557
ML-L7 Remote Control ..........................................................559
Software ....................................................................................................................566
Caring for the camera..........................................................................................568
Storage ....................................................................................... 568
Cleaning .....................................................................................568
Manual cleaning ..................................................................... 569
Caring for the camera and battery: Cautions ..............................................572
Camera care ..............................................................................572
Battery care ...............................................................................575
Specications ..........................................................................................................578
Nikon Z 30 digital camera ................................................... 578
Approved memory cards....................................................................................590
Portable chargers (power banks).................................................................... 591
Memory card capacity .........................................................................................592
Available recording time.................................................................................... 593
Battery endurance ................................................................................................ 595
Trademarks and licenses.................................................................................... 597
Notices ...................................................................................................................... 600
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (wireless LAN)................................................................ 603
Index 609
For your safety
20
For your safety
To prevent damage to property or injury to yourself or to others, read
“For your safety” in its entirety before using this product.
After reading these safety instructions, keep them readily accessible for
future reference.
DANGER: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon
carries a high risk of death or severe injury.
WARNING: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon
could result in death or severe injury.
CAUTION: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon
could result in injury or property damage.
WARNING
Do not use while walking or operating a vehicle.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents or other injury.
Do not disassemble or modify this product. Do not touch internal
parts that become exposed as the result of a fall or other accident.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in electric shock or other
injury.
Should you notice any abnormalities such as the product producing
smoke, heat, or unusual odors, immediately disconnect the battery or
power source.
Continued operation could result in re, burns or other injury.
Keep dry. Do not handle with wet hands. Do not handle the plug with
wet hands.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in re or electric shock.
Do not let your skin remain in prolonged contact with this product
while it is on or plugged in.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in low-temperature burns.
For your safety
21
Do not use this product in the presence of ammable dust or gas such
as propane, gasoline or aerosols.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in explosion or re.
Do not directly view the sun or other bright light source through the
lens.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in visual impairment.
Do not aim the ash at the operator of a motor vehicle.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents.
Keep this product out of reach of children.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product
malfunction. In addition, note that small parts constitute a choking hazard.
Should a child swallow any part of this product, seek immediate medical
attention.
Do not entangle, wrap or twist the straps around your neck.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents.
Do not use batteries, chargers, AC adapters, or USB cables not
specically designated for use with this product. When using
batteries, chargers, AC adapters, and USB cables designated for use
with this product, do not:
･Damage, modify, forcibly tug or bend the cords or cables, place
them under heavy objects, or expose them to heat or ame.
･Use travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one
voltage to another or with DC-to-AC inverters.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in re or electric shock.
Do not handle the plug when charging the product or using the AC
adapter during thunderstorms.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock.
For your safety
22
Dust on or near the metal parts of the plug should be removed with a
dry cloth.
Continued use could result in re.
Do not handle with bare hands in locations exposed to extremely high
or low temperatures.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns, or frostbite.
CAUTION
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light sources.
Light focused by the lens could cause re or damage to product’s internal
parts. When shooting backlit subjects, keep the sun well out of the frame.
Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is close to the frame could
cause re.
Turn this product o when its use is prohibited. Disable wireless
features when the use of wireless equipment is prohibited.
The radio-frequency emissions produced by this product could interfere
with equipment onboard aircraft or in hospitals or other medical facilities.
Remove the battery and disconnect the AC adapter if this product will
not be used for an extended period.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in re or product
malfunction.
Do not re the ash in contact with or in close proximity to the skin or
objects.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns or re.
Do not leave the product where it will be exposed to extremely high
temperatures, for an extended period such as in an enclosed
automobile or in direct sunlight.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in re or product
malfunction.
For your safety
23
Do not look at the REC lamp from short distances or for long periods.
Failure to observe this precaution could have adverse eects on vision.
Do not transport cameras or lenses with tripods or similar accessories
attached.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product
malfunction.
DANGER (Batteries)
Do not mishandle batteries.
Failure to observe the following precautions could result in the batteries
leaking, overheating, rupturing, or catching re:
･Use only rechargeable batteries approved for use in this product.
･Do not expose batteries to ame or excessive heat.
･Do not disassemble.
･Do not short-circuit the terminals by touching them to necklaces,
hairpins, or other metal objects.
･Do not expose batteries or the products in which they are inserted
to powerful physical shocks.
･Do not step on batteries, pierce them with nails, or strike them with
hammers.
Charge only as indicated.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in the batteries leaking,
overheating, rupturing, or catching re.
If battery liquid comes into contact with the eyes, rinse with plenty of
clean water and seek immediate medical attention.
Delaying action could result in eye injuries.
Follow the instructions of airline personnel.
Batteries left unattended at high altitudes in an unpressurized
environment may leak, overheat, rupture, or catch re.
For your safety
24
WARNING (Batteries)
Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Should a child swallow a battery, seek immediate medical attention.
Keep batteries out of reach of household pets and other animals.
The batteries could leak, overheat, rupture, or catch re if bitten, chewed,
or otherwise damaged by animals.
Do not immerse batteries in water or expose to rain.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in re or product
malfunction. Immediately dry the product with a towel or similar object
should it become wet.
Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the
batteries, such as discoloration or deformation. Cease charging EN-
EL25 rechargeable batteries if they do not charge in the specied
period of time.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in the batteries leaking,
overheating, rupturing, or catching re.
When batteries are no longer needed, insulate the terminals with
tape.
Overheating, rupture, or re may result should metal objects come into
contact with the terminals.
If battery liquid comes into contact with a person’s skin or clothing,
immediately rinse the aected area with plenty of clean water.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in skin irritation.
Notices
25
Notices
･No part of the documentation included with this product may be
reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or
translated into any language in any form, by any means, without
Nikon’s prior written permission.
･Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specications
of the hardware and software described in this documentation at any
time and without prior notice.
･Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use
of this product.
･While every eort has been made to ensure that the information in
this documentation is accurate and complete, we would appreciate it
were you to bring any errors or omissions to the attention of the
Nikon representative in your area (address provided separately).
Notice concerning prohibition of copying or reproduction●
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally
copied or reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device
may be punishable by law.
･Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced
Do not copy or reproduce paper money, coins, securities, government
bonds, or local government bonds, even if such copies or reproductions are
stamped “Sample”.
The copying or reproduction of paper money, coins, or securities which are
circulated in a foreign country is prohibited.
Unless the prior permission of the government has been obtained, the
copying or reproduction of unused postage stamps or post cards issued by
the government is prohibited.
The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the government and of
certied documents stipulated by law is prohibited.
･Cautions on certain copies and reproductions
The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of
securities issued by private companies (shares, bills, checks, gift certicates,
Notices
26
etc.), commuter passes, or coupon tickets, except when a minimum of
necessary copies are to be provided for business use by a company. Also,
do not copy or reproduce passports issued by the government, licenses
issued by public agencies and private groups, ID cards, and tickets, such as
passes and meal coupons.
･Comply with copyright notices
Under copyright law, photographs or recordings of copyrighted works
made with the camera cannot be used without the permission of the
copyright holder. Exceptions apply to personal use, but note that even
personal use may be restricted in the case of photographs or recordings of
exhibits or live performances.
Use only Nikon brand electronic accessories●
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex
electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including lenses,
chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and ash accessories) certied by Nikon
specically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven
to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic
circuitry.
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and
may void your Nikon warranty. The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion
batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal shown below could
interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries
overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local
authorized Nikon dealer.
Memory cards●
･Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when
removing memory cards from the camera.
･Do not perform the following operations during formatting or while
data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer or other
Notices
27
device. Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of
data or in damage to the camera or card.
- Do not remove or insert memory cards
- Do not turn the camera o
- Do not remove the battery
･Do not touch the card terminals with your ngers or metal objects.
･Do not use excessive force when handling memory cards. Failure to
observe this precaution could damage the card.
･Do not bend or drop memory cards or subject them to strong
physical shocks.
･Do not expose memory cards to water, heat, or direct sunlight.
･Do not format memory cards in a computer.
Notices
28
DBefore taking important pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before
taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is
functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost prots
that may result from product malfunction.
DLife-long learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-long learning” commitment to ongoing product
support and education, continually-updated information is available on-line
at the following sites:
･For users in the U.S.A.: https://www.nikonusa.com/
･For users in Canada: https://www.nikon.ca/
･For users in Mexico: https://www.nikon.com.mx/
･For users in Latin America: https://www.nikonamericalatina.com/
･For users in Europe: https://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
･For users in Asia, Oceania, the Middle East, and Africa: https://
www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips,
answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital
imaging and photography. Additional information may be available from the
Nikon representative in your area. See the following URL for contact
information: https://imaging.nikon.com/
Parts of the camera
29
Getting to know the camera
Parts of the camera
Camera body
1Eyelet for camera strap (061)
2E (focal plane mark; 0105)
3Stereo microphone (080)
4S button (037, 0131)
5Power switch (071)
6Shutter-release button (075)
7E button (038, 0134)
8Main command dial (037)
9Video-record button (080)
10 Mode dial (036, 0120)
11 Accessory shoe (for optional
ash unit; 0494, 0535)
12 Speaker (087)
Parts of the camera
30
1Sub-command dial (037)
2Image sensor (0569)
3CPU contacts
4Lens mounting mark (068)
5REC lamp (082, 0390)
Self-timer lamp (0140)
6Cover for microphone
connector
7Cover for HDMI and USB
connectors
8Connector for external
microphone (0556)
9HDMI connector (0489)
10 Charge lamp (065, 0557)
11 USB connector (0410, 0484)
12 Lens release button (069)
13 Lens mount (068, 0105)
14 Body cap (068)
15 Fn2 button (059, 090)
16 Fn1 button (059, 0109)
Parts of the camera
31
1DISP button (048)
2Photo/video selector (075,
080)
3A (g) button (051, 0118,
0142)
4i button (056, 0145)
5J button (053)
6Multi selector (053, 097)
7G button (052, 0212)
8K button (086, 0180)
9W (Q) button (050, 056,
0180, 0206)
10 X button (050, 0103, 0180,
0206)
11 Memory card access lamp
(078, 082)
12 Battery-chamber/memory card
slot cover
13 Battery-chamber/memory card
slot cover latch
14 Memory card slot (062)
15 Battery latch (062)
16 Tripod socket
17 Monitor (039, 042, 0101)
18 c (E) button (0136, 0140)
19 O button (088, 0208)
Parts of the camera
32
DDo not touch the image sensor
Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the image sensor, poke
it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower.
These actions could scratch or otherwise damage the sensor. For information
on cleaning the image sensor, see “Manual cleaning” (0569).
DProduct serial number
The serial number for this product can be found by opening the monitor.
Parts of the camera
33
Monitor
Photo mode
❚❚
At default settings, the following indicators appear in the monitor. For
more information, see “Display in the monitor” (0527) in “Technical
notes”.
1Shooting mode (0120)
2Focus point (092)
3Release mode (0136)
4Focus mode (090)
5AF-area mode (092)
6Active D-Lighting (0165)
7Picture Control (0147, 0251)
8White balance (0109, 0153,
0244)
Parts of the camera
34
9Image area (0240)
10 Image size (0162)
11 Image quality (0161)
12 i icon (0145)
13 Exposure indicator
Exposure (0125)
Exposure compensation
(0134)
14 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures; 064)
15 Number of exposures
remaining (064, 0592)
16 ISO sensitivity (0131)
17 ISO sensitivity indicator (0131)
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator
(0132)
18 Aperture (0123, 0124)
19 Shutter speed (0121, 0124)
20 Subject-tracking AF (0100)
21 Metering (0163)
22 Battery indicator (063)
23 Shutter type (0350)
24 1 icon (074)
25 Vibration reduction indicator
(0168)
26 Touch shooting (0101)
27 AF-area brackets (093)
Parts of the camera
35
Video mode
❚❚
1Recording indicator (080)
“No video” indicator (082)
2Frame size and rate/Video
quality (0172)
3Time remaining (080)
4Release mode (still
photography; 0139)
5Sound level (0175)
6Microphone sensitivity (0175)
7Frequency response (0332)
Camera controls
36
Camera controls
The mode dial
Rotate the mode dial to choose a shooting mode.
Mode Description
bAuto A simple, “point-and-shoot” mode that leaves
the camera in charge of settings (075, 080).
P Programmed auto The camera sets shutter speed and aperture for
optimal exposure.
SShutter-priority
auto
You choose the shutter speed; the camera
selects the aperture for best results.
AAperture-priority
auto
You choose the aperture; the camera selects the
shutter speed for best results.
M Manual You control both shutter speed and aperture.
U1
U2
U3
User settings
modes
Assign frequently-used settings to these
positions for quick recall.
Camera controls
37
The command dials
Rotate the command dials to choose settings for shutter speed,
aperture, or the functions assigned to other camera controls.
The S button
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light (ISO sensitivity) in accord with
lighting conditions.
Photo mode
❚❚
ISO sensitivity can be adjusted by holding the S button and rotating
the main command dial.
･In modes P, S, A, and M, you can hold the S button and rotate the
sub-command dial to choose from “ISO AUTO” (auto ISO sensitivity
control enabled) or “ISO” (auto ISO sensitivity control disabled).
･In b mode, the setting is xed at ISO-A (AUTO), and the camera sets
the ISO sensitivity automatically.
Camera controls
38
Video mode
❚❚
ISO sensitivity can be adjusted by holding the S button and rotating
the main command dial. ISO sensitivity for video recording can be
adjusted in mode M only.
･The value selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [ISO sensitivity
(mode M)] applies when [O] is selected for [ISO sensitivity
settings] > [Auto ISO control (mode M)].
･You can choose between “ISO AUTO” (auto ISO sensitivity control
enabled) and “ISO” (auto ISO sensitivity control disabled) by holding
the S button and rotating the sub-command dial.
The E (exposure compensation) button
Alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera. Exposure
compensation can be used to make pictures brighter or darker.
−1 EV No exposure
compensation
+1 EV
･Exposure compensation can be adjusted by holding the E button
and rotating either command dial.
･Higher values make the subject brighter, lower values darker.
Camera controls
39
Monitor
The orientation and angle of the monitor can be adjusted.
Normal shooting●
When shooting normally, use the monitor so that it is facing out and set
in the camera body.
Low angle shooting●
Turn the monitor facing up to shoot with the camera at low positions.
Camera controls
40
High angle shooting●
Turn the monitor facing down to shoot with the camera at high
positions.
Self-portrait mode●
When the monitor is facing the front of the camera, the camera changes
to self-portrait mode (040).
DPrecautions for the monitor
･When rotating the monitor, rotate slowly within the allowable range.
Applying excessive force will result in damage to the camera body and
monitor.
･When you are not using the monitor, turning it facing inward and setting
it in the camera body is recommended to prevent damage and dirt.
･Do not carry the camera by holding the monitor. This could result in
damage to the camera.
Shooting in self-portrait mode
❚❚
If the monitor is set to the self-portrait mode position, it will switch to
self-portrait mode.
Camera controls
41
The monitor will display an image as if it were reected on a mirror
(inverted image), but the actual image is saved from the perspective of
the camera.
･In self-portrait mode, you can use touch controls on the monitor to
set the self-timer and exposure compensation during photo mode. In
video mode, you can set the exposure compensation.
･If you tap the self-timer icon (q), you can set the shutter-release
delay and the number of shots.
･If you tap the exposure compensation icon (w), you can change the
image brightness.
･Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus. Press the shutter-
release button all the way down to take a photo.
･You can use touch AF and touch shutter.
･If you press the video-record button, a photo is taken in photo mode.
In video mode, video recording starts.
･If the monitor is moved from the self-portrait mode position, self-
portrait mode ends.
Camera controls
42
DSelf-portrait mode
In self-portrait mode, note the following:
･During self-portrait mode, controls other than the power switch, shutter-
release button, video-record button, photo/video selector, and mode dial
are disabled.
･If no operations are performed for about 1 minute when Custom Setting
c3 [Power o delay] > [Standby timer] is set to less than 1 minute, or for
the specied time when set to 1 minute or more, the standby timer will
expire.
･The following settings are xed.
- [Release mode]: [Self-timer]
- [Focus mode] in the video recording menu: [Full-time AF]
- [Touch controls] > [Enable/disable touch controls]: [Enable]
･The following functions cannot be used.
- [Long exposure NR]
- [Auto bracketing]
- [HDR (high dynamic range)]
- [Exposure delay mode]
･When [Self-portrait mode] (0402) in the setup menu is set to [Disable],
the monitor will not switch to self-portrait mode even if it is set to the self-
portrait mode position.
Touch controls
The touch-sensitive monitor oers a variety of controls that can be
operated by touching the display with your ngers.
Camera controls
43
Focusing and releasing the shutter
❚❚
･Touch the monitor to focus on the selected point (touch AF).
･In photo mode, the shutter will be released when you lift your nger
from the display (touch shutter).
･Touch shutter/AF settings can be adjusted by tapping the W icon
(0101).
Adjusting settings
❚❚
･Tap highlighted settings in the display.
･You can then choose the desired option by tapping icons or sliders.
Camera controls
44
･Tap Z or press J to select the chosen option and return to the
previous display.
Playback
❚❚
･Flick left or right to view other pictures during full-frame playback.
･In full-frame playback, touching the bottom of the display brings up
a frame-advance bar. Slide your nger left or right over the bar to
scroll rapidly to other pictures.
･To zoom in on a picture displayed during full-frame playback, use a
stretch gesture or give the display two quick taps. You can adjust the
Camera controls
45
zoom ratio using stretch gestures to zoom in and pinch gestures to
zoom out.
･Use slide gestures to view other parts of the image during zoom.
･Giving the display two quick taps while zoom is in eect cancels
zoom.
･To “zoom out” to a thumbnail view, use a pinch gesture during full-
frame playback. Use pinch and stretch to choose the number of
images displayed from 4, 9, and 72 frames.
･Using a pinch gesture when 72 frames are displayed selects calendar
playback. Use a stretch gesture to return to the 72-frame display.
Viewing videos
❚❚
･Videos are indicated by a 1 icon; to start playback, tap the on-screen
guide.
･Tap the display to pause. Tap again to resume.
Camera controls
46
･Tap Z to exit to full-frame playback.
The i menu
❚❚
･Tap the i icon to display the i menu during shooting (056,
0145).
･Tap items to view and change options.
Text entry
❚❚
･When a keyboard is displayed, you can enter text by tapping the keys.
1Text display area
2Keyboard area
3Keyboard selection
･To position the cursor, tap e or f or tap directly in the text display
area.
Camera controls
47
･To cycle through the upper- and lower-case and symbol keyboards,
tap the keyboard selection button.
Navigating the menus
❚❚
･Slide up or down to scroll.
･Tap a menu icon to choose a menu.
･Tap menu items to display options. You can then choose the desired
option by tapping icons or sliders.
･To exit without changing settings, tap Z.
Camera controls
48
DThe touch screen
･The touch screen responds to static electricity. It may not respond when
touched with ngernails or gloved hands.
･Do not touch the screen with sharp objects.
･Do not use excessive force.
･The screen may not respond when covered with third-party protective
lms.
･The screen may not respond when touched simultaneously in multiple
locations.
AEnabling or disabling touch controls
Touch controls can be enabled or disabled using the [Touch controls] item in
the setup menu.
The DISP button
Use the DISP button to cycle through the following displays:
Camera controls
49
Photo mode
❚❚
1Indicators on
2Simplied display
3Histogram 1, 2
4Virtual horizon
5Information display (0531)
1 Displayed when [On] is selected for Custom Setting d6 [Apply settings
to live view].
2 Not displayed if [On] is selected for [Overlay shooting] during multiple
exposure photography.
ATurning o the information display
In Custom Setting f2 [Custom controls (shooting)], you can assign [Live
view info display o] to turn o the information display at the press of a
button. Press it again to turn on the display.
Camera controls
50
Video mode
❚❚
1Indicators on
2Simplied display
3Histogram
4Virtual horizon
The X and W (Q) buttons
Zoom the display in the monitor in or out during shooting or playback.
Shooting
❚❚
Press X to zoom in on the view through the lens during shooting. Press
X to increase the zoom ratio, W (Q) to zoom out.
Camera controls
51
Playback
❚❚
Press X to zoom in on pictures during full-frame playback. Press X to
increase the zoom ratio, W (Q) to zoom out. Pressing W (Q) when the
picture is displayed full frame “zooms out” to the thumbnail list. Pressing
W (Q) when 72 frames are displayed selects calendar playback.
The A (g) button
Lock the focus and exposure when shooting, or protect images during
playback.
Shooting
❚❚
Lock the focus and exposure at the same time.
Playback
❚❚
Protect the current image.
Camera controls
52
The G button
Press the G button to view the menus.
1D [PLAYBACK MENU] (0229)
2C [PHOTO SHOOTING MENU]
(0234)
31 [VIDEO RECORDING MENU]
(0324)
4A [CUSTOM SETTINGS MENU]
(0335)
5B [SETUP MENU] (0386)
6N [RETOUCH MENU] (0419)
7O [MY MENU]/m [RECENT
SETTINGS]* (0444)
8The d Help icon (056)
9Current settings
* You can choose the menu displayed. The default is [MY MENU].
Camera controls
53
Using the menus
❚❚
You can navigate the menus using the multi selector and J button.
1Move cursor up
2Select highlighted item
3Display sub-menu, select
highlighted item, or move
cursor right
4Move cursor down
5Cancel and return to previous
menu, or move cursor left
1Highlight the icon for the current menu.
Press 4 to place the cursor in the menu-selection area.
Camera controls
54
2Select a menu.
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.
3Position the cursor in the selected menu.
Press 2 to position the cursor in the selected menu.
4Highlight a menu item.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a menu item.
Camera controls
55
5Display options.
Press 2 to display options for the selected menu item.
6Highlight an option.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option.
7Select the highlighted option.
･Press J to select the highlighted option.
･To exit without making a selection, press the G button.
･To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-
release button halfway.
DGrayed-out items
Some items and menu options may be unavailable depending on the mode
and camera status. Unavailable items are displayed in gray.
Camera controls
56
AThe d (help) icon
･Where available, a description of the currently-selected item can be
viewed by pressing the W (Q) button.
･Press 1 or 3 to scroll.
･Press W (Q) again to return to the menus.
ATouch controls
You can also navigate the menus using touch controls (042).
The i button (the i menu)
For quick access to frequently-used settings, press the i button or tap
the i icon to view the i menu.
･Dierent menus are displayed during photo mode and video mode.
Camera controls
57
･Options can be viewed by tapping items in the display or by
highlighting items and pressing J; selections can then be made
using the multi selector.
･Items for which the camera displays an on-screen guide can be
adjusted by highlighting them in the i menu and rotating a
command dial. In some cases, adjustments can be made using both
the main and sub-command dials.
AThe playback i menu
Pressing the i button during playback displays a context-sensitive i menu of
frequently-used playback options.
Customizing the i menu
❚❚
The items displayed in the i menu during shooting can be chosen using
Custom Setting f1 or g1 [Customize i menu].
Camera controls
58
1Highlight Custom Setting f1 or g1 [Customize i menu] and
press J.
See “The G button” (052) for information on using the menus.
2Highlight the position you want to change and press J.
A list of the items available for the selected position will be
displayed.
3Highlight the desired item and press J.
･The item will be assigned to the selected position and the options
shown in Step 2 will be displayed.
･Repeat Steps 2 and 3 as desired.
4Press the G button.
Changes will be saved and the Custom Settings menu will be
displayed.
Camera controls
59
The Fn1 and Fn2 buttons
Use the Fn1 or Fn2 button for quick access to selected settings.
･By default, the Fn1 button is assigned white balance (0109) and the
Fn2 button focus- and AF-area–mode selection (090).
･The assigned setting can be adjusted by holding the Fn1 or Fn2
button and rotating the command dials. In some cases, adjustments
can be made using both the main and sub-command dials.
Choosing roles for the Fn1 and Fn2 buttons
❚❚
The roles played by the Fn1 and Fn2 buttons can be selected by using
Custom Setting f2 [Custom controls (shooting)] or g2 [Custom
controls] > [Fn1 button] and [Fn2 button].
1Highlight Custom Setting f2 [Custom controls (shooting)] or g2
[Custom controls] and press J.
See “The G button” (052) for information on using the menus.
Camera controls
60
2Highlight the option for the desired button and press J.
A list of the items available for the selected button will be displayed.
3Highlight the desired item and press J.
･The item will be assigned to the selected button and the options
shown in Step 2 will be displayed.
･Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to assign a role to the remaining button.
4Press the G button.
Changes will be saved and the Custom Settings menu will be
displayed.
Attaching the strap
61
First steps
Attaching the strap
To attach a strap (whether the supplied strap or one that has been
purchased separately):
Inserting the battery and a memory card
62
Inserting the battery and a memory
card
･Turn the camera o before inserting or removing the battery and
memory card.
･Using the battery to keep the orange battery latch pressed to one
side, slide the battery into the battery chamber until the latch locks it
in place.
･Holding the memory card in the orientation shown, slide it straight
into the slot until it clicks into place.
Inserting the battery and a memory card
63
DRemoving the battery
To remove the battery, turn the camera o and open the battery-chamber/
memory card slot cover. Press the battery latch in the direction shown by the
arrow to release the battery and then remove the battery by hand.
DRemoving the memory card
After conrming that the memory card access lamp is o, turn the camera o
and open the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover. Press the memory
card in to eject it (q), and pull it out to remove it (w).
Battery level
･The battery level is shown in the shooting display while the camera is
on.
Inserting the battery and a memory card
64
･The battery level display changes as the battery level diminishes,
from L through K, and H. When the battery level falls to H,
suspend shooting and charge the battery or ready a spare battery.
･If the message [Shutter release disabled. Recharge battery.] is
displayed, charge or exchange the battery.
DThe standby timer
The camera uses a standby timer to help reduce the drain on the battery. If
no operations are performed for about 30 seconds, the standby timer will
expire and the monitor will turn o. A few seconds prior to turning o, the
display will dim. They can be reactivated by pressing the shutter-release
button halfway. The length of time before the standby timer expires
automatically can be selected using Custom Setting c3 [Power o delay] >
[Standby timer].
Number of exposures remaining
･When the camera is on, the shooting display shows the number of
photographs that can be taken at current settings.
･Values over 1000 are rounded down to the nearest hundred. For
example, values between 1500 and 1599 are shown as 1.5 k.
Charging the battery
65
Charging the battery
Fully charge the supplied EN-EL25 battery before use. With the battery
inserted in the camera, connect the camera with a computer using the
supplied USB cable to charge.
DBattery care
Read and follow the warnings and cautions in “For your safety” (020) and
“Caring for the camera and battery: Cautions” (0572).
1Insert the EN-EL25 into the camera (062).
Charging the battery
66
2After conrming that the camera is o, connect the supplied
USB cable (q) to the camera, and then connect it to a computer.
Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
･Turn on the computer before charging.
･The camera charge lamp (w) lights amber while charging is in
progress. The lamp turns o when charging is complete.
･A battery will fully charge in about 7 hours and 40 minutes (when
charging an exhausted battery at an input of 5 V/500 mA).
Depending on the standard and type of USB connector on the
computer, the charging time may be shorter.
･When charging is complete, disconnect the USB cable. Be sure to
keep the connectors straight when disconnecting them.
･Computers will also supply current to power the battery when
connected via a UC-E25 USB cable (available separately).
Charging the battery
67
DNotes when charging using the supplied USB cable
･If the battery cannot be charged using the supplied USB cable to connect
the camera and computer, for example because the battery is not
compatible or the temperature of the camera is elevated, the charge lamp
will ash rapidly for about 30 seconds and then turn o. If the charge
lamp is o and you did not observe the battery charging, turn the camera
on and check the battery level.
･When charging, do not use the connectors of a USB hub or keyboard.
Connect the camera and computer directly.
･If the computer goes into hibernation (sleep mode) while charging, the
camera stops charging. To continue charging, wake up the computer from
hibernation (sleep mode).
･Depending on the model and product specications, some computers
will not supply current to charge the camera.
AUsing the supplied USB cable or a separately sold UC-E25
USB cable to supply power
･If [Enable] is selected for [USB power delivery] in the setup menu, the
camera will be supplied with power when it is turned on. For more
information, see ““Power delivery” versus “charging”” (0411).
･The battery will not charge while the camera is powered by an outside
source.
･If you use the supplied USB cable to supply power from a computer, the
camera battery will be consumed even while power is being supplied. If
you use the separately sold UC-E25 USB cable, the camera battery will not
be consumed (the camera battery may be consumed depending on your
computer model and specications).
ACharging or supplying power from a household outlet
When charging or supplying power from a household outlet, use the
separately sold EH-7P Charging AC Adapter (0557).
Attaching a lens
68
Attaching a lens
･The camera can be used with Z mount lenses. The lens generally used
in this document for illustrative purposes is a NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm
f/3.5–6.3 VR.
･Be careful to prevent dust entering the camera.
･Conrm that the camera is o before attaching the lens.
- Remove the camera body cap (q, w) and rear lens cap (e, r).
- Align the mounting marks on the camera (t) and lens (y). Do not
touch the image sensor or lens contacts.
Attaching a lens
69
- Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into place (u).
･Remove the front lens cap before taking pictures.
DF mount lenses
･Be sure to attach the FTZ II/FTZ mount adapter (available separately)
before using F mount lenses (0556).
･Attempting to attach F mount lenses directly to the camera could damage
the lens or image sensor.
Detaching lenses
･After turning the camera o, press and hold the lens release button
(q) while turning the lens in the direction shown (w), and then
detach the lens.
･After removing the lens, replace the lens caps and camera body cap.
Opening the monitor
70
Opening the monitor
Slowly rotate the monitor without using excessive force.
Turning on the camera
71
Turning on the camera
When the camera is turned on for the rst time, the language selection
screen is displayed. Choose a language and then set the camera clock
(no other operations can be performed until the clock is set).
1Turn the camera on.
･The [Language] selection screen will be displayed.
2Select a language.
･Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired language and press J (the
languages available vary with the country or region in which the
camera was originally purchased).
･The [Time zone] screen will be displayed.
Turning on the camera
72
3Choose a time zone.
･Press 1 or 3 to choose a time zone and press J.
･The display shows the selected cities in the chosen zone and the
dierence between the time in the chosen zone and UTC.
･The [Date format] screen will be displayed.
4Choose a date format.
･Highlight the desired date (year, month, and day) display order
and press J.
･The [Daylight saving time] screen will be displayed.
Turning on the camera
73
5Turn daylight saving time on or o.
･Highlight [On] (daylight saving time on) or [O] (daylight saving
time o) and press J.
･Selecting [On] advances the clock one hour; to undo the eect,
select [O].
･The [Date and time] screen will be displayed.
6Set the clock.
･Press 4 or 2 to highlight date and time items and press 1 or 3 to
change them.
･Press J to conrm the date and time setting.
･The message [Done.] will be displayed and the camera switches to
shooting mode.
Turning on the camera
74
DThe 1 icon
A ashing 1 icon in the shooting display indicates that the camera clock has
been reset. The date and time recorded with new photographs will not be
correct; use the [Time zone and date] > [Date and time] option in the setup
menu to set the clock to the correct time and date. The camera clock is
powered by an independent clock battery. The clock battery charges when
the main battery is inserted in the camera. It takes about 2 days to charge.
Once charged, it will power the clock for about a month.
Taking photographs (b auto)
75
Basic photography and
playback
Taking photographs (b auto)
Select b (auto) mode for simple “point-and-shoot” photography.
DLenses with retractable barrels
Lenses with retractable barrels must be extended before use. Rotate the
zoom ring as shown until the lens clicks into the extended position.
1Select photo mode by rotating the photo/video selector to C.
2Rotate the mode dial to b.
Taking photographs (b auto)
76
3Ready the camera.
Holding the handgrip in your right hand and cradling the camera
body or lens with your left, bring your elbows in against the sides of
your chest.
Landscape (wide)
orientation
Portrait (tall) orientation
4Frame the photograph.
Position the main subject in the AF-area brackets (5).
･The AF-area brackets will disappear and a yellow border indicating
the focus point appears around the faces of human subjects
detected by the camera. If the camera detects the subject’s eyes,
the yellow focus point will instead appear over one or the other of
their eyes.
Taking photographs (b auto)
77
5Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus.
･The focus point will be displayed in green when the camera
focuses. If the camera is unable to focus, the AF-area brackets will
ash.
･If the camera detects human faces or eyes, the focus point will
light green when the subject is in focus. The focus point will ash
in red when the camera does not focus.
6Smoothly press the shutter-release button the rest of the way
down to take the photograph.
Taking photographs (b auto)
78
DThe memory card access lamp
The memory card access lamp will light while the photograph is being
recorded. Do not remove the memory card or battery.
Taking photographs (b auto)
79
AThe touch shutter
You can also take a photograph by touching the monitor. Touch your subject
to focus and lift your nger to release the shutter.
AZooming in photo mode
Press the X button in photo mode to zoom in on the view (up to about 31×).
･The zoom ratio increases every time you press the X button, and
decreases every time you press the W (Q) button.
･A navigation window showing the area currently visible will appear at the
bottom right corner of the display.
･Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in the
monitor.
Recording videos (b auto)
80
Recording videos (b auto)
b (auto) mode can also be used for simple, “point-and-shoot” video
recording.
1Select video mode by rotating the photo/video selector to 1.
Note that optional ash units cannot be used when the camera is in
video mode.
2Rotate the mode dial to b.
Recording videos (b auto)
81
3Press the video-record button to start recording.
･The REC lamp will light and a recording indicator will be displayed
in the monitor. The monitor also shows the time remaining, or in
other words the approximate amount of new footage that can be
recorded to the memory card.
1Recording indicator
2Time remaining
･Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone. Do not cover the
microphone during recording.
･If you tap your subject in the monitor during recording, the focus
point will track the subject as it moves through the frame (0100).
4Press the video-record button again to end recording.
Recording videos (b auto)
82
DThe memory card access lamp
The memory card access lamp will light while the video is being recorded. Do
not remove the memory card or battery.
DThe 0 icon
A 0 icon indicates that videos cannot be recorded.
DThe REC lamp
･If there is a risk of video recording being interrupted, the REC lamp will
ash as follows.
Status Description
Flashes slowly When the remaining time that can be recorded on
the memory card is short while recording videos
Flashes twice quickly
(repeats) When the battery is low during video mode
Flashes 4 times
quickly (repeats)
When the temperature inside the camera
increases during video mode
･The brightness of the REC lamp can be changed using [REC lamp
brightness] in the setup menu. To prevent the light from the REC lamp
from appearing in videos, set [Video recording] to [O].
DRecording videos
･Video recording will end automatically if:
- the maximum length is reached,
- the battery is fully discharged,
- another mode is selected,
Recording videos (b auto)
83
- you switch modes using the photo/video selector,
-the lens is removed, or
- the temperature inside the camera increases.
･Sounds made by the camera may be audible in footage recorded:
- during autofocus,
- during vibration reduction, or
- when power aperture is used.
Taking photos in video mode
Photos can be taken in video mode by pressing the shutter-release
button all the way down. If you rotate either command dial while
pressing the c (E) button in video mode, you can select the single
frame or continuous release mode.
･A C icon will ash in the display when a photo is taken.
･The frame advance rate for [Continuous] release mode varies with
the option selected for [Frame size/frame rate].
･Photos can be taken while recording is in progress. Taking photos
does not interrupt video recording. Note, however, that only one
photo will be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed,
even if [Continuous] is selected for release mode.
Recording videos (b auto)
84
DTaking photos in video mode
･Photo-mode settings do not apply to photos taken in video mode.
･Up to 40 photographs can be taken with each video.
･Note that photos can be taken even when the subject is not in focus.
･Photos are recorded at the dimensions currently selected for video frame
size.
･Image quality is xed at [JPEG ne].
･A N icon indicates that photos cannot be taken.
DPhotography and video recording
･You may notice the following in the shooting display. These phenomena
will also be visible in any photos or footage recorded with the camera.
- Flicker or banding in scenes lit by such sources as uorescent, mercury
vapor, or sodium lamps
- Moving objects in the display appear distorted (individual subjects such
as trains or cars moving at high speed through the frame may be
distorted, or the entire frame may appear distorted when the camera is
panned horizontally)
- Jagged edges, color fringing,
moiré
, and bright spots may appear in the
display
- Bright regions or bands may appear in scenes lit by ashing signs and
other intermittent light sources or when the subject is briey
illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary light source
- Flicker occurring when power aperture is used during video recording
･Note that noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) and
unexpected colors may appear if you use the X button to zoom in on the
view through the lens during recording.
･When recording, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong
light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to
the camera’s internal circuitry.
Recording videos (b auto)
85
AZooming in video mode
Press the X button in video mode to zoom in on the view (079). Press the X
button during video recording to display at 1:1 (100%). Press the W (Q)
button to cancel zoom.
Viewing photos
86
Viewing photos
Press the K button to view photos and videos recorded with the
camera on the monitor.
･Press 4 or 2, or ick left or right on the monitor to view other
images.
･Videos are indicated by a 1 icon at the upper left of the monitor.
Press the J button, or tap the a icon in the monitor to play back
videos.
･To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-
release button halfway.
Viewing videos
Monitor display and operation during video playback are as follows.
Viewing photos
87
Monitor display during video playback
❚❚
The following information is displayed during video playback, allowing
you to conrm the video length and playback time. Your approximate
position in the video can also be conrmed from the video progress bar.
11 icon
2Length
3a icon
4Current position/total length
5Progress bar
6Volume
7Guide
Video playback operations
❚❚
You can perform the following during video playback.
Operation Description
Pause Press 3 to pause playback.
Resume Press the J button to resume playback when playback is
paused or during rewind/advance.
Rewind/
advance
･Press 4 to rewind, 2 to advance. Speed increases with
each press, from 2× to 4× to 8× to 16×.
･Keep 4 or 2 pressed to skip respectively to the rst
frame or last frame.
･The rst frame is indicated by a h in the top right
corner of the display, the last frame by a i.
Viewing photos
88
Operation Description
Start slow-
motion
playback
Press 3 while the video is paused to start slow-motion
playback.
Jog rewind/
advance
･Press 4 or 2 while the video is paused to rewind or
advance one frame at a time.
･Keep 4 or 2 pressed for continuous rewind or
advance.
Skip 10 s Rotate the main command dial one stop to skip ahead or
back 10 s.
Skip to last or
rst frame
Rotate the sub-command dial to skip to the last or rst
frame.
Adjust volume Press X to increase volume, W (Q) to decrease.
Trim video To display the [EDIT VIDEO] menu, pause playback and
press the i button.
Exit Press 1 or K to exit to full-frame playback.
Resume
shooting
Press the shutter-release button halfway to return to
shooting mode.
Deleting unwanted pictures
Pictures can be deleted as described below. Note that pictures cannot
be recovered once deleted.
Viewing photos
89
1Display the picture.
･Press the K button to start playback and press 4 or 2 until the
desired picture is displayed.
2Delete the picture.
･Press the O button; a conrmation dialog will be displayed. Press
the O button again to delete the image and return to playback.
･To exit without deleting the picture, press K.
AThe playback menu [Delete] item
Use [Delete] in the playback menu to:
･Delete multiple pictures
･Delete pictures taken on selected dates
･Delete all pictures in selected folders
Focus
90
Basic settings
Focus
Focus mode
Choose how the camera focuses.
Choosing a focus mode
❚❚
･The focus mode can be selected using the [Focus mode] items in the
i menu, photo shooting menu, and video recording menu (0170,
0265, 0330).
･At default settings, the focus mode can also be selected by holding
the Fn2 button and rotating the main command dial (059).
Option Description
AF-A [AF mode
auto-switch]
･The camera uses AF-S for stationary subjects, and
AF-C for moving subjects.
･Available only in photo mode.
Focus
91
Option Description
AF-S [Single AF]
･Use with stationary subjects. When you press the
shutter-release button halfway to focus, the focus
point will turn from red to green and focus will
lock. If the camera fails to focus, the focus point
will ash red and the shutter release will be
disabled.
･At default settings, the shutter can only be
released if the camera is able to focus (focus
priority).
AF-C [Continuous
AF]
･For moving subjects. The camera adjusts focus
continuously in response to changes in the
distance to the subject while the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway.
･At default settings, the shutter can be released
whether or not the subject is in focus (release
priority).
AF-F [Full-time AF]
･The camera adjusts focus continuously in
response to subject movement or changes in
composition.
･When the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway, the focus point will turn from red to
green and focus will lock.
･This option is only available in video mode.
MF [Manual focus]Focus manually (0103). The shutter can be released
whether or not the subject is in focus.
Focus
92
DAutofocus
･The camera may be unable to focus if:
- The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame
- The subject lacks contrast
- The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting
brightness
- The focus point includes night-time spot lighting or a neon sign or other
light source that changes in brightness
- Flicker or banding appears under uorescent, mercury-vapor, sodium-
vapor, or similar lighting
- A cross (star) lter or other special lter is used
- The subject appears smaller than the focus point
- The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds or a
row of windows in a skyscraper)
- The subject is moving
･The monitor may brighten or darken while the camera focuses.
･The focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is
unable to focus.
AFocus position memory
To save the focus position even when the camera is turned o, set [Save
focus position] in the setup menu to [On]. However, some time may be
required until the camera can be used after turning it on (depending on
zoom operation and changes in temperature, the focus position after turning
on the camera may change from the position before the camera was turned
o).
AF-area mode
Choose how the camera selects the focus point for autofocus.
･In modes other than [Auto-area AF], [Auto-area AF (people)], and
[Auto-area AF (animals)], the focus point can be positioned using
the multi selector (097).
Focus
93
Choosing an AF-area mode
❚❚
･AF-area mode can be selected using the [AF-area mode] items in the
i menu, photo shooting menu, and video recording menu (0169,
0266, 0331).
･At default settings, AF-area mode can also be selected by holding the
Fn2 button and rotating the sub-command dial (059).
Option Description
3[Pinpoint
AF]
･With a focus area smaller than that employed for
single-point AF, pinpoint AF is used for pinpoint focus
on a selected spot in the frame.
･Focusing may be slower than with single-point AF.
･Recommended for shots involving static subjects,
such as buildings, in-studio product photography, or
close-ups.
･This option is only available when photo mode is
selected and [Single AF] is chosen for [Focus mode].
d[Single-
point AF]
･The camera focuses on a point selected by the user.
･Use with stationary subjects.
Focus
94
Option Description
e[Dynamic-
area AF]
･The camera focuses on a point selected by the user. If
the subject briey leaves the selected point, the
camera will focus based on information from
surrounding focus points.
･Use for photographs of athletes and other active
subjects that are hard to frame using single-point AF.
･This option is only available when photo mode is
selected and [AF mode auto-switch] or [Continuous
AF] is chosen for focus mode.
Focus
95
Option Description
f[Wide-area
AF (S)]
･As for single-point AF except that the camera focuses
on a wider area.
･Choose for snapshots, subjects that are in motion, and
other subjects that are dicult to photograph using
single-point AF.
･During video recording, wide-area AF can be used for
smooth focus when making panning or tilting shots or
recording moving subjects.
･If the selected focus area contains subjects at dierent
distances from the camera, the camera will assign
priority to the closest subject.
･The focus areas for [Wide-area AF (L)] are larger than
those for [Wide-area AF (S)].
･If [Wide-area AF (L-people)] is selected, the camera
detects and focuses on human faces or eyes (eye-
detection AF/face-detection AF, 097).
･If [Wide-area AF (L-animals)] is selected, the camera
detects and focuses on faces or eyes of dogs and cats
(animal-detection AF, 099).
g[Wide-area
AF (L)]
1
[Wide-area
AF (L-
people)]
2
[Wide-area
AF (L-
animals)]
Focus
96
Option Description
h[Auto-area
AF]
･The camera automatically detects the subject and
selects the focus area.
･Use on occasions when you don’t have time to select
the focus point yourself, for portraits, or for snapshots
and other spur-of-the-moment photos.
･If [Auto-area AF (people)] is selected, the camera
detects and focuses on human faces or eyes (eye-
detection AF/face-detection AF, 097).
･If [Auto-area AF (animals)] is selected, the camera
detects and focuses on faces or eyes of dogs and cats
(animal-detection AF, 099).
･Subject tracking (0100) can be initiated by pressing
the J button. Custom Setting f2 [Custom controls
(shooting)] or g2 [Custom controls] can be used to
congure the Fn1 or Fn2 button to start subject-
tracking AF (0359, 0375). Subject-tracking AF can
also be assigned to the lens Fn or Fn2 button.
5[Auto-area
AF (people)]
6
[Auto-area
AF
(animals)]
As: The center focus point
A dot appears in the focus point when it is in the center of the frame.
AQuick focus-point selection
･For quicker focus-point selection, choose [Alternating points] for Custom
Setting a4 [Focus points used] to use only a quarter of the available focus
points. The number of points available for [Pinpoint AF], [Wide-area AF
(L)], [Wide-area AF (L-people)], or [Wide-area AF (L-animals)] does not
change even if [Alternating points] is selected.
･You can choose [Select center focus point] for Custom Setting f2
[Custom controls (shooting)] > [OK button] to allow the J button to be
used to quickly select the center focus point.
Focus
97
Focus-point selection
❚❚
The multi selector can be used to choose the focus point when an
option other than [Auto-area AF], [Auto-area AF (people)], or [Auto-
area AF (animals)] is selected for AF-area mode (092).
Detecting faces or eyes of portrait subjects (face/
eye-detection AF)
❚❚
If [Wide-area AF (L-people)] or [Auto-area AF (people)] is selected for
[AF-area mode] in the photo shooting menu or video recording menu,
the camera detects human faces and eyes (eye-detection AF/face-
detection AF).
･A yellow border indicating the focus point appears around the faces
of human subjects detected by the camera. If the camera detects the
Focus
98
subject’s eyes, the yellow focus point will instead appear over one or
the other of their eyes.
･If AF-C is selected for focus mode or if AF-A is selected and the
camera is using AF-C, the focus point will light yellow when faces or
eyes are detected.
･If AF-S is selected for focus mode or if AF-A is selected and the
camera is using AF-S, the focus point will turn green when the
camera focuses.
･If more than one human face or eye is detected when [Auto-area AF
(people)] is selected, e and f icons will appear on the focus point.
You will be able to position the focus point over a dierent face or
eye by pressing 4 or 2.
･If the subject looks away after their face is detected, the focus point
will move to track their motion.
･During playback, you can zoom in on the face or eye used for focus
by pressing J.
DFace/eye-detection AF
Eye and face detection may not perform as expected if:
･the subject’s face occupies a very large or very small proportion of the
frame,
･the subject’s face is lit too brightly or too poorly,
･the subject is wearing glasses or sunglasses,
･the subject’s face or eyes are obscured by hair or other objects, or
･the subject moves excessively during shooting.
Focus
99
Focusing on the faces or eyes of animals (animal-
detection AF)
❚❚
If [Wide-area AF (L-animals)] or [Auto-area AF (animals)] is selected
for [AF-area mode] in the photo shooting menu or video recording
menu, the camera detects the faces and eyes of dogs and cats (animal-
detection AF).
･When the camera detects a face of a dog or cat, a yellow border
indicating the focus point will appear around the subject’s face. If the
camera detects the subject’s eyes, the yellow focus point will instead
appear over one or the other of their eyes.
･If AF-C is selected for focus mode or if AF-A is selected and the
camera is using AF-C, the focus point will light yellow when faces or
eyes are detected.
･If AF-S is selected for focus mode or if AF-A is selected and the
camera is using AF-S, the focus point will turn green when the
camera focuses.
･If [Auto-area AF (animals)] is selected and more than one animal or
more than one eye is detected, e and f icons will appear on the
focus point. You will be able to position the focus point over a
dierent face or eye by pressing 4 or 2.
Focus
100
･During playback, you can zoom in on the face or eye used for focus
by pressing J.
DAnimal-detection AF
･Animal face- and eye-detection may not perform as expected if:
- the subject’s face occupies a very large or very small proportion of the
frame,
- the subject’s face is lit too brightly or too poorly,
- the subject’s face or eyes are obscured by fur or other objects,
- the subject’s eyes are similar in color to the rest of their face, or
- the subject moves excessively during shooting.
･Depending on shooting conditions, the camera may fail to detect the
faces or eyes of some breeds when [Wide-area AF (L-animals)] or [Auto-
area AF (animals)] is enabled. Alternatively, the camera may display a
border around subjects that are not the faces or eyes of dogs or cats.
Subject-tracking AF
❚❚
When [Auto-area AF], [Auto-area AF (people)], or [Auto-area AF
(animals)] is selected for AF-area mode, the camera can track the
subject in the selected focus point.
･Press J to enable focus tracking; the focus point will change to a
targeting reticle.
･Position the reticle over the target and press J again to start
tracking; the focus point will track the selected subject as it moves
through the frame. To end tracking and select the center focus point,
press J again. In photo mode, if subject tracking was initiated in
focus mode AF-C or AF-A by pressing the shutter-release button
Focus
101
halfway, the camera will track the subject only while the shutter-
release button is pressed; releasing the shutter-release button ends
tracking and restores the focus point selected before tracking started.
･To exit subject-tracking mode, press the W (Q) button.
DSubject tracking
The camera may be unable to track subjects if they:
･are similar in color or brightness to the background,
･change visibly in size, color, or brightness,
･are too large or too small,
･are too dark or too bright,
･move quickly, or
･leave the frame or are obscured by other objects.
The touch shutter
Touch the display to focus on the selected point. The shutter will be
released when you lift your nger from the display.
Tap the icon shown in the illustration to choose the operation
performed by tapping the display.
Focus
102
Option Description
W
[Touch
shutter/
touch AF]
･Touch the display to focus on the selected point and
lift your nger to release the shutter. If [Wide-area AF
(L-people)], [Wide-area AF (L-animals)], [Auto-area
AF (people)], or [Auto-area AF (animals)] is selected
for AF-area mode and the camera detects human faces
or eyes or the faces or eyes of dogs or cats, the camera
will focus on the face or eye* closest to the selected
point.
･Available only in photo mode.
V[Touch AF]
･Touch the display to focus on the selected point.
Lifting your nger from the display does not release
the shutter.
･If [Auto-area AF], [Auto-area AF (people)], or [Auto-
area AF (animals)] is selected for AF-area mode, the
camera will track the selected subject as it moves
through the frame. To switch to a dierent subject, tap
it in the display. If the camera detects human faces or
eyes or the faces or eyes of dogs or cats, the camera
will focus on and track the face or eye* closest to the
selected point.
X[O] Touch shutter disabled.
f
[Position
focus
point]
･Touch the display to position the focus point. The
camera will not focus and lifting your nger from the
display will not release the shutter.
･If [Auto-area AF], [Auto-area AF (people)], or [Auto-
area AF (animals)] is selected for AF-area mode, the
camera will track the selected subject as it moves
through the frame. To switch to a dierent subject, tap
it in the display. If the camera detects human faces or
eyes or the faces or eyes of dogs or cats, the camera
will track the face or eye* closest to the selected point.
Focus
103
* When choosing an eye using touch controls, note that the camera may
not focus on the eye on the side you intend. Use the multi selector to
choose the desired eye.
DTaking pictures using touch shooting options
･Touch controls cannot be used for manual focus.
･The shutter-release button can be used to take pictures when the W icon
is displayed.
･Touch controls cannot be used to take photographs during video
recording.
･Even if the camera is set to a continuous release mode, touch controls can
be used only to take one picture at a time. Use the shutter-release button
for burst photography.
･In self-timer mode, focus locks on the selected subject when you touch
the monitor and the shutter is released about 10 seconds after you lift
your nger from the display. If the number of shots selected is greater
than 1, the remaining shots will be taken in a single burst.
Manual focus
Manual focus is available in manual focus mode. Use manual focus
when, for example, autofocus does not produce the desired results.
･Position the focus point over your subject and rotate the focus or
control ring until the subject is in focus.
Focus
104
･For greater precision, press the X button to zoom in on the view
through the lens.
･The focus indicator (I) in the shooting display can be used to
conrm whether the subject in the selected focus point is in focus
(electronic rangending). The focus point will also light green when
the subject is in focus.
1Focus distance indicator 2Focus indicator
Focus indicator Description
(steady) The subject is in focus.
(steady) The focus point is in front of the subject.
(steady) The focus point is behind the subject.
(ashes) The camera is unable to focus.
Focus
105
･When using manual focus with subjects not suited to autofocus, note
that the in-focus indicator (I) may be displayed when the subject is
not in focus. Zoom in on the view through the lens and check focus.
Use of a tripod is recommended when the camera is having trouble
focusing.
DLenses with focus-mode selection
Manual focus mode can be chosen using focus-mode selection controls on
the lens (where available).
DThe focal plane mark and ange-back distance
Focus distance is measured from the focal plane mark (E) on the camera
body, which shows the position of the focal plane inside the camera (q). Use
this mark when measuring the distance to your subject for manual focus or
macro photography. The distance between the focal plane and the lens
mounting ange is known as the “ange-back distance” (w). On this camera,
the ange-back distance is 16 mm (0.63 in.).
Focus
106
AFocus peaking
･If an option other than [O] is selected for Custom Setting d8 [Focus
peaking] > [Peaking level], objects that are in focus will be indicated by
colored outlines that appear when focus is adjusted manually (focus
peaking).
･Note that focus peaking may not be displayed if the camera is unable to
detect outlines. Check focus in the shooting display.
Save focus position/Recall focus position
You can use the lens Fn and Fn2 buttons to register the focus position
beforehand and quickly recall the focus position. You can use this
function if a Z mount lens with an autofocus function that has Fn and
Fn2 buttons is attached.
･If the attached lens has an Fn button but no Fn2 button, you can
assign [Save focus position] to the lens Fn button, but the focus
position cannot be registered even if you press the lens Fn button.
1In Custom Setting f2 [Custom controls (shooting)] or g2 [Custom
controls], assign the functions to the lens buttons.
Set as follows.
･[Lens Fn button]: [Save focus position]
･[Lens Fn2 button]: [Recall focus position]
Focus
107
2Focus on the subject and then press and hold the lens Fn button
to register the focus position.
･When the focus position is registered, the 4 icon appears in the
shooting display.
･The focus position can be registered regardless of the focus mode
setting.
･The registered focus position is saved even when the camera is
turned o, and the registered focus position is canceled when the
lens is removed.
3Press the lens Fn2 button to recall the registered focus position.
･When using autofocus, autofocus features such as Custom Setting
a6 [AF activation] will be available after the focus position is
recalled. To prevent focusing by pressing the shutter-release
button halfway after recalling the focus position, set [AF
activation] to [AF-ON only].
Focus
108
DAbout beeps
･If you select an option other than [O] for [Beep options] > [Beep on/o]
in the setup menu, 2 short beeps sound when:
- you press and hold the lens Fn button to register the focus position, or
- you press the lens Fn2 button to recall the registered focus position.
･During silent photography or video mode, a beep does not sound even if
you register the focus position or recall the focus position regardless of
the option chosen for [Beep options] in the setup menu.
D[Save focus position]/[Recall focus position]
･If the information display appears in the monitor, the focus position
cannot be registered.
･Depending on temperature changes, the focus position may change
when it is registered and when it is recalled.
･If the focal length changes due to zoom operation, the focus position is
likely to change when it is registered and when it is recalled. If you select
an option other than [O] for [Beep options] > [Beep on/o] in the setup
menu and the focus position is recalled, 4 short beeps sound.
White balance
109
White balance
White balance ensures that white objects appear white, regardless of
the color of the light source. The default setting (auto white balance, or
j) is recommended with most light sources; if the desired results
cannot be achieved with auto white balance, choose another option as
described below.
Adjusting white balance
･White balance can be selected using the [White balance] items in
the i menu and the photo shooting menu or video recording menu
(0153, 0244, 0327).
･At default settings, white balance can also be selected by holding the
Fn1 button and rotating the main command dial (059).
White balance
110
･When 4 [Auto] or I [Fluorescent] is selected, you can choose a
sub-option by holding the Fn1 button and rotating the sub-
command dial.
Option Color
temperature* Description
4 [Auto]
White balance is adjusted
automatically for optimal results
with most light sources. If an
optional ash unit is used, white
balance will be adjusted in accord
with the conditions in eect when
the ash res.
i [Keep white
(reduce warm
colors)]
Approx. 3500–
8000 K
Eliminate the warm color cast
produced by incandescent lighting.
j [Keep
overall
atmosphere]
Approx. 3500–
8000 K
Partially preserve the warm color
cast produced by incandescent
lighting.
k [Keep warm
lighting colors]
Approx. 3500–
8000 K
Preserve the warm color cast
produced by incandescent lighting.
D [Natural light
auto]
Approx. 4500–
8000 K
When used under natural light in
place of 4 [Auto], this option
produces colors closer to those
seen by the naked eye.
White balance
111
Option Color
temperature* Description
H [Direct
sunlight]Approx. 5200 K Use with subjects lit by direct
sunlight.
G [Cloudy] Approx. 6000 K Use in daylight under overcast
skies.
M [Shade] Approx. 8000 K Use in daylight with subjects in
shade.
J [Incandescent] Approx. 3000 K Use under incandescent lighting.
I [Fluorescent]
Use under uorescent lighting;
choose the bulb type according to
the light source.
[Cool-white
uorescent]Approx. 4200 K
[Day white
uorescent]Approx. 5000 K
[Daylight
uorescent]Approx. 6500 K
5 [Flash] Approx. 5400 K Use for ash photography.
K [Choose color
temperature]
Approx. 2500–
10000 K
･Choose the color temperature
directly.
･To choose a color temperature,
hold the Fn1 button and rotate
the sub-command dial.
White balance
112
Option Color
temperature* Description
L [Preset manual]
･Measure white balance for the
subject or light source or copy
white balance from an existing
photograph.
･To choose a white balance
preset, hold the Fn1 button and
rotate the sub-command dial.
･To enter direct measurement
mode, press and hold the Fn1
button (0156).
* Values when ne-tuning is set to 0.
DD [Natural light auto]
D [Natural light auto] may not produce the desired results under articial
light. Choose 4 [Auto] or an option that matches the light source.
DWhite balance ne-tuning
At settings other than K [Choose color temperature], white balance can be
ne-tuned. Use the [White balance] items in the i menu, the photo shooting
menu, or video recording menu (0154, 0244).
DStudio ash lighting
4 [Auto] may not produce the desired results with large studio ash units.
Use preset manual white balance or set white balance to 5 [Flash] and use
ne-tuning to adjust white balance.
White balance
113
AColor temperature when shooting with 4 or D
･The photo info for pictures shot using 4 [Auto] or D [Natural light
auto] lists the color temperature selected by the camera at the time the
picture was taken. You can use this as reference when choosing a value for
K [Choose color temperature].
･To view shooting data during playback, select [Playback display
options] > [Additional photo info] in the playback menu and place a
check (M) next to [Shooting data].
AColor temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer; some may have a
red cast while others appear blue. Color temperature is an objective measure
of the color of a light source, expressed in Kelvins (K). The lower the color
temperature, the redder the cast (q); the higher the temperature, the bluer
the cast (w).
AChoosing a color temperature
In general, choose lower values if your pictures have a red cast or to
intentionally make pictures bluer, higher values if your pictures are tinged
blue or to intentionally make pictures redder.
Silent photography
114
Silent photography
To enable the electronic shutter and eliminate the noise and vibration
caused by operation of the mechanical shutter, select [On] for [Silent
photography] in the photo shooting menu.
･An icon is displayed while silent photography is in eect.
･There is no limit to the number of photos that can be taken in a
single burst, regardless of the option chosen for Custom Setting d2
[Maximum shots per burst].
･The electronic shutter is used, regardless of the option selected for
Custom Setting d4 [Shutter type].
･If a release mode other than [Continuous H (extended)] is selected,
the display will briey go dark when the shutter is released. This
signals that a photo has been taken.
･Regardless of the settings selected for [Beep options] in the setup
menu, beeps will not sound when the camera focuses or while the
self-timer is in operation.
･Enabling silent photography disables some features, including:
- the ash,
- long exposure noise reduction,
-icker reduction, and
Silent photography
115
- high ISO sensitivities (Hi 1, Hi 2).
DSilent photography
･Selecting [On] for [Silent photography] does not completely silence the
camera. Camera sounds may still be audible, for example during
autofocus or aperture adjustment, in the latter case most noticeably at
apertures smaller (i.e., at f-numbers higher) than f/5.6.
･You may notice the following in photographs and in the shooting display:
- Flicker or banding in scenes lit by such sources as uorescent, mercury
vapor, or sodium lamps
- Distortion associated with motion (moving subjects may be distorted,
or the entire frame may appear distorted if the camera is moved during
shooting)
- Jagged edges, color fringing,
moiré
, and bright spots in the display
- Bright regions or bands in scenes lit by ashing signs and other
intermittent light sources or when the subject is briey illuminated by a
strobe or other bright, momentary light source
･The frame advance rate for burst photography changes when [On] is
selected for [Silent photography] (0138).
･Silent photography mutes the shutter, but this does not absolve
photographers of the need to respect their subjects’ privacy and image
rights.
Rating pictures
116
Rating pictures
Selected pictures can be rated or marked as candidates for later
deletion. Ratings can also be viewed in NX Studio. Protected pictures
cannot be rated.
1Press the K button to start playback.
2Select the desired picture and press the i button.
The playback i menu will be displayed.
3Highlight [Rating] and press J.
Rating pictures
117
4Choose a rating.
･Rotate the main command dial to choose a rating of from zero to
ve stars, or select d to mark the picture as a candidate for later
deletion.
･Press J to select the highlighted option.
Protecting pictures from deletion
118
Protecting pictures from deletion
Pictures can be protected to prevent their being deleted accidentally.
Protected pictures will however be deleted when the memory card is
formatted.
1Press the K button to start playback.
2Select the desired picture and press the A (g) button.
･Protected pictures are marked with a P icon.
･To remove protection, display or highlight the picture and press
the A (g) button again.
Protecting pictures from deletion
119
ARemoving protection from all pictures
To remove protection from all pictures in the folder or folders currently
selected for [Playback folder] in the playback menu, select [Unprotect all]
in the i menu.
The mode dial
120
Shooting controls
The mode dial
Use the mode dial to choose whether shutter speed and/or aperture can
be adjusted manually or are set automatically by the camera.
Using the mode dial
Use the mode dial to choose a shooting mode.
Mode Description
bAuto A simple, “point-and-shoot” mode that leaves the
camera in charge of settings (075, 080).
PProgrammed
auto
The camera sets shutter speed and aperture for
optimal exposure.
SShutter-priority
auto
Use to freeze or blur motion. You choose the
shutter speed; the camera selects the aperture for
best results.
AAperture-priority
auto
Use to blur backgrounds or bring both foreground
and background into focus. You choose the
aperture; the camera selects the shutter speed for
best results.
The mode dial
121
Mode Description
M Manual
You control both shutter speed and aperture. Set
shutter speed to “bulb” or “time” for long time-
exposures.
U1
U2
U3
User setting
mode
Assign frequently-used settings to these positions.
The settings can be recalled simply by rotating the
mode dial.
P (programmed auto)
･In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and
aperture according to a built-in program to ensure optimal exposure
in most situations.
･Dierent combinations of shutter speed and aperture that produce
the same exposure can be selected by rotating the main command
dial (“exible program”).
- While exible program is in eect, a exible program indicator (U) is
displayed.
- To restore default shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate the
main command dial until the indicator is no longer displayed.
Flexible program also ends when the mode dial is rotated to
another setting or the camera is turned o.
S (shutter-priority auto)
･In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the
camera automatically adjusts aperture for optimal exposure. Choose
The mode dial
122
fast shutter speeds to “freeze” motion, slow shutter speeds to
suggest motion by blurring moving objects.
･Rotate the main command dial to set the shutter speed.
･Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/4000 s and 30 s.
The mode dial
123
A (aperture-priority auto)
･In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera
automatically adjusts shutter speed for optimal exposure.
･Aperture can be adjusted by rotating the sub-command dial.
･The minimum and maximum values for aperture vary with the lens.
AVideo mode exposure settings
The following video settings can be adjusted during recording:
Mode Aperture Speed ISO sensitivity
P, S1— — —2
A4— —2
M4 4 43
1 Exposure control in shooting mode S is the same as in mode P.
2The upper limit for ISO sensitivity can be selected using the [ISO
sensitivity settings] > [Maximum sensitivity] item in the video
recording menu.
3 If [On] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO control
(mode M)] in the video recording menu, the upper limit for ISO sensitivity
can be selected using [Maximum sensitivity].
The mode dial
124
M (manual)
･You control both shutter speed and aperture. Choose this mode for
long time-exposures of such subjects as reworks or the night sky
(“Bulb” or “Time” photography, 0126).
･Shutter speed and aperture can be adjusted with reference to the
exposure indicator by rotating the command dials.
･Rotate the main command dial to choose the shutter speed. Shutter
speed can be set to values between 1/4000 s and 30 s, to “Bulb”, or to
“Time”.
･Aperture can be adjusted by rotating the sub-command dial.
･The minimum and maximum values for aperture vary with the lens.
The mode dial
125
DThe exposure indicator
･The dierence between the exposure value resulting from your setting
combination of the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity, and the
appropriate exposure value measured by the camera, is displayed in the
monitor. The “exposure indicator” is displayed as follows.
Optimal exposureUnderexposed by 1/3 EVOverexposed by over 3 1/3
EV
･If exposure compensation was performed in mode M, the reference value
for proper exposure in the exposure indicator changes.
DExposure warning
The exposure indicator will ash if the limits of the exposure metering are
exceeded, preventing the camera setting exposure.
AAuto ISO sensitivity control (mode M)
If auto ISO sensitivity control (0132) is enabled, ISO sensitivity will
automatically be adjusted for optimal exposure at the selected shutter speed
and aperture.
The mode dial
126
Long time-exposures
❚❚
The camera oers two options for long time-exposures: “Bulb” and
“Time”. Long time-exposures can be used for pictures of reworks, night
scenery, the stars, or moving lights.
A 35-second exposure
shot at a shutter speed of
“Bulb” and an aperture of
f/25
Shutter
speed Description
Bulb The shutter remains open while the shutter-release button is
held down.
Time The exposure starts when the shutter-release button is
pressed and ends when the button is pressed a second time.
1Keep the camera steady, for example by using a tripod.
2Rotate the mode dial to M.
The mode dial
127
3Rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed of
Bulb (“Bulb”) or Time (“Time”).
Bulb Time
4Focus and start the exposure.
･“Bulb”: Press the shutter-release button all the way down to start
the exposure. Keep the shutter-release button pressed during the
exposure.
･“Time”: Press the shutter-release button all the way down to start
the exposure.
5End the exposure.
･“Bulb”: Lift your nger from the shutter-release button.
･“Time”: Press the shutter-release button all the way down a
second time.
DLong time-exposures
･Note that “noise” (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels or fog) may
be present in long exposures.
･Bright spots and fog can be reduced by choosing [On] for [Long
exposure NR] in the photo shooting menu.
･Nikon recommends using a fully-charged battery or an optional charging
AC adapter to prevent loss of power during long exposures.
･Use of a tripod is recommended to reduce blur.
･If you are using the optional ML-L7 Remote Control, bulb photography is
not available. If you set the camera to bulb photography, operation works
the same way as time photography.
The mode dial
128
U1, U2, and U3 (user settings modes)
Frequently-used settings can be assigned to user setting positions U1
through U3 and later recalled simply by rotating the mode dial.
Save user settings
❚❚
1Adjust settings.
The settings that can be saved include:
･photo shooting menu options,
･video recording menu options,
･Custom Settings, and
･shooting mode, shutter speed (modes S and M), aperture (modes
A and M), exible program (mode P), exposure compensation, and
ash compensation.
2Highlight [Save user settings] in the setup menu.
Highlight [Save user settings] in the setup menu and press 2.
3Select a position.
Highlight [Save to U1], [Save to U2], or [Save to U3] and press 2.
4Save user settings.
Highlight [Save settings] using 1 or 3 and press J to assign
current settings to the selected position.
The mode dial
129
5Take pictures using the saved settings.
Rotating the mode dial to U1, U2, or U3 recalls the settings last
saved to that position.
DUser settings U1, U2, and U3
The following settings are not saved.
･PHOTO SHOOTING MENU
- [Storage folder]
- [Manage Picture Control]
- [Multiple exposure]
- [Interval timer shooting]
- [Time-lapse video]
- [Focus shift shooting]
･VIDEO RECORDING MENU
- [Manage Picture Control]
Resetting user settings
❚❚
1Highlight [Reset user settings] in the setup menu.
Highlight [Reset user settings] in the setup menu and press 2.
The mode dial
130
2Select a position.
Highlight [Reset U1], [Reset U2], or [Reset U3] and press 2.
3Reset user settings.
Highlight [Reset] and press J to restore default settings for the
selected position (the camera will function in mode P).
The S button
131
The S button
The camera’s sensitivity to light (ISO sensitivity) can be adjusted
according to the amount of light available. In general, choosing higher
values allows faster shutter speeds at the same aperture.
Adjusting ISO sensitivity
･Hold the S button and rotate the main command dial.
･Choose from values of from ISO 100 to 51200. Extended settings of
about 1 EV or 2 EV above ISO 51200 are also available.
･In b mode, the setting is xed at ISO-A (AUTO), and the camera sets
the ISO sensitivity automatically.
･The option currently selected is shown in the display during
shooting.
The S button
132
DHigh ISO sensitivities
The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure,
allowing pictures to be taken when lighting is poor and helping prevent blur
when the subject is in motion. Note, however, that the higher the sensitivity,
the more likely the image is to be aected by “noise” in the form of
randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines.
DHi 1 and Hi 2
A setting of [Hi 1] corresponds to an ISO sensitivity approximately 1 EV
higher than ISO 51200 (equivalent to ISO 102400) and [Hi 2] to an ISO
sensitivity approximately 2 EV higher (equivalent to ISO 204800). Note that
pictures taken at these settings are particularly prone to “noise” in the form
of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines.
Auto ISO sensitivity control
Auto ISO sensitivity control automatically adjusts ISO sensitivity if
optimal exposure cannot be achieved at the value selected by the user
in modes P, S, A, and M. You can select an upper limit for auto ISO
sensitivity control (200–Hi 2) to prevent ISO sensitivity being raised too
high.
･Hold the S button and rotate the sub-command dial to select from
ISO AUTO (auto ISO sensitivity control enabled) and ISO (auto ISO
sensitivity control disabled).
The S button
133
･When auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled, the shooting display will
show ISO AUTO. When sensitivity is altered from the value selected
by the user, the ISO sensitivity will be shown in the shooting display.
･Maximum sensitivity can be adjusted using the [ISO sensitivity
settings] item in the photo shooting menu.
DAuto ISO sensitivity control
･If value currently selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] is higher than that
chosen for [Maximum sensitivity], the value chosen for [ISO sensitivity
settings] will serve as the upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control.
･During ash photography, shutter speed is limited to the range dened
by the values selected for Custom Settings e1 [Flash sync speed] and e2
[Flash shutter speed].
The E (exposure compensation) button
134
The E (exposure compensation) button
Use this button to alter exposure from the value suggested by the
camera. Exposure compensation can be used to make pictures brighter
or darker.
−1 EV No exposure
compensation
+1 EV
Adjusting exposure compensation
･Hold the E button and rotate a command dial.
･Choose from values between –5 EV (underexposure) and +5 EV
(overexposure). Values between –3 EV and +3 EV are available in
video mode.
･Changes are made in increments of 1/3 EV.
･Higher values make the subject brighter, lower values darker.
･Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation
to ±0. Exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned
The E (exposure compensation) button
135
o (in b mode, exposure compensation is reset when the camera is
turned o).
･At values other than ±0.0, the camera displays a E icon and the
exposure indicator in photo mode or a E icon in video mode. The
current value for exposure compensation can be conrmed by
pressing the E button.
DMode M
･In mode M, exposure compensation aects only the exposure indicator;
shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity do not change. The overall
brightness of the image also does not change.
･The exposure indicator and the current value for exposure compensation
can be displayed by pressing the E button.
･When auto ISO sensitivity control (0132) is in eect, ISO sensitivity is
automatically adjusted according to the value selected for exposure
compensation, and the overall brightness of the image changes.
DUsing a ash
When an optional ash unit is used, exposure compensation aects both
ash level and exposure, altering the brightness of both the main subject and
the background. Custom Setting e3 [Exposure comp. for ash] can be used
to restrict the eects of exposure compensation to the background only.
The c/E (release mode/self-timer) button
136
The c/E (release mode/self-timer)
button
Choose the operation performed when the shutter is released.
Choosing a release mode
･Hold the c (E) button and rotate the main command dial.
･The option currently selected is shown in the display during
shooting.
Photo mode
❚❚
Option Description
U[Single frame]The camera takes one photograph each time the
shutter-release button is pressed.
The c/E (release mode/self-timer) button
137
Option Description
V[Continuous L]
･The camera takes photographs at a selected rate
while the shutter-release button is pressed.
･The frame advance rate can be chosen by
rotating the sub-command dial while holding the
c (E) button when [Continuous L] is selected in
the release-mode menu.
･Choose from rates of from 1 to 4 fps.
W[Continuous H]The camera takes photos at up to 5 fps while the
shutter-release button is pressed.
X[Continuous H
(extended)]
･The camera takes photos at up to 11 fps while the
shutter-release button is pressed.
･Optional ash units will not re.
･Flicker reduction does not take eect.
E[Self-timer]Take pictures with the self-timer (0140).
The c/E (release mode/self-timer) button
138
DThe shooting display
In continuous low-speed and continuous high-speed modes, the display is
updated in real time even while shooting is in progress.
DFrame advance rate
Frame advance rate varies with camera settings.
Release mode Image
quality
RAW bit
depth
Silent photography
O On
[Continuous L]
JPEG —
User-selected frame advance rate
RAW
12 bit
14 bit
[Continuous H]
JPEG —
Approx. 5 fps
Approx. 4.5 fps
RAW
12 bit
14 bit Approx. 4 fps
[Continuous H
(extended)]
JPEG —
Approx. 11 fps* Approx. 11 fps
RAW
12 bit
14 bit Approx. 9 fps Approx. 8.5 fps
* Approx. 10 fps if [Electronic front-curtain shutter] is selected for
Custom Setting d4 [Shutter type].
DBurst photography
･Depending on shooting conditions and memory card performance, the
memory card access lamp may light for anywhere from a few tens of
seconds to around a minute. Do not remove the memory card while the
memory card access lamp is lit. Not only could any unrecorded images be
lost, but the camera or memory card could be damaged.
･If the camera is switched o while the memory card access lamp is lit, it
will not power o until all images in the buer have been recorded.
The c/E (release mode/self-timer) button
139
･If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buer, the shutter
release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card.
DContinuous H (extended)
Depending on the camera settings, continuous photography may result in
apparent variations in exposure. If you notice changes in exposure, perform
exposure lock (0142) to lock the exposure during burst photography.
DThe memory buer
･While the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the frame-count
display will show the number of pictures that can be stored in the
memory buer.
･When the buer is full, the display will show r00 and the frame rate will
drop.
･The number shown is approximate. The actual number of photos that can
be stored in the memory buer varies with camera settings and shooting
conditions.
Video mode
❚❚
In video mode, you can choose the operation performed when the
shutter-release button is pressed (083).
Option Description
U[Single frame]
The camera takes one photograph each time the
shutter-release button is pressed. Up to 40 photographs
can be taken with each video.
The c/E (release mode/self-timer) button
140
Option Description
c[Continuous]
･The camera takes photos while the shutter-release
button is pressed.
･The frame advance rate varies with the frame rate
selected for [Frame size/frame rate] in the video
recording menu.
･The length of time available for the burst is shown in
the shooting display.
･While video recording is in progress, only one photo
will be taken each time the shutter-release button is
pressed.
The self-timer
In self-timer mode, pressing the shutter-release button starts a timer,
and a photo is taken when the timer expires.
1Press the c (E) button and rotate the main command dial to
select [Self-timer].
2Press the c (E) button and rotate the sub-command dial to
select the time until the shutter is released.
The c/E (release mode/self-timer) button
141
3Frame the photograph and focus.
The timer will not start if the shutter cannot be released, as may be
the case, for example, if the camera is unable to focus when AF-S is
selected for focus mode.
4Start the timer.
･A E icon appears in the shooting display when the self-timer is
enabled.
･Press the shutter-release button all the way down to start the
timer; the self-timer lamp will begin to ash. The lamp stops
ashing and glows steadily two seconds before the timer expires.
DTaking multiple shots
The number of shots taken and the interval between shots can be selected
using Custom Setting c2 [Self-timer].
The A (g) button
142
The A (g) button
Locks focus and exposure at the same time.
Exposure lock
･Exposure lock can be used to recompose shots after metering a
subject that will not be in the selected focus area in the nal
composition.
･Exposure lock is particularly eective with spot and center-weighted
metering.
Focus lock
･Use focus lock to lock focus on the current subject when AF-C is
selected for focus mode.
･When using focus lock, choose an AF-area mode other than [Auto-
area AF], [Auto-area AF (people)], or [Auto-area AF (animals)].
Locking focus and exposure
1Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the
shutter-release button halfway to set focus and exposure.
The A (g) button
143
2Press the A (g) button.
･Focus and exposure will lock while pressing the A (g) button.
Exposure will not change even when the composition is altered.
･An AE-L icon will be displayed in the shooting display.
3Keeping the A (g) button pressed, recompose the photograph
and shoot.
Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject. If
the distance to the subject changes, release the lock and focus again
at the new distance.
The A (g) button
144
DLocking focus when AF-S is selected for focus mode or when AF-
A is selected and you are shooting in AF-S
Focus locks while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. You can also
lock focus by pressing the A (g) button.
DLocking exposure with the shutter-release button
If [On (half press)] is selected for Custom Setting c1 [Shutter-release button
AE-L], exposure will lock while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
DTaking multiple shots at the same focus distance
･If you locked focus by pressing the A (g) button, focus will remain
locked between shots if you keep the A (g) button pressed.
･Focus will also remain locked if you keep the shutter-release button
pressed halfway between shots.
The i menu
145
The i menu
The i menu
This menu is used for quick access to frequently-used settings. To view
the menu, press the i button.
･Highlight items using the multi selector and press J to view options.
Highlight the desired option and press J to select and return to the
i menu.
･To cancel and return to the previous display, press the i button.
The i menu
146
AThe command dials
･In some cases, the setting for the item currently highlighted in the i
menu can be chosen by rotating the main command dial. Options for the
selected setting, if any, can be selected by rotating the sub-command dial.
･Some items can be adjusted by rotating either dial.
･Press J to save changes. You can also save changes by pressing the
shutter-release button halfway or highlighting another item.
Still images
147
Still images
1Set Picture Control (0147)
2White balance (0153)
3Image quality (0161)
4Image size (0162)
5Flash mode (0163)
6Metering (0163)
7Wi-Fi connection (0165)
8Active D-Lighting (0165)
9Release mode (0167)
10 Vibration reduction (0168)
11 AF-area mode (0169)
12 Focus mode (0170)
Set Picture Control
Choose image processing (“Picture Control”) options for new photos
according to the scene or your creative intent.
Still images
148
Option Description
n[Auto]
･The camera automatically adjusts hues and
tones based on the [Standard] Picture
Control.
･The complexions of portrait subjects will
appear softer than in pictures taken with the
[Standard] Picture Control.
･In outdoor shots, elements such as the foliage
and sky will appear more vivid than in
pictures taken with the [Standard] Picture
Control.
Q[Standard]Standard processing for balanced results.
Recommended for most situations.
R[Neutral]
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose
for photographs that will later be processed or
retouched.
S[Vivid]
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint
eect. Choose for photographs that emphasize
primary colors.
T[Monochrome] Take monochrome photographs.
o[Portrait]Smooth complexions for natural-looking
portraits.
p[Landscape] Shoot vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.
q[Flat]
Details are preserved over a wide tone range,
from highlights to shadows. Choose for
photographs that will later be extensively
processed or retouched.
Still images
149
Option Description
k01–
k20
[Creative Picture
Control]
(Creative Picture
Control)
･Creative Picture Controls oer unique
combinations of hue, tone, saturation, and
other settings tuned for particular eects.
･Choose the type from [Dream], [Morning],
[Pop], [Sunday], [Somber], [Dramatic],
[Silence], [Bleached], [Melancholic], [Pure],
[Denim], [Toy], [Sepia], [Blue], [Red], [Pink],
[Charcoal], [Graphite], [Binary], or [Carbon].
･To view Picture Control settings, highlight a Picture Control and press
3. Any changes to ne-tuning options can be previewed in the
display (0150).
･The option currently selected is shown in the display during
shooting.
Still images
150
Modifying Picture Controls
❚❚
Highlighting [Set Picture Control] in the i menu and pressing J
displays a Picture Control list. Highlight a Picture Control and press 3 to
preview the eect in the display.
･Press 1 or 3 to highlight settings. Press 4 or 2 to choose a value in
increments of 1, or rotate the sub-command dial to choose a value in
increments of 0.25.
･The options available vary with the Picture Control selected.
･To abandon any changes and start over from default settings, press
the O button.
･Press J to save changes and return to the i menu.
･Picture Controls that have been modied from default settings are
indicated by an asterisk (“U”).
Still images
151
DThe j indicator
The j indicator under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu
indicates the previous value for the setting.
D[A] (auto)
･Selecting the A (auto) option available for some settings lets the camera
adjust the setting automatically.
･Results vary with exposure and the position of the subject in the frame.
AThe “n Auto” Picture Control
Settings can be adjusted in the range [A−2] to [A+2].
Picture Control settings
❚❚
Option Description
[Eect level]Mute or heighten the eect of Creative Picture
Controls.
[Quick sharp]
Quickly adjust levels for balanced [Sharpening],
[Mid-range sharpening], and [Clarity]. These
parameters can also be adjusted individually.
[Sharpening] Control the sharpness of details and outlines.
[Mid-range
sharpening]
Adjust the sharpness of patterns and lines in the
range between [Sharpening] and [Clarity].
[Clarity]
Adjust overall sharpness and the sharpness of
thicker outlines without aecting brightness or
dynamic range.
Still images
152
Option Description
[Contrast] Adjust contrast.
[Brightness]Raise or lower brightness without loss of detail in
highlights or shadows.
[Saturation] Control the vividness of colors.
[Hue] Adjust hue.
[Filter eects]Simulate the eect of color lters on
monochrome pictures.
[Toning]
Choose the tint used in monochrome pictures.
Pressing 3 when an option other than [B&W]
(black-and-white) is selected displays saturation
options.
[Toning] (Creative
Picture Control)
Choose the shade of color used for Creative
Picture Controls.
Still images
153
DMid-range sharpening
When recording a video, set [Video quality] in the video recording menu to
[High quality] to apply the adjusted mid-range sharpening.
D[Filter eects]
Choose from the following [Filter eects]:
Option Description
[Y] (yellow)* These options enhance contrast and can be used to tone
down the brightness of the sky in landscape photographs.
Orange [O] produces more contrast than yellow [Y], red [R]
more contrast than orange.
[O] (orange)*
[R] (red)*
[G] (green)* Green softens skin tones. Use for portraits and the like.
* The term in parentheses is the name of the corresponding third-party
color lter for black-and-white photography.
White balance
Adjust white balance. For more information, see “White balance” in
“Basic settings” (0109).
Option
4 [Auto]
i [Keep white (reduce warm
colors)]
j [Keep overall atmosphere]
k [Keep warm lighting colors]
D [Natural light auto]
H [Direct sunlight]
G [Cloudy]
Option
M [Shade]
J [Incandescent]
I [Fluorescent]
[Cool-white uorescent]
[Day white uorescent]
[Daylight uorescent]
5 [Flash]
K [Choose color temperature]
Still images
154
Option
L [Preset manual]
･Pressing 3 when 4 [Auto] or I [Fluorescent] is highlighted
displays sub-options for the highlighted item.
･Pressing 3 when L [Preset manual] is highlighted displays white
balance presets.
･The option currently selected is shown in the display during
shooting.
Fine-tuning white balance
❚❚
Pressing J when [White balance] is highlighted in the i menu displays
a list of white balance options. If an option other than K [Choose color
temperature] is highlighted, ne-tuning options can be displayed by
Still images
155
pressing 3. Any changes to ne-tuning options can be previewed in the
display.
GIncrease green
BIncrease blue
AIncrease amber
MIncrease magenta
･Tap the arrows in the display or use the multi selector to ne-tune
white balance.
･Press J to save changes and return to the i menu.
･If white balance has been ne-tuned, an asterisk (“U”) will be
displayed in the white balance icon.
Still images
156
Choosing a color temperature
❚❚
Pressing J when [White balance] is highlighted in the i menu displays
a list of white balance options. When K [Choose color temperature] is
highlighted, color temperature options can be viewed by pressing 3.
Value for Amber–Blue axis Value for Green–Magenta
axis
･Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits on the A–B (amber–blue) axis. You
can also highlight the G–M (green–magenta) axis.
･Press 1 or 3 to edit the selected item.
･Press J to save changes and return to the i menu.
･If a value other than 0 is selected for the green (G)–magenta (M) axis,
an asterisk (“U”) will appear in the white balance icon.
DColor-temperature selection
･Do not use color-temperature selection with uorescent light sources;
instead, use the I [Fluorescent] option.
･When using color-temperature selection with other light sources, take a
test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate.
Preset manual
❚❚
White balance settings such as 4 [Auto], J [Incandescent], and K
[Choose color temperature] may fail to produce the desired results
under mixed lighting or lighting with a strong color cast. Should this
occur, white balance can be set to a value measured under the light
Still images
157
source used in the nal photograph. The camera can store up to six
values for preset manual white balance.
1Select [White balance] in the i menu, then highlight L [Preset
manual] and press 3.
2Select a preset.
･Select from presets [d-1] through [d-6].
･Press J to save changes and return to the i menus.
Still images
158
3Highlight [White balance] in the i menu and hold the J button
to initiate direct measurement mode.
･A L indicator will ash in the shooting display.
･The white balance target (r) appears in the center of the frame.
Still images
159
4Position the white balance target (r) over a white or gray object
and measure a value for preset manual white balance.
･Position the target (r) using the multi selector.
･To measure white balance, press the shutter-release button all the
way down or press J.
･You can also position the target and measure white balance by
tapping the display.
･You cannot move r if an optional ash unit is attached. Frame the
shot so that the white or gray reference object is in the center of
the display.
･If the camera is unable to measure white balance, a message will
be displayed and the camera will return to direct measurement
mode. Try measuring white balance again, for example with the
target (r) positioned over a dierent area of the subject.
5Press the i button to exit direct measurement mode.
Still images
160
DThe preset manual white balance menu
The preset manual white balance menu can be accessed by selecting [White
balance] > L [Preset manual] in the photo shooting menu. The preset
manual white balance menu oers options for copying values for preset
manual white balance from an existing photograph or adding comments to
or protecting white balance presets.
DProtected presets
White balance presets indicated by g icons are protected and cannot be
changed.
DPreset manual: Selecting a preset
･At shipment, presets d-1 through d-6 are set to 5200 K, equivalent to the
H [Direct sunlight] white balance option.
･White balance presets can be viewed by selecting [White balance] > L
[Preset manual] in the photo shooting menu. To recall a stored value,
highlight a preset using the multi selector and press J.
DDirect measurement mode
Direct measurement mode will end if no operations are performed in the
time selected for Custom Setting c3 [Power o delay] > [Standby timer].
DMeasuring white balance
Preset manual white balance cannot be measured during multiple exposures.
Still images
161
Image quality
Choose a le format for photographs.
Option Description
[RAW +
JPEG ne]･Record two copies of each photo: a RAW image and a JPEG
copy.
･Only the JPEG copy is displayed during playback. The RAW
copies can only be viewed using a computer.
･Deleting the JPEG copies on the camera also deletes the
RAW images.
[RAW +
JPEG
normal]
[RAW +
JPEG basic]
[RAW]
RAW images have the highest quality, and the quality
decreases from “ne”, to “normal”, and to “basic”.
[JPEG ne]
[JPEG
normal]
[JPEG basic]
The option currently selected is shown in the display during shooting.
Still images
162
ARAW
･RAW les have the extension “*.nef”.
･The process of converting RAW les to JPEG and other widely-supported
formats is referred to as “RAW processing”. A variety of settings can be
adjusted during this process, including exposure compensation, white
balance, and Picture Controls.
･RAW processing has no eect on the original RAW data, meaning that it
can be repeated as often and using as many dierent combinations of
settings as desired while maintaining image quality.
･RAW processing can be performed in-camera using the [RAW processing]
item in the retouch menu or on a computer using Nikon’s NX Studio
software. NX Studio is available free-of-charge from the Nikon Download
Center.
Image size
Choose the size at which photographs are recorded. The option
currently selected is shown in the display during shooting.
Image size versus number of pixels
❚❚
The physical dimensions of the photos in pixels vary with the option
selected for [Choose image area] in the photo shooting menu.
Image area Image size
Large Medium Small
[DX (24×16)] 5568×3712 4176×2784 2784×1856
[1:1 (16×16)] 3712×3712 2784×2784 1856×1856
Still images
163
Image area Image size
Large Medium Small
[16:9 (24×14)] 5568×3128 4176×2344 2784×1560
Flash mode
Choose a ash mode for optional ash units. The options available vary
with the shooting mode.
Option Available in
I[Fill ash]b, P, S, A, M
J[Red-eye reduction]b, P, S, A, M
L[Slow sync]P, A
K[Slow sync + red-eye]P, A
M[Rear-curtain sync]P, S, A, M
s[Flash o]b, P, S, A, M
The option currently selected is shown in the display during shooting.
Metering
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure.
Still images
164
Option Description
L[Matrix
metering]
The camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets
exposure according to tone distribution, color,
composition, and distance for results close to those seen
by the naked eye.
M
[Center-
weighted
metering]
･The camera assigns the greatest weight to the center
of the frame. It can be used with subjects that
dominate the composition, for example.
･Center-weighted metering is also recommended
when using lters with an exposure factor (lter
factor) over 1×.
･The size of the area assigned the greatest weight can
be selected using Custom Setting b2 [Center-
weighted area].
N[Spot
metering]
･The camera meters a circle with a diameter of 3.5 mm/
0.14 in. (equivalent to approximately 2.5% of the
frame). This ensures that the subject will be correctly
exposed even when the background is much brighter
or darker.
･The metered area is centered on the current focus
point. If AF-area mode (092) is set to [Auto-area AF],
[Auto-area AF (people)], or [Auto-area AF
(animals)], the camera will instead meter the center
focus point.
t
[Highlight-
weighted
metering]
The camera assigns the greatest weight to highlights.
Use this option to reduce loss of detail in highlights, for
example when photographing spotlit performers on
stage.
Still images
165
The option currently selected is shown in the display during shooting.
Wi-Fi connection
Enable or disable Wi-Fi.
･Enable Wi-Fi to establish wireless connections to computers or
between the camera and smartphones or tablets (smart devices)
running the SnapBridge app (0478).
･The camera displays a Wi-Fi icon when Wi-Fi is enabled.
･To turn Wi-Fi o, highlight [Wi-Fi connection] in the i menu and
press J; if Wi-Fi is currently enabled, a [Close Wi-Fi connection]
prompt will be displayed. Press J to end the connection.
Active D-Lighting
Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating pictures with
natural contrast. Use for high-contrast scenes, for example when
photographing brightly-lit outdoor scenery through a door or window
Still images
166
or taking pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day. Active D-Lighting
is most eective when used with matrix metering.
[O] [Y Auto]
Option Description
Y[Auto]The camera automatically adjusts Active D-Lighting in
response to shooting conditions.
Z[Extra high]
Choose the amount of Active D-Lighting performed
from [Extra high], [High], [Normal], and [Low].
P[High]
Q[Normal]
R[Low]
c[O] Active D-Lighting o.
The option currently selected is shown in the display during shooting.
Still images
167
DActive D-Lighting
･“Noise” in the form of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines may
appear in photos taken with Active D-Lighting.
･In mode M, [Y Auto] is equivalent to [Q Normal].
･Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects.
･This function does not apply at high ISO sensitivities (Hi 1, Hi 2), including
high sensitivities selected via auto ISO sensitivity control.
Release mode
Choose the operation performed when the shutter is released. For more
information, see “The c/E (release mode/self-timer) button” (0136).
Option
U[Single frame]
V[Continuous L]
W[Continuous H]
Option
X[Continuous H (extended)]
E[Self-timer]
･Pressing 3 when [Continuous L] is highlighted displays frame
advance rate options.
Still images
168
･Pressing 3 when [Self-timer] is highlighted displays options for the
shutter-release delay and the number of shots taken when the timer
expires.
･The option currently selected is shown in the display during
shooting.
Vibration reduction
Choose whether to enable vibration reduction. The options available
vary with the lens.
Option Description
C
[On]Choose for enhanced vibration reduction when
photographing static subjects.
[Normal]
D[Sport]Choose when photographing athletes and other subjects
that are moving rapidly and unpredictably.
E[O] Vibration reduction is disabled.
Still images
169
An icon appears in the display when a setting other than [O] is
selected.
DUsing vibration reduction: Notes
･Vibration reduction may be unavailable with some lenses.
･We recommend that you wait for the image in the display to stabilize
before shooting.
･Depending on the lens, when vibration reduction is active, the image in
the shooting display may jiggle after the shutter is released, but this does
not indicate a malfunction.
･[Normal] or [Sport] is recommended for panning shots. In [Normal] or
[Sport] mode, vibration reduction applies only to motion that is not part
of the pan. If the camera is panned horizontally, for example, vibration
reduction will be applied only to vertical shake.
･If you will use a tripod or monopod with a VR lens camera, the settings
may dier depending on the lens. Consult the lens documentation before
use for more information.
AF-area mode
AF-area mode controls how the camera selects the focus-point for
autofocus. For more information, see “AF-area mode” in the “Focus”
section of “Basic settings” (092).
Option
3[Pinpoint AF]
d[Single-point AF]
e[Dynamic-area AF]
Option
f[Wide-area AF (S)]
g[Wide-area AF (L)]
1[Wide-area AF (L-people)]
Still images
170
Option
2[Wide-area AF (L-animals)]
h[Auto-area AF]
Option
5[Auto-area AF (people)]
6[Auto-area AF (animals)]
The option currently selected is shown in the display during shooting.
Focus mode
Focus mode controls how the camera focuses. For more information, see
“Focus mode” in the “Focus” section of “Basic settings” (090).
Option
AF-A [AF mode auto-switch]
AF-S [Single AF]
Option
AF-C [Continuous AF]
MF [Manual focus]
The option currently selected is shown in the display during shooting.
Videos
171
Videos
1Set Picture Control (0172)
2White balance (0172)
3Frame size and rate/Video
quality (0172)
4Microphone sensitivity (0175)
5Wind noise reduction (0176)
6Metering (0177)
7Wi-Fi connection (0177)
8Active D-Lighting (0178)
9Electronic VR (0178)
10 Vibration reduction (0179)
11 AF-area mode (0179)
12 Focus mode (0179)
A[Same as photo settings]
If [Same as photo settings] is selected for [Set Picture Control], [White
balance], [Active D-Lighting], or [Vibration reduction] in the video
recording menu, a h icon will appear at the top left corner of the i menu.
Changes made to the setting from the i menu in photo mode will also apply
in video mode and
vice-versa
.
Videos
172
Set Picture Control
Choose a Picture Control for video recording. For more information, see
“Still images” (0147).
White balance
Adjust white balance for video recording. For more information, see “Still
images” (0153).
Frame size and rate/Video quality
Select the video frame size (in pixels), frame rate, and video quality.
Video quality
❚❚
Choose from [High quality] and [Normal]. A star (“m”) appears in the
icon for [Frame size/frame rate] when [High quality] is selected. Some
frame size/rate options only support [High quality].
Frame size/frame rate
❚❚
The maximum bit rate and recording time for each [Frame size/frame
rate] option are shown below. The bit rate varies with the option
selected for video quality. If the battery is fully discharged or the
temperature inside the camera rises, recording may end before the
maximum length is reached or before the memory card is full.
Option1Max. bit rate Max. recording
time
High quality Normal
r[3840×2160; 30p]2
144 Mbps —3125 min.5
s[3840×2160; 25p]2
t[3840×2160; 24p]2
w[1920×1080; 120p]4
Videos
173
Option1Max. bit rate Max. recording
time
High quality Normal
x144 Mbps —3
125 min.5
[1920×1080; 100p]4
y/y[1920×1080; 60p]
56 Mbps 28 Mbps
z/z[1920×1080; 50p]
1/1[1920×1080; 30p]
28 Mbps 14 Mbps
2/2[1920×1080; 25p]
3/3[1920×1080; 24p]
A[1920×1080; 30p ×4
(slow-motion)]4
36 Mbps
—33 min.
B[1920×1080; 25p ×4
(slow-motion)]4
C[1920×1080; 24p ×5
(slow-motion)]429 Mbps
1 The frame rates for 120p, 100p, 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and 24p are
respectively 119.88 fps, 100 fps, 59.94 fps, 50 fps, 29.97 fps, 25 fps, and
23.976 fps.
2 Videos are recorded in 4K UHD.
3 Video quality xed at [High quality].
4 The following features cannot be used.
･Detection of human, dog, or cat faces or eyes when [Wide-area AF (L-
people)], [Wide-area AF (L-animals)], [Auto-area AF (people)], or
[Auto-area AF (animals)] is selected for [AF-area mode].
･Flicker reduction
･Electronic VR
･HDMI output while recording videos
5 For memory cards 32 GB or less, videos may be divided between up to 8
les. Each divided le may be up to 4 GB in size. The number of les and
Videos
174
the length of each le vary with the options selected for [Frame size/
frame rate] and [Video quality].
The option currently selected for [Frame size and rate/Video quality] is
shown in the display during shooting.
Slow motion videos
❚❚
You can record slow motion videos by selecting [1920×1080; 30p ×4
(slow-motion)], [1920×1080; 25p ×4 (slow-motion)], or [1920×1080;
24p ×5 (slow-motion)] for [Frame size/frame rate]. Sound is not
recorded.
･In [1920×1080; 30p ×4 (slow-motion)] for example, images read at
a frame rate of 120p are recorded as a video in 30p. A video recorded
for about 10 seconds will be played back for about 40 seconds. You
can see momentary actions in slow motion, such as the impact of a
ball in sports.
･The frame rates when reading images and when recording and
playing back videos are as follows.
Videos
175
Frame size/frame rate Frame rate when
reading images*
Frame rate when
recording and
playing back videos*
1920×1080; 30p ×4 (slow-
motion) 120p 30p
1920×1080; 25p ×4 (slow-
motion) 100p 25p
1920×1080; 24p ×5 (slow-
motion) 120p 24p
* 120p: 119.88 fps, 100p: 100 fps, 30p: 29.97 fps, 25p: 25 fps, 24p: 23.976
fps
DWhen recording slow motion videos
The following features cannot be used when recording slow motion videos.
･Flicker reduction
･Electronic VR
･Recording timecodes
･HDMI output while recording videos
Microphone sensitivity
Turn built-in or external microphones on or o or adjust microphone
sensitivity.
Option Description
bAAdjust microphone sensitivity automatically.
[Microphone o] Turn sound recording o.
b1–b20
Adjust microphone sensitivity manually. Choose from
values of from [1] to [20]. The higher the value, the
higher the sensitivity; the lower the value, the lower the
sensitivity.
Videos
176
･At settings other than bA, the option currently selected is shown in
the display.
･If the sound level is displayed in red, the volume is too high. Reduce
microphone sensitivity.
DVideos without sound
Videos recorded with [Microphone o] selected for microphone sensitivity
are indicated by a 2 icon.
Wind noise reduction
Choose whether to use wind noise reduction when recording videos.
Videos
177
Option Description
[On]
Enables the low-cut lter, reducing noise produced by wind blowing
over the built-in microphone. Note that other sounds may also be
aected.
[O] Disables wind noise reduction.
An icon appears in the display when [On] is selected.
Selecting [On] for [Wind noise reduction] has no eect on optional
stereo microphones. Wind-noise reduction for optional stereo
microphones that support this feature can be enabled or disabled using
microphone controls.
Metering
Choose how the camera sets exposure during video recording. For more
information, see “Still images” (0163).
DMetering
[Spot metering] is not available in video mode.
Wi-Fi connection
Enable or disable Wi-Fi. For more information, see “Still images” (0165)
or see “Wi-Fi connection” in the “Connect to smart device” section of the
“Menu guide” (0404).
Videos
178
Active D-Lighting
Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating videos with natural
contrast. Select [Same as photo settings] to use the option currently
selected for photos. For more information about Active D-Lighting, see
“Still images” (0165).
D[Same as photo settings]
Note that if [Same as photo settings] is selected for Active D-Lighting in the
video recording menu and [Auto] is selected in the photo shooting menu,
videos will be shot at a setting equivalent to [Normal].
Electronic VR
Choose whether to enable electronic vibration reduction in video mode.
Option Description
[On]
･Enable electronic vibration reduction during video recording.
･If the video frame size and rate is set to 1920×1080 120p,
1920×1080 100p, or 1920×1080 slow-motion, electronic vibration
reduction is disabled.
･Note that when [On] is selected, the angle of view will be
reduced, slightly increasing the apparent focal length.
[O] Electronic vibration reduction is disabled.
An icon appears in the display when [On] is selected.
Videos
179
Vibration reduction
Choose whether to enable vibration reduction in video mode. For more
information, see “Still images” (0168).
AF-area mode
AF-area mode controls how the camera selects the focus-point for
autofocus. For more information, see “AF-area mode” in the “Focus”
section of “Basic settings” (092).
Option
d[Single-point AF]
f[Wide-area AF (S)]
g[Wide-area AF (L)]
1[Wide-area AF (L-people)]
Option
2[Wide-area AF (L-animals)]
h[Auto-area AF]
5[Auto-area AF (people)]
6[Auto-area AF (animals)]
Focus mode
Focus mode controls how the camera focuses. For more information, see
“Focus mode” in the “Focus” section of “Basic settings” (090).
Option
AF-S [Single AF]
AF-C [Continuous AF]
Option
AF-F [Full-time AF]
MF [Manual focus]
Viewing pictures
180
Playback
Viewing pictures
Full-frame playback
Press the K button to view the most recent picture full frame in the
monitor.
･Press 4 to return to the previous frame, 2 to skip to the next frame.
･Press 1, 3, or the DISP button to view more information on the
current picture (0183).
Viewing pictures
181
Thumbnail playback
To view multiple pictures, press the W (Q) button when a picture is
displayed full frame.
･The number of pictures displayed increases from 4 to 9 to 72 each
time the W (Q) button is pressed, and decreases with each press of
the X button.
･Highlight pictures using 1, 3, 4, or 2.
Calendar playback
To view images taken on a selected date, press the W (Q) button when
72 images are displayed.
･Use the multi selector (1, 3, 4, or 2) to highlight a date in the date
list (q) and press W (Q) to place the cursor in the thumbnail list (w).
Viewing pictures
182
Press 1 or 3 to highlight pictures in the thumbnail list. To return to
the date list, press the W (Q) button a second time.
･To zoom in on the picture highlighted in the thumbnail list, press and
hold the X button.
･To exit to thumbnail playback, press X when the cursor is in the date
list.
DTouch controls
Touch controls can be used when pictures are displayed in the monitor
(044).
DRotate tall
To display “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs in tall orientation, select
[On] for [Rotate tall] in the playback menu.
DPicture review
When [On] is selected for [Picture review] in the playback menu,
photographs are automatically displayed after shooting; there is no need for
you to press the K button.
･In continuous release modes, display begins when shooting ends, with
the rst photograph in the current series displayed.
･Images are not rotated automatically during picture review even when
[On] is selected for [Rotate tall] in the playback menu.
Photo information
183
Photo information
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-frame
playback. Press 1, 3, or the DISP button to cycle through photo
information as shown below.
1File information
2Exposure data1
3Highlight display1
4RGB histogram1
5Shooting data1, 2
6Location data3
7Overview data1
8None (picture only)1
1 Displayed only if the corresponding option is selected for [Playback
display options] in the playback menu.
2 The shooting data list has multiple pages, which can be viewed by
pressing 1 or 3.
3 Location data are displayed only if embedded in the picture at the time it
was taken.
Photo information
184
File information
1Protect status (0118)
2Retouch indicator (0419)
3Upload marking (0199)
4Focus point* (075)
5Frame number/total number of
frames
6Image quality (0161)
7Image size (0162)
8Image area (0240)
9Time of recording (0388)
10 Date of recording (0388)
11 Rating (0116)
12 Folder name (0235)
13 File name (0239)
* Displayed only if [Focus point] is selected for [Playback display options]
in the playback menu.
Photo information
185
Exposure data
1Folder number–frame number
(0235)
2Shooting mode (0120)
3Shutter speed (0121, 0124)
4Aperture (0123, 0124)
5Exposure compensation value
(0134)
6ISO sensitivity* (0131)
* Displayed in red if the picture was taken in mode P, S, A, or M with auto
ISO sensitivity control enabled.
Highlight display
1Highlights (areas that may be
overexposed)
2Folder number–frame number
(0235)
Photo information
186
RGB histogram
1Folder number–frame number
(0235)
2White balance (0109, 0153,
0244)
Color temperature (0156)
Preset manual (0156)
White balance ne-tuning
(0154)
3Histogram (RGB channel)
4Histogram (red channel)
5Histogram (green channel)
6Histogram (blue channel)
Photo information
187
DPlayback zoom
To zoom in on the picture in the histogram display, press X. The histogram
will be updated to show only the data for the portion of the image visible in
the display. Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in
the monitor. Press W (Q) to zoom out.
DHistograms
Histograms show tone distribution. Pixel brightness (tone) is plotted on the
horizontal axis and the number of pixels on the vertical axis.
･If the image contains objects with a wide range of brightnesses, the
distribution of tones will be relatively even.
･If the image is dark, the distribution will be shifted to the left.
･If the image is bright, the distribution will be shifted to the right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the
right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the
Photo information
188
left. Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright
ambient lighting makes it dicult to see pictures in the monitor.
DThe histogram display
･RGB histograms show tone distribution.
･Camera histograms may dier from those displayed in imaging
applications. Use them as a guide to actual tone distribution.
Photo information
189
Shooting data
View the settings in eect at the time the picture was taken. The
shooting data list has multiple pages, which can be viewed by pressing
1 or 3.
Basic shooting data
❚❚
1Metering (0163)
Shutter type (0350)
Shutter speed (0121, 0124)
Aperture (0123, 0124)
2Shooting mode (0120)
ISO sensitivity1 (0131)
3Exposure compensation value
(0134)
Optimal exposure tuning2
(0346)
4Focal length
5Lens data
6Focus mode (090)
AF-area mode (092)
7Vibration reduction (0168)
8White balance3 (0109, 0153,
0244)
9White balance ne-tuning
(0154)
10 Color space (0258)
11 Camera name
12 Image area (0240)
13 Folder number–frame number
(0235)
1 Displayed in red if the picture was taken in mode P, S, A, or M with auto
ISO sensitivity control enabled.
2 Displayed if Custom Setting b3 [Fine-tune optimal exposure] has been
set to a value other than zero for any metering method.
Photo information
190
3 Also includes the color temperature for pictures taken using 4 [Auto].
Photo information
191
Flash data
❚❚
Flash data are displayed only for pictures taken with optional ash units
(0493, 0505).
1Flash type
2Remote ash control
3Flash mode (0498)
4Flash control mode (0497)
Flash compensation (0501)
Picture Control data
❚❚
The items displayed vary with the Picture Control in eect when the
picture was taken.
1Picture Control (0147, 0251)
Photo information
192
Other shooting data
❚❚
1High ISO noise reduction
(0259)
Long exposure noise reduction
(0258)
2Active D-Lighting (0165)
3HDR exposure dierential
(0285)
HDR smoothing (0285)
4Vignette control (0260)
5Retouch history (0419).
Changes are listed in the order
applied.
6Image comment (0398)
Copyright information
❚❚
Copyright information is only displayed if recorded using the
[Copyright information] item in the setup menu at the time the picture
was taken.
1Photographer (0399) 2Copyright holder (0399)
Photo information
193
Location data
The location data page lists the latitude, longitude, and other location
data downloaded from smartphones or tablets.
･The items listed vary with the device supplying the location data.
･The location data displayed with videos are those reported at the
start of recording.
Photo information
194
Overview
1Frame number/total number of
frames
2Upload marking (0199)
3Protect status (0118)
4Retouch indicator (0419)
5Camera name
6Image comment indicator
(0398)
7Location data indicator
8Histogram (0187)
9Image quality (0161)
10 Image size (0162)
11 Image area (0240)
12 File name (0239)
13 Time of recording (0388)
14 Date of recording (0388)
15 Folder name (0235)
16 Rating (0116)
Photo information
195
1Metering (0163)
2Shooting mode (0120)
3Shutter speed (0121, 0124)
4Aperture (0123, 0124)
5ISO sensitivity1 (0131)
6Focal length
7Active D-Lighting (0165)
8Picture Control (0147, 0251)
9Color space (0258)
10 Flash mode2 (0498)
11 White balance (0109, 0153,
0244)
Color temperature (0156)
Preset manual (0156)
White balance ne-tuning
(0154)
12 Flash compensation2 (0501)
Commander mode2
13 Exposure compensation value
(0134)
1 Displayed in red if the picture was taken in mode P, S, A, or M with auto
ISO sensitivity control enabled.
2 Flash data are displayed only for pictures taken with optional ash units
(0493, 0505).
The i button (playback mode)
196
The i button (playback mode)
Pressing the i button during playback zoom or full-frame or thumbnail
playback displays the i menu for playback mode. Highlight items and
press J or 2 to select.
Press the i button again to return to playback.
･During calendar playback, the i menu can be viewed by pressing the
i button when thumbnails are displayed.
Photos
Option Description
[Quick crop]1
Save a copy of the current image cropped to the
area visible in the display. This option is not
available when RGB histograms are displayed
(0186).
[Rating]Rate the current picture (0116).
[Select for upload to
smart device]Select the current picture for upload (0199). The
option displayed varies with the type of device
connected.
[Select for upload to
computer]
[Retouch]Create a retouched copy of the current picture
(0419).
The i button (playback mode)
197
Option Description
[Choose folder]Choose a folder for playback. Highlight a folder and
press J to view the pictures it contains.
[Protect]Add protection to or remove protection from the
current picture (0118).
[Unprotect all]2
Remove protection from all pictures in the folder
currently selected for [Playback folder] in the
playback menu.
[Side-by-side
comparison]3Compare retouched copies to the originals.
1 Available only during playback zoom.
2Not available during playback zoom.
3 Available only when a retouched copy (indicated by a p icon) or the
source picture for a retouched copy is selected.
The i button (playback mode)
198
A[Side-by-side comparison]
Choose [Side-by-side comparison] to compare retouched copies with the
unretouched originals.
1Options used to create copy
2Source image
3Retouched copy
･The source image is displayed on the left, the retouched copy on the
right.
･The options used to create the copy listed at the top of the display.
･Press 4 or 2 to switch between the source image and the retouched
copy.
･If the copy is an overlay created from multiple source images, press 1 or
3 to view the other images.
･If the source has been copied multiple times, press 1 or 3 to view the
other copies.
･To view the highlighted picture zoomed in, press and hold the X button.
･Press J to return to playback with the highlighted image displayed full-
frame.
･To exit to playback, press the K button.
･The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a
photograph that is now protected.
･The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a
photograph that has since been deleted.
Videos
Option Description
[Rating]Rate the current video (0116).
The i button (playback mode)
199
Option Description
[Select for upload
to computer]* Select the current video for upload (0199).
[Volume control] Adjust playback volume.
[Trim video]Trim footage from the current video and save the
edited copy in a new le (0201).
[Choose folder]Choose a folder for playback. Highlight a folder and
press J to view the pictures it contains.
[Protect]Add protection to or remove protection from the
current video (0118).
[Unprotect all]
Remove protection from all pictures in the folder
currently selected for [Playback folder] in the
playback menu.
* It will not appear if the camera and computer have never been connected
via wireless link.
Videos (playback paused)
Option Description
9[Choose start/end
point]
Trim footage from the current video and save the
edited copy in a new le (0201).
4[Save current
frame]Save a selected frame as a JPEG still (0204).
Select for upload
❚❚
Follow the steps below to select the current picture for upload to a
smart device or computer.
The i button (playback mode)
200
･The i menu items used to select pictures for upload vary with the
type of device connected:
- [Select for upload to smart device]: Displayed when the camera is
connected to a smart device via built-in Bluetooth using [Connect
to smart device] in the setup menu (0403).
- [Select for upload to computer]: Displayed when the camera is
connected to a computer via built-in Wi-Fi using [Connect to
computer] in the setup menu (0405).
･Videos cannot be selected for upload when the camera is connected
to a smart device via the SnapBridge app.
･The maximum le size for videos uploaded by other means is 4 GB.
1Select the desired picture and press the i button.
2Highlight [Select for upload to smart device] or [Select for
upload to computer] and press J.
The picture will be marked with a W icon.
DRemoving upload marking
To remove upload marking, repeat Steps 1 and 2.
The i button (playback mode)
201
Choose start/end point
❚❚
Trim footage from the current video and save the edited copy in a new
le.
1Display a video full frame.
2Pause the video on the new opening frame.
･Press the J button to start playback videos. Press 3 to pause.
･Your approximate position in the video can be ascertained from
the video progress bar.
･Press 4 or 2 or rotate the main command dial to locate the
desired frame.
3Select [Choose start/end point].
Press the i button, highlight [Choose start/end point], and press
J.
The i button (playback mode)
202
4Choose the start point.
To create a copy that begins from the current frame, highlight [Start
point] and press J.
5Conrm the new start point.
･If the desired frame is not currently displayed, press 4 or 2 to
advance or rewind.
･Rotate the main command dial one stop to skip ahead or back 10 s.
･Rotate the sub-command dial to skip to the last or rst frame.
The i button (playback mode)
203
6Choose the end point.
･Press the A (g) button to switch to the end-point selection tool
(x) and then select the closing frame (x) as described in Step 5.
7Press 1 to create the copy.
8Preview the copy.
･To preview the copy, highlight [Preview] and press J (to interrupt
the preview and return to the save options menu, press 1).
･To abandon the current copy and return to Step 5, highlight
[Cancel] and press J.
The i button (playback mode)
204
9Choose a save option.
･Choose [Save as new le] and press the J button to save the
edited copy as a new le.
･To replace the original video with the edited copy, highlight
[Overwrite existing le], press J, and then highlight [Yes] and
press J.
DTrimming videos
･The copy will not be saved if there is insucient space available on the
memory card.
･Videos less than two seconds long cannot be edited using [Choose
start/end point].
･Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.
DRemoving opening or closing footage
･To remove only the closing footage from a video, choose [End point] in
Step 4, press the J button, and proceed to Step 7 without pressing the A
(g) button in Step 6.
･To remove only the opening footage, proceed to Step 7 without pressing
the A (g) button in Step 6.
DThe [Trim video] option (retouch menu)
Videos can also be edited using the [Trim video] item in the retouch menu.
Save current frame
❚❚
Save a selected frame as a JPEG still.
The i button (playback mode)
205
1Pause the video on the desired frame.
･Press 3 to pause playback.
･Press 4 or 2 to locate the desired frame.
2Choose [Save current frame].
Press the i button, then highlight [Save current frame] and press J
to create a JPEG copy of the current frame.
D[Save current frame]
･Stills are saved at the dimensions selected for [Frame size/frame rate] in
the video recording menu when the video was recorded.
･They cannot be retouched.
･Some categories of photo information are not displayed during playback.
Playback zoom
206
Playback zoom
Press X or J to zoom in on photos displayed in full-frame playback. [DX
(24×16)]-format images can be zoomed in to a maximum of
approximately 21× for Large, 16× for Medium, or 10× for Small.
Using playback zoom
To Description
Zoom in/
zoom
out
･Press the X button or
use stretch gestures
to zoom in.
･To zoom out, press
W (Q) or use pinch
gestures.
A navigation window is displayed
during the zoom ratio is altered, with
the area currently visible indicated by a
yellow border. A bar below the
navigation window shows the zoom
ratio, turning green at 1:1. The
navigation window clears from the
display after a few seconds.
View
other
areas of
image
Use the multi selector or glide gestures to view areas of image
not visible in the monitor. Keep the multi selector pressed to
scroll rapidly to other areas of frame.
Playback zoom
207
To Description
Select
faces
Faces detected during zoom are indicated by white borders in
the navigation window. Rotate the sub-command dial or tap the
on-screen guide to view other faces.
View
other
pictures
Rotate the main command dial to view the same location in
other photos without changing the zoom ratio (selecting a video
cancels zoom). You can also view other photos by tapping the e
or f icon at the bottom of the display.
Exit to
shootin
g mode
Press the shutter-release button halfway or press the K button
to exit.
View
menus Press the G button to view the menus.
Deleting pictures
208
Deleting pictures
Follow the steps below to delete pictures from memory cards. Note that
pictures cannot be recovered once deleted. Pictures that are protected,
however, cannot be deleted.
Using the delete button
Press the O button to delete the current picture.
1Select the desired picture with the multi selector and press the
O button.
･A conrmation dialog will be displayed.
･To exit without deleting the picture, press K.
2Press the O button again.
The picture will be deleted.
ACalendar playback
During calendar playback, you can delete all photographs taken on a
selected date by highlighting the date in the date list and pressing the O
button.
Deleting pictures
209
Deleting multiple pictures
Use [Delete] in the playback menu to delete multiple pictures at once.
Note that depending on the number of images, some time may be
required for deletion.
Option Description
Q[Selected pictures] Delete selected pictures.
i[Pictures shot on
selected dates]
Delete all pictures taken on selected dates
(0210).
R[All pictures]
Delete all pictures in the folder currently
selected for [Playback folder] in the playback
menu.
Deleting selected pictures
❚❚
1Select pictures.
･Highlight pictures using the multi selector and press the W (Q)
button to select; selected pictures are marked with O icons.
Selected pictures can be deselected by pressing the W (Q) button
again.
･Repeat until all the desired pictures are selected.
･To view the highlighted picture zoomed in, press and hold the X
button.
Deleting pictures
210
2Delete the pictures.
･Press J; a conrmation dialog will be displayed.
･Highlight [Yes] and press J to delete the selected pictures.
Pictures shot on selected dates
❚❚
1Select dates.
･Highlight dates using the multi selector and press 2 to select;
selected dates are marked with M icons. Selected dates can be
deselected by pressing 2 again.
･Repeat until you have selected all the desired dates.
Deleting pictures
211
2Delete the pictures.
･Press J; a conrmation dialog will be displayed.
･Highlight [Yes] and press J to delete all the pictures taken on the
selected dates.
Defaults
212
Menu guide
Defaults
The defaults for the playback, photo shooting, video recording, Custom
Settings, and setup menus are listed below.
Playback menu defaults
Playback menu option Default
[Delete] —
[Playback folder] All
[Playback display options]
[Focus point]U
[Exposure info]U
[Highlights]U
[RGB histogram]U
[Shooting data]U
[Overview]U
[None (picture only)]U
[Picture review]O
[Rotate tall] On
[Slide show]
[Picture type] Photos and videos
[Frame interval] 2 s
Defaults
213
Playback menu option Default
[Rating] —
Photo shooting menu defaults
Photo shooting menu option Default
[Reset photo shooting menu] —
[Storage folder]
[Rename] NZ_30
[Select folder by number] 100
[Select folder from list] —
[File naming] DSC
[Choose image area] DX (24×16)
[Image quality] JPEG normal
[Image size] Large
[RAW recording] 14-bit
[ISO sensitivity settings]
[ISO sensitivity]P, S, A, M: 100
[Auto ISO sensitivity control] On
[Maximum sensitivity] 51200
[Maximum sensitivity with c] Same as without ash
[Minimum shutter speed] Auto
[White balance]j: Keep overall atmosphere
Fine-tune A-B: 0, G-M: 0
Defaults
214
Photo shooting menu option Default
[Choose color temperature] 5000 K
[Preset manual] d-1
[Set Picture Control] Auto
[Manage Picture Control] —
[Color space] sRGB
[Active D-Lighting]O
[Long exposure NR]O
[High ISO NR] Normal
[Vignette control] Normal
[Diraction compensation] On
[Auto distortion control] On
[Flicker reduction shooting]O
[Metering] Matrix metering
[Flash control]
[Flash control mode] TTL
[Wireless ash options]O
[Flash mode] Fill ash
[Flash compensation] 0.0
[Release mode] Single frame
[Focus mode] AF mode auto-switch
[AF-area mode] Auto-area AF (people)
[Vibration reduction] (Varies with lens)
Defaults
215
Photo shooting menu option Default
[Auto bracketing]
[Auto bracketing set] AE & ash bracketing
[Number of shots] 0
[Increment] 1.0
[Multiple exposure]
[Multiple exposure mode]O
[Number of shots] 2
[Overlay mode] Average
[Save individual pictures (RAW)] On
[Overlay shooting] On
[Select rst exposure (RAW)] —
[HDR (high dynamic range)]
[HDR mode]O
[Exposure dierential] Auto
[Smoothing] Normal
[Save individual pictures (RAW)]O
[Interval timer shooting]
[Choose start day/time] Now
[Interval] 1 min.
[Intervals×shots/interval] 0001×1
[Exposure smoothing] On
[Silent photography] On
Defaults
216
Photo shooting menu option Default
[Interval priority]O
[Focus before each shot]O
[Options]O
[Starting storage folder]
[New folder]U
[Reset le numbering]U
[Time-lapse video]
[Interval] 5 s
[Shooting time] 25 min.
[Exposure smoothing] On
[Silent photography] On
[Frame size/frame rate] 1920×1080; 60p
[Interval priority]O
[Focus before each shot]O
[Focus shift shooting]
[No. of shots] 100
[Focus step width] 5
[Interval until next shot] 0
[First-frame exposure lock] On
[Silent photography] On
[Starting storage folder]
[New folder]U
Defaults
217
Photo shooting menu option Default
[Reset le numbering]U
[Silent photography]O
Video recording menu defaults
Video recording menu option Default
[Reset video recording menu] —
[File naming] DSC
[Frame size/frame rate] 1920×1080; 60p
[Video quality] High quality
[Video le type] MOV
[ISO sensitivity settings]
[Maximum sensitivity] 25600
[Auto ISO control (mode M)] On
[ISO sensitivity (mode M)] 100
[White balance] Same as photo settings
Fine-tune A-B: 0, G-M: 0
[Choose color temperature] 5000 K
[Preset manual] d-1
[Set Picture Control] Same as photo settings
[Manage Picture Control] —
[Active D-Lighting]O
[High ISO NR] Normal
Defaults
218
Video recording menu option Default
[Vignette control] Normal
[Diraction compensation] On
[Auto distortion control] On
[Flicker reduction] Auto
[Metering] Matrix metering
[Release mode (save frame)] Single frame
[Focus mode] Full-time AF
[AF-area mode] Auto-area AF (people)
[Vibration reduction] Same as photo settings
[Electronic VR]O
[Microphone sensitivity] Auto
[Attenuator] Disable
[Frequency response] Wide range
[Wind noise reduction]O
[Timecode]
[Record timecodes]O
[Count-up method] Record run
[Timecode origin] —
[Drop frame] On
Defaults
219
Custom Settings menu defaults
Custom Settings menu option Default
[Reset custom settings] —
a1 [AF-C priority selection] Release
a2 [AF-S priority selection] Focus
a3 [Focus tracking with lock-on] 3
a4 [Focus points used] All points
a5 [Store points by orientation] No
a6 [AF activation] Shutter/AF-ON
a7
[Limit AF-area mode selection]
[Pinpoint AF]M
[Single-point AF]L(cannot be deselected)
[Dynamic-area AF]M
[Wide-area AF (S)]M
[Wide-area AF (L)]M
[Wide-area AF (L-people)]M
[Wide-area AF (L-animals)]M
[Auto-area AF]M
[Auto-area AF (people)]M
[Auto-area AF (animals)]M
a8 [Focus point wrap-around] No wrap
a9
[Focus point options]
[Manual focus mode] On
Defaults
220
Custom Settings menu option Default
a9 [Dynamic-area AF assist] On
a10 [Low-light AF] On
a11 [Manual focus ring in AF
mode]Enable
b1 [Easy exposure compensation]O
b2 [Center-weighted area] Φ 8 mm
b3
[Fine-tune optimal exposure]
[Matrix metering] 0
[Center-weighted metering] 0
[Spot metering] 0
[Highlight-weighted
metering]0
c1 [Shutter-release button AE-L]O
c2
[Self-timer]
[Self-timer delay] 10 s
[Number of shots] 1
[Interval between shots] 0.5 s
c3
[Power o delay]
[Playback] 10 s
[Menus] 1 min
[Picture review] 4 s
[Standby timer] 30 s
d1 [CL mode shooting speed] 3 fps
Defaults
221
Custom Settings menu option Default
d2 [Maximum shots per burst] 100
d3 [Exposure delay mode]O
d4 [Shutter type] Auto
d5 [File number sequence] On
d6 [Apply settings to live view] On
d7 [Framing grid display]O
d8
[Focus peaking]
[Peaking level]O
[Peaking highlight color] Red
d9 [View all in continuous mode] On
e1 [Flash sync speed] 1/200 s
e2 [Flash shutter speed] 1/60 s
e3 [Exposure comp. for ash] Entire frame
e4 [Auto c ISO sensitivity control] Subject and background
e5 [Auto bracketing (mode M)] Flash/speed
e6 [Bracketing order] MTR > under > over
Defaults
222
Custom Settings menu option Default
f1 [Customize i menu]
Set Picture Control,
White balance,
Image quality,
Image size,
Flash mode,
Metering,
Wi-Fi connection,
Active D-Lighting,
Release mode,
Vibration reduction,
AF-area mode,
Focus mode
f2
[Custom controls (shooting)]
[Fn1 button] White balance
[Fn2 button] Focus mode/AF-area mode
[AE-L/AF-L button] AE/AF lock
[OK button] Select center focus point
[Video record button] Live view info display o
[Lens Fn button] AE/AF lock
[Lens Fn2 button] AF-ON
[Lens control ring] (Varies with lens)
f3
[Custom controls (playback)]
[AE-L/AF-L button] Protect
[OK button] Zoom on/o
f4 [Customize command dials]
Defaults
223
Custom Settings menu option Default
f4
[Reverse rotation]Exposure compensation: U, Shutter
speed/aperture: U
[Change main/sub]Exposure setting: O, Autofocus
setting: O
[Menus and playback]O
[Sub-dial frame advance] 10 frames
f5 [Release button to use dial] No
f6 [Reverse indicators]
g1 [Customize i menu]
Set Picture Control,
White balance,
Frame size and rate/Video quality,
Microphone sensitivity,
Wind noise reduction,
Metering,
Wi-Fi connection,
Active D-Lighting,
Electronic VR,
Vibration reduction,
AF-area mode,
Focus mode
g2
[Custom controls]
[Fn1 button] White balance
[Fn2 button] Focus mode/AF-area mode
[AE-L/AF-L button] AE/AF lock
[OK button] Select center focus point
[Shutter-release button] Take photos
Defaults
224
Custom Settings menu option Default
g2
[Lens Fn button] AE/AF lock
[Lens Fn2 button] AF-ON
[Lens control ring] (Varies with lens)
g3
[AF speed] 0
[When to apply] Always
g4 [AF tracking sensitivity] 4
g5
[Highlight display]
[Display pattern]O
[Highlight display
threshold]248
Setup menu defaults
Setup menu option Default
[Format memory card] —
[Save user settings] —
[Reset user settings] —
[Language](Default varies with country of
purchase)
[Time zone and date]
[Time zone](Default varies with country of
purchase)
[Date and time] —
Defaults
225
Setup menu option Default
[Date format](Default varies with country of
purchase)
[Daylight saving time]O
[Monitor brightness] 0
[Monitor color balance] A-B: 0, G-M: 0
[REC lamp brightness]
[Video recording] 2
[Time-lapse video recording]O
[Information display] Dark on light
[AF ne-tuning options]
[AF ne-tune]O
[Fine-tune and save lens] —
[Default] —
[List saved values] —
[Non-CPU lens data]
[Lens number] 1
[Focal length (mm)] —
[Maximum aperture] —
[Save focus position]O
[Image Dust O ref photo] —
[Pixel mapping] —
[Image comment]
Defaults
226
Setup menu option Default
[Attach comment]U
[Copyright information]
[Attach copyright information]U
[Beep options]
[Beep on/o]O
[Volume] 2
[Pitch] Low
[Touch controls]
[Enable/disable touch controls] Enable
[Full-frame playback icks] LeftVRight
[Self-portrait mode] Enable
[HDMI]
[Output resolution] Auto
[Advanced]
[Output range] Auto
[External recording control]O
[Airplane mode] Disable
[Connect to smart device]
[Pairing (Bluetooth)]
[Bluetooth connection] Disable
[Select for upload (Bluetooth)]
[Auto select for upload]O
Defaults
227
Setup menu option Default
[Wi-Fi connection] —
[Upload while o] On
[Location data (smart device)]
[Latitude] —
[Longitude] —
[Altitude] —
[UTC] —
[Connect to computer]
[Wi-Fi connection] Disable
[Network settings] —
[Options]
[Auto upload]O
[Delete after upload] No
[Upload le as] RAW + JPEG
[Deselect all?] —
[MAC address] —
[Wireless remote (ML-L7) options]
[Wireless remote connection] Disable
[Save wireless remote controller] —
[Delete wireless remote controller] —
[Assign Fn1 button] Same as camera K button
[Assign Fn2 button] Same as camera G button
Defaults
228
Setup menu option Default
[Conformity marking] —
[USB power delivery] Enable
[Energy saving (photo mode)] Enable
[Slot empty release lock] Enable release
[Save/load menu settings] —
[Reset all settings] —
[Firmware version] —
D The playback menu: Managing images
229
D The playback menu: Managing
images
To display the playback menu, select the D (playback menu) tab in the
camera menus.
The playback menu contains the following items:
Item 0
[Delete]229
[Playback folder]230
[Playback display options]230
[Picture review]231
Item 0
[Rotate tall]231
[Slide show]231
[Rating]233
DSee also
“Playback menu defaults” (0212)
Delete
G button U D playback menu
Delete multiple images. For more information, see “Deleting multiple
pictures” (0209).
Option Description
Q[Selected pictures] Delete selected pictures.
D The playback menu: Managing images
230
Option Description
i[Pictures shot on
selected dates]Delete all pictures taken on selected dates.
R[All pictures]
Delete all pictures in the folder currently
selected for [Playback folder] in the playback
menu.
Playback folder
G button U D playback menu
Choose a folder for playback.
Option Description
(Folder name)
Pictures in all folders with the selected name will be visible
during playback. Folders can be renamed using the [Storage
folder] > [Rename] option in the photo shooting menu.
[All] Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.
[Current]Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during
playback.
Playback display options
G button U D playback menu
Choose whether the focus points used when the photograph was taken
are displayed during full-frame playback. You can also choose the types
of photo information that can be viewed during full-frame playback.
･Highlight an option and press 2 to select (M) or deselect (U).
･To complete the operation, press J.
D The playback menu: Managing images
231
Picture review
G button U D playback menu
Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor
immediately after shooting.
Option Description
[On] Pictures are displayed in the monitor.
[O] Pictures can only be viewed by pressing the K button.
Rotate tall
G button U D playback menu
When [On] is selected, “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures will be
automatically rotated for display during playback.
DRotate tall
Images are not rotated automatically during picture review even when [On]
is selected for [Rotate tall].
Slide show
G button U D playback menu
View a slide show; pictures are displayed in the order recorded. The
pictures in the folder currently selected for [Playback folder] (0230)
will be displayed one-by-one in the order recorded.
Option Description
[Start] Start the slide show.
D The playback menu: Managing images
232
Option Description
[Picture type]
･Choose the type of picture displayed.
･Select [By rating] to view only pictures with selected
ratings. Highlight ratings and press 2 to select (M) or
deselect (U).
[Frame
interval]Choose how long each picture will be displayed.
Viewing slide shows
To start the slide show, highlight [Start] and press J. The following
operations can be performed while the slide show is in progress:
To Description
Skip back/skip
ahead
Press 4 to return to the previous frame, 2 to skip to
the next frame.
View additional
photo info
Press 1 or 3 to choose the photo info displayed. To
hide photo info, select [None (picture only)].
Pause Press J to pause the slide show. To restart, highlight
[Restart] and press J.
Adjust volume Press X to increase volume, W (Q) to decrease.
Exit to the playback
menu
Press G to end the slide show and return to the
playback menu.
Exit to playback
mode
Press K to end the slide show and return to the
playback display.
D The playback menu: Managing images
233
To Description
Resume shooting Press the shutter-release button halfway to return to
shooting mode.
A dialog is displayed when the show ends. To restart, highlight [Restart]
and press J. To end the show, highlight [Exit] and press J.
Rating
G button U D playback menu
Rate pictures.
･Highlight pictures using the multi selector 4 or 2.
･Press 1 or 3 to choose a rating of from zero to ve stars, or select d
to mark the picture as a candidate for later deletion.
･To view the highlighted picture zoomed in, press and hold the X
button.
･Press J to save changes.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
234
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting
options
To view the photo shooting menu, select the C tab in the camera
menus.
The photo shooting menu contains the following items:
Item 0
[Reset photo shooting menu]235
[Storage folder]235
[File naming]239
[Choose image area]240
[Image quality]241
[Image size]241
[RAW recording]242
[ISO sensitivity settings]242
[White balance]244
[Set Picture Control]251
[Manage Picture Control]253
[Color space]258
Item 0
[Active D-Lighting]258
[Long exposure NR]258
[High ISO NR]259
[Vignette control]260
[Diraction compensation]260
[Auto distortion control]261
[Flicker reduction shooting]261
[Metering]262
[Flash control]263
[Flash mode]265
[Flash compensation]265
[Release mode]265
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
235
Item 0
[Focus mode]265
[AF-area mode]266
[Vibration reduction]266
[Auto bracketing]266
[Multiple exposure]277
Item 0
[HDR (high dynamic range)]285
[Interval timer shooting]292
[Time-lapse video]305
[Focus shift shooting]314
[Silent photography]322
DSee also
“Photo shooting menu defaults” (0213)
Reset photo shooting menu
G button U C photo shooting menu
Restore photo shooting menu options to their default values.
･Photo shooting menu reset is not available while a multiple exposure
is in progress.
Storage folder
G button U C photo shooting menu
Choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored.
1Folder
2Folder number
3Folder name
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
236
Renaming folders
The default folder name, which appears after the folder number, is
“NZ_30”
. To change the name assigned to new folders, select [Rename].
･Existing folders cannot be renamed.
･If desired, the default name can be restored for subsequent folders by
pressing and holding the O button while the keyboard is displayed.
DText entry
A keyboard is displayed when text entry is required.
･Tap letters on the screen to insert them at the current cursor position. You
can also enter characters by highlighting them with the multi selector and
pressing J.
1Text display area 2Keyboard area
･To move the cursor to a new position, tap the display or rotate the main
command dial.
･If a character is entered when the text display area is full, the rightmost
character will be deleted.
･To delete the character under the cursor, press the O button.
･To complete entry, press X.
･To exit without completing text entry, press G.
Select folder by number
The folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored can be selected
by number. If a folder with the specied number does not already exist,
a new folder will be created.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
237
1Choose [Select folder by number].
･Highlight [Select folder by number] and press 2 to display the
[Select folder by number] dialog.
2Choose a folder number.
･Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits.
･To change the highlighted digit, press 1 or 3.
3Save changes and exit.
･If a folder with the selected number already exists, a W, X, or Y
icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number. Press J to
complete the operation and return to the main menu; if you chose
a folder marked W or X it will be selected as the folder for new
pictures.
･If you chose a folder number that does not already exist, a new
folder will be created with that number when you press J.
･In either case, subsequent pictures will be stored in the chosen
folder.
･To exit without changing the storage folder, press the G button.
DFolder icons
Folders in the [Select folder by number] dialog are shown by W if empty, by
Y if full (containing either 5000 pictures or a picture numbered 9999), or by
X if partially full. A Y icon indicates that no further pictures can be stored in
the folder.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
238
Select folder from list
To choose from a list of existing folders:
1Choose [Select folder from list].
Highlight [Select folder from list] and press 2 to display the
[Select folder from list] dialog.
2Highlight a folder.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a folder.
3Select the highlighted folder.
･Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the main
menu.
･Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
239
DFolder and le numbers
･Once the folder number has reached 999, the camera will stop creating
new folders automatically and disable the shutter release if:
- the current folder contains 5000 pictures (in addition, video recording
will be disabled if the camera calculates that the number of les needed
to record a video of the maximum length would result in the folder
containing over 5000 les), or
- the current folder contains a picture numbered 9999 (in addition,
video recording will be disabled if the camera calculates that the
number of les needed to record a video of the maximum length would
result in a le numbered over 9999).
･If there is space on the memory card, you will nevertheless be able to
continue shooting by:
- creating a folder with a number less than 999 and selecting it as the
storage folder, or
- changing the options selected for [Frame size/frame rate] and [Video
quality] before recording videos.
DStartup time
Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card
contains a very large number of les or folders.
File naming
G button U C photo shooting menu
Pictures are saved using le names consisting of “DSC_” followed by a
four-digit number and a three-letter extension. [File naming] is used to
select three letters to replace the “DSC” portion of the le name. For
information on text entry, see “Text entry” (0236).
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
240
DFile names
･File names take the form “DSC_nnnn.xxx”. nnnn is a number from 0001 to
9999. xxx is one of the following extensions, assigned according to the
options selected for image quality and le type:
- NEF: RAW photos
- JPG: JPEG (ne, normal, or basic) photos
- MOV: MOV videos
- MP4: MP4 videos
- NDF: Dust o reference data
･Images created with [Adobe RGB] selected for [Color space] have le
names of the form “_DSCnnnn.xxx”.
･In each pair of photographs recorded at image-quality settings of
RAW+JPEG, the RAW and JPEG images have the same le names but
dierent extensions.
Choose image area
G button U C photo shooting menu
The camera oers a choice of the following image areas:
Option Description
a[DX (24×16)]
Pictures are recorded with an image area of 23.5×15.7
mm (DX format). To calculate the approximate focal
length of the lens in 35mm format, multiply by 1.5.
m[1:1 (16×16)] Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 1:1.
Z[16:9 (24×14)] Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 16:9.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
241
Image quality
G button U C photo shooting menu
Choose a le format for photographs. For more information, see “Image
quality” in “The i menu” (0161).
Image size
G button U C photo shooting menu
Choose the size, in pixels, of pictures recorded with the camera. Note
that image size varies with the option selected for image area.
Image area Image size Size (cm/in.) when printed at 300
dpi*
[DX (24×16)]
Large (5568 × 3712
pixels)
Approx. 47.1 × 31.4 cm/18.6 × 12.4
in.
Medium (4176 × 2784
pixels)
Approx. 35.4 × 23.6 cm/13.9 × 9.3
in.
Small (2784 × 1856
pixels) Approx. 23.6 × 15.7 cm/9.3 × 6.2 in.
[1:1 (16×16)]
Large (3712 × 3712
pixels)
Approx. 31.4 × 31.4 cm/12.4 × 12.4
in.
Medium (2784 × 2784
pixels) Approx. 23.6 × 23.6 cm/9.3 × 9.3 in.
Small (1856 × 1856
pixels) Approx. 15.7 × 15.7 cm/6.2 × 6.2 in.
[16:9 (24×14)]Large (5568 × 3128
pixels)
Approx. 47.1 × 26.5 cm/18.6 × 10.4
in.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
242
Image area Image size Size (cm/in.) when printed at 300
dpi*
[16:9 (24×14)]
Medium (4176 × 2344
pixels)
Approx. 35.4 × 19.8 cm/13.9 × 7.8
in.
Small (2784 × 1560
pixels) Approx. 23.6 × 13.2 cm/9.3 × 5.2 in.
* Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer
resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch = 2.54 cm).
RAW recording
G button U C photo shooting menu
Choose a bit depth for RAW pictures.
Option Description
q[12-bit] RAW pictures are recorded at a bit depth of 12 bits.
r[14-bit]
RAW pictures are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits. Files
recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits contain more color data
than pictures recorded using [12-bit]. Files recorded at a bit
depth of 14 bits are also larger than pictures recorded using
[12-bit].
ISO sensitivity settings
G button U C photo shooting menu
Adjust ISO sensitivity settings for photographs.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
243
Option Description
[ISO
sensitivity]
Choose from values of from ISO 100 to 51200. Extended
settings of about 1 EV or 2 EV above ISO 51200 are also
available. In b mode, the setting is xed at ISO-A (AUTO),
and the camera sets the ISO sensitivity automatically.
[Auto ISO
sensitivity
control]
Highlight [On] and press J to enable auto ISO
sensitivity control. If [O] is selected, [ISO sensitivity]
will remain xed at the value selected by the user.
[Maximum
sensitivity]
Choose the upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control
to prevent it being raised too high.
[Maximum
sensitivity
with c]
Choose the upper ISO sensitivity limit for photos taken
using an optional ash unit.
[Minimum
shutter speed]
Choose the shutter speed (1/4000 to 30 s) below which
auto ISO sensitivity control will kick in to prevent
underexposure in modes P and A. If [Auto] is selected,
the camera will choose the minimum shutter speed
based on lens focal length. For example, the camera
will automatically choose faster minimum shutter
speeds to prevent blur caused by camera shake when a
long lens is attached.
･To view auto shutter-speed selection options, highlight
[Auto] and press 2. Auto shutter-speed selection can be
ne-tuned by choosing faster or slower minimums.
Faster settings can be used to reduce blur when
photographing fast-moving subjects.
･Shutter speeds may drop below the selected minimum
if optimal exposure cannot be achieved at the ISO
sensitivity chosen for [Maximum sensitivity].
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
244
White balance
G button U C photo shooting menu
Adjust white balance to match the color of the light source. For more
information, see “White balance” in “Basic settings” (0109) and “White
balance” in “The i menu” (0153).
The white balance menu: Fine-tuning
1Select [White balance] in the photo shooting menu, highlight
the desired option, and press 2 as often as necessary to display
ne-tuning options.
For information on ne-tuning L [Preset manual] white balance,
see “Fine-tuning preset manual white balance” (0250).
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
245
2Fine-tune white balance.
･The multi selector can be used to move the cursor up to six steps
from the center of the grid along either of the A (amber)–B (blue)
and G (green)–M (magenta) axes. The selected value is displayed to
the right of the grid.
･The A (amber)–B (blue) axis corresponds to color temperature and
is ruled in increments of 0.5. A change of 1 is equivalent to
approximately 5 mired.
･The G (green)–M (magenta) axis has eects similar to color
compensation lters and is ruled in increments of 0.25. A change
of 1 is equivalent to approximately 0.05 diuse density units.
3Save changes.
･Press J to save changes and exit to the menus.
･If white balance has been ne-tuned, an asterisk (“U”) will be
displayed in the icon.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
246
DWhite balance ne-tuning
The colors on the ne-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. Selecting more
of a color on a given axis does not necessarily result in that color appearing in
pictures. For example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting
such as J [Incandescent] is selected will make pictures slightly “colder” but
will not actually make them blue.
D“Mired”
Values in mired are calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color
temperature by 106. Any given change in color temperature produces a
greater dierence in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher
color temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much
greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired is a measure of color
temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is the unit
used in color-temperature compensation lters.
E.g.: Change in color temperature (in Kelvin): Value in mired
･4000 K – 3000 K = 1000 K: 83 mired
･7000 K – 6000 K = 1000 K: 24 mired
The white balance menu: Choosing a color
temperature
Choose a color temperature by entering values for the A (amber)–B
(blue) and G (green)–M (magenta) axes.
1Select [White balance] in the photo shooting menu, then
highlight K [Choose color temperature] and press 2.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
247
2Choose a color temperature.
･Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits on the A–B (amber–blue) axis. You
can also highlight the G–M (green–magenta) axis.
･Press 1 or 3 to edit the selected item.
A–B (amber–blue) axis G–M (green–magenta)
axis
3Save changes.
･Press J to save changes and exit to the menus.
･If a value other than 0 is selected for the green (G)–magenta (M)
axis, an asterisk (“U”) will appear in the icon.
DColor-temperature selection
･Do not use color-temperature selection with uorescent light sources;
instead, use the I [Fluorescent] option.
･When using color-temperature selection with other light sources, take a
test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
248
Preset manual: Copying white balance from a
photograph
The white balance values for existing photographs can be copied to
selected presets. For information on measuring new values for preset
manual white balance, see “Preset manual” (0156).
1Select [White balance] in the photo shooting menu, then
highlight L [Preset manual] and press 2.
2Select a destination.
･Using the multi selector, highlight the destination preset (d-1 to
d-6).
･Press X; a conrmation dialog will be displayed.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
249
3Choose [Select picture].
Highlight [Select picture] and press 2 to view the pictures on the
memory card.
4Highlight the source image.
･Use the multi selector to highlight the desired picture.
･To view the highlighted picture zoomed in, press and hold the X
button.
5Copy white balance.
･Press J to copy the white balance value for the highlighted
photograph to the selected preset.
･If the highlighted photograph has a comment, the comment will
be copied to the comment for the selected preset.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
250
DFine-tuning preset manual white balance
The selected preset can be ne-tuned by selecting [Fine-tune] in the preset
manual white balance menu (0244).
D“Edit comment”
To enter a descriptive comment of up to 36 characters for the current white-
balance preset, select [Edit comment] in the preset manual white balance
menu.
D“Protect”
To protect the current white-balance preset, select [Protect] in the preset
manual white balance menu. Highlight [On] and press J; the current white
balance preset is now protected. Protected presets cannot be modied.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
251
Set Picture Control
G button U C photo shooting menu
Choose image processing (“Picture Control”) options for new photos
according to the scene or your creative intent. For more information, see
“Set Picture Control” in “The i menu” (0147).
Modifying Picture Controls from the menus
Existing preset or custom Picture Controls can be modied to suit the
scene or the user’s creative intent.
1Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture Control in the Picture Control list and
press 2.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
252
2Edit the selected Picture Control.
･Press 1 or 3 to highlight settings (0151). Press 4 or 2 to choose
a value in increments of 1, or rotate the sub-command dial to
choose a value in increments of 0.25.
･The options available vary with the Picture Control selected.
･To quickly adjust levels for balanced [Sharpening], [Mid-range
sharpening], and [Clarity], highlight [Quick sharp] and press 4
or 2.
･To abandon any changes and start over from default settings, press
the O button.
3Save changes and exit.
Press J to save changes.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
253
DThe i menu
･To select Picture Controls in the i menu, highlight [Set Picture Control]
and press J.
･Press 4 and 2 to choose a Picture Control and press 3 to display Picture
Control settings. The eect of any changes can be previewed in the
display.
D[Manage Picture Control]
Modications to existing Picture Controls can be saved using the [Manage
Picture Control] item in the photo shooting menu or video recording menu,
creating custom Picture Controls that can then be copied to a memory card
and used in compatible software or shared among cameras of the same
model.
Manage Picture Control
G button U C photo shooting menu
Save modied Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls.
Option Description
[Save/edit]
Create a new custom Picture Control based on an existing
preset or custom Picture Control, or edit existing custom
Picture Controls.
[Rename] Rename custom Picture Controls.
[Delete] Delete custom Picture Controls.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
254
Option Description
[Load/save] Copy custom Picture Controls to and from the memory card.
Creating custom Picture Controls
1Select [Save/edit].
Highlight [Save/edit] and press 2 to view [Choose Picture Control]
options.
2Select a Picture Control.
･Highlight an existing Picture Control and press 2 to display edit
options.
･To save a copy of the highlighted Picture Control without further
modication, press J. [Save as] options will be displayed; proceed
to Step 4.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
255
3Edit the selected Picture Control.
･The settings available and the techniques for editing them are the
same as for [Set Picture Control].
･Press J to display [Save as] options when settings are complete.
･To abandon any changes and start over from default settings, press
the O button.
4Select a destination.
Choose a destination for the custom Picture Control (C-1 through
C-9).
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
256
5Name the Picture Control.
･Pressing 2 when a destination is highlighted in the previous step
displays the [Rename] text-entry dialog.
･By default, new Picture Controls are named by adding a two-digit
number to the name of the existing Picture Control. The two-digit
number is assigned automatically.
･Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen characters
long. New characters are added at the cursor position.
･To cycle through the upper- and lower-case and symbol
keyboards, tap the keyboard selection button.
･For information on text entry, see “Text entry” (0236).
･When entry is complete, press X to save the new Picture Control.
･The new Picture Control will be added to the Picture Control list.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
257
DThe original Picture Control icon
The original preset Picture Control on which the custom Picture Control is
based is indicated by an icon in the edit display.
DCustom Picture Control options
The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on
which the custom Picture Control was based.
DLoad/save
The [Load/save] item in the [Manage Picture Control] menu can be used to
copy custom Picture Controls from the camera to a memory card. You can
also delete custom Picture Controls in a memory card, or copy them to the
camera.
･[Copy to camera]: Copy (import) custom Picture Controls from the
memory card to the camera. The Picture Controls are copied to custom
Picture Controls C-1 through C-9 on the camera and can be named as
desired.
･[Delete from card]: Delete selected custom Picture Controls from the
memory card.
･[Copy to card]: Copy (export) a custom Picture Control from the camera
to a memory card. Highlight a destination (1 through 99) for the selected
Picture Control and press J to export it to the memory card.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
258
Color space
G button U C photo shooting menu
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color
reproduction. [sRGB] is recommended for general-purpose printing and
display. With a broader gamut of colors than [sRGB], [Adobe RGB] is a
better choice for professional publication and commercial printing.
DColor space
Third-party image viewing or editing software may substitute other color
spaces for the color space selected on the camera. The color space selected
on the camera can be used when pictures are opened in NX Studio.
DAdobe RGB
For accurate color reproduction, Adobe RGB images require applications,
displays, and printers that support color management.
Active D-Lighting
G button U C photo shooting menu
Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating pictures with
natural contrast. For more information, see “Active D-Lighting” in “The i
menu” (0165).
Long exposure NR
G button U C photo shooting menu
Reduce “noise” (bright spots or fog) in photographs taken at slow
shutter speeds.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
259
Option Description
[On]Reduce noise in photographs taken at shutter speeds slower than 1
s.
[O] Long-exposure noise reduction disabled.
Long-exposure noise reduction is performed after the photo is taken.
During processing, [Performing noise reduction] will appear in the
shooting display. Pictures cannot be taken until the message has cleared
from the display. The time required to process photos after shooting
roughly doubles.
DLong-exposure noise reduction
If the camera is turned o before processing is complete, the picture will be
saved but noise reduction will not be performed.
High ISO NR
G button U C photo shooting menu
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce
“noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels).
Option Description
[High]Reduce noise in photographs taken at all ISO sensitivities. The
higher the sensitivity, the greater the eect. Choose the amount
of noise reduction performed from [High], [Normal], and [Low].
[Normal]
[Low]
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
260
Option Description
[O]
Noise reduction is performed only as required. The amount of
noise reduction performed is always lower than when [Low] is
selected.
Vignette control
G button U C photo shooting menu
Vignette control reduces “vignetting”—a drop in brightness at the
edges of a photograph—by an amount that varies from lens to lens. Its
eects are most noticeable at maximum aperture.
Option Description
e[High]
Choose the amount of vignette control performed from (in
order from high to low) [High], [Normal], and [Low].
g[Normal]
f[Low]
[O] Vignette control disabled.
DVignette control
Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, JPEG images
may exhibit “noise” (fog) or over-processing at the edge of the frame that
introduces variations in peripheral brightness. In addition, custom Picture
Controls and preset Picture Controls that have been modied from default
settings may not produce the desired eect. Take test shots and view the
results in the monitor.
Diraction compensation
G button U C photo shooting menu
Select [On] to reduce diraction at small apertures (high f/-numbers).
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
261
Auto distortion control
G button U C photo shooting menu
Select [On] as required to reduce barrel distortion when shooting with
wide-angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion when shooting
with long lenses. Note that [On] may be selected automatically with
some lenses, in which case this item will be grayed out and unavailable.
Flicker reduction shooting
G button U C photo shooting menu
When [On] is selected, reduce the eects of icker from such light
sources as uorescent or mercury-vapor lamps.
･Flicker can cause uneven exposure or (in photographs taken in
continuous release modes) inconsistent exposure or coloration.
･Note that the frame rate for burst shooting may drop or become
erratic when [On] is selected.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
262
DFlicker reduction shooting in the photo shooting menu
･Depending on the light source, icker reduction may slightly delay shutter
response.
･Flicker reduction can detect icker at 100 and 120 Hz (associated
respectively with AC power supplies of 50 and 60 Hz). The desired results
may not be achieved if the frequency of the power supply changes during
burst photography.
･Flicker may not be detected or the desired results may not be achieved
depending on the light source and shooting conditions, for example with
scenes that are brightly lit or feature dark backgrounds.
･The desired results may also not be achieved with decorative lighting
displays and other non-standard lighting.
D[Flicker reduction shooting] in the photo shooting menu:
Restrictions
The [Flicker reduction shooting] item in the photo shooting menu does not
take eect under some conditions, including when:
･[Continuous H (extended)] is selected for the release mode
･[On] is selected for [Silent photography] in the photo shooting menu
･[On] is selected for [Silent photography] in the respective sub-menu
during interval-timer photography, time-lapse video recording, or focus
shift
･HDR is enabled
･Exposure delay mode is on
Metering
G button U C photo shooting menu
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. For more
information, see “Metering” in “The i menu” (0163).
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
263
Flash control
G button U C photo shooting menu
Adjust settings for wireless remote ash units or optional ash units
mounted on the camera accessory shoe.
･For information on adjusting settings for optional ash units
mounted on the camera accessory shoe, see “On-camera ash
photography” (0493).
･For information on adjusting settings for wireless remote ash units,
see “Remote ash photography” (0505).
Flash control mode
Choose a ash control mode and ash level and adjust other settings for
SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300 ash units mounted on the camera accessory
shoe.
･Settings for ash units other than the SB-500, SB-400, and SB-300 can
only be adjusted using ash unit controls.
Option Description
[TTL]Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting
conditions.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
264
Option Description
[Manual] Choose the ash level manually.
Wireless ash options
Adjust settings for simultaneous wireless control of multiple remote
ash units. This option is available only when an SB-500 ash unit is
mounted on the camera.
Option Description
Y[Optical AWL]The remote ash units are controlled using low-
intensity ashes emitted by the master ash (0506).
[O] Remote ash photography disabled.
Group ash options
Set ash options for each group when shooting with remote ash
photography using an optional ash unit (0505). This option is
available only when an SB-500 ash unit is mounted on the camera.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
265
Flash mode
G button U C photo shooting menu
Choose a ash mode for optional ash units. For more information, see
“Flash modes” in “On-camera ash photography” (0498).
Flash compensation
G button U C photo shooting menu
Adjust ash output to control the brightness of the main subject relative
to the background. Flash output can be increased to make the main
subject appear brighter, reduced to prevent glare, or otherwise ne-
tuned to produce the desired result (0501).
Release mode
G button U C photo shooting menu
Choose the operation performed when the shutter is released. For more
information, see “The c/E (release mode/self-timer) button” (0136).
Focus mode
G button U C photo shooting menu
Focus mode controls how the camera focuses. For more information, see
“Focus mode” in the “Focus” section of “Basic settings” (090).
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
266
AF-area mode
G button U C photo shooting menu
Choose how the camera selects the focus point for autofocus. For more
information, see “AF-area mode” in the “Focus” section of “Basic
settings” (092).
Vibration reduction
G button U C photo shooting menu
Choose whether to enable vibration reduction. For more information,
see “Vibration reduction” in “The i menu” (0168).
Auto bracketing
G button U C photo shooting menu
Vary exposure, ash level, Active D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance
slightly with each shot, “bracketing” the current value. Bracketing can be
used in situations in which getting the right settings is dicult and there
is not time to check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to
experiment with dierent settings for the same subject.
Option Description
[Auto
bracketing set]
Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto
bracketing is in eect.
･[AE & ash bracketing]: Perform both exposure and
ash-level bracketing.
･[AE bracketing]: Bracket only exposure.
･[Flash bracketing]: Perform only ash-level bracketing.
･[WB bracketing]: Perform white-balance bracketing.
･[ADL bracketing]: Perform bracketing using Active D-
Lighting.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
267
Option Description
[Number of
shots]Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
[Increment]
Choose the amount the selected settings vary with each
shot when an option other than [ADL bracketing] is
selected for [Auto bracketing set].
[Amount]Choose how Active D-Lighting varies with each shot when
[ADL bracketing] is selected for [Auto bracketing set].
Exposure and ash bracketing
No exposure
compensation
Exposure modied by: –1
EV
Exposure modied by:
+1 EV
1Select [AE & ash bracketing], [AE bracketing], or [Flash
bracketing] for [Auto bracketing set].
[Number of shots] and [Increment] options will be displayed.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
268
2Choose the number of shots.
･Highlight [Number of shots] and press 4 or 2 to choose the
number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
･At settings other than [0F], a bracketing icon will appear in the
display.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
269
3Select an exposure increment.
･Highlight [Increment] and press 4 or 2 to choose the bracketing
increment.
･The size of the increment can be chosen from 0.3 (1/3 step), 0.7
(2/3 step), 1.0 (1 step), 2.0 (2 steps), or 3.0 (3 steps). Bracketing
programs with an increment of 2.0 or 3.0 EV oer a maximum of 5
shots. If a value of 7 or 9 was selected in Step 2, the number of
shots will automatically be set to 5.
･The bracketing programs with an increment of 0.3 EV are listed
below.
[Number
of shots]
Exposure and ash
bracketing indicator
No. of
shots Bracketing order (EVs)
0F 0 0
+3F 3 0/+0.3/+0.7
-3F 3 0/-0.7/-0.3
+2F 2 0/+0.3
-2F 2 0/-0.3
3F 3 0/-0.3/+0.3
5F 5 0/-0.7/-0.3/+0.3/+0.7
7F 70/-1.0/-0.7/-0.3/+0.3/
+0.7/+1.0
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
270
[Number
of shots]
Exposure and ash
bracketing indicator
No. of
shots Bracketing order (EVs)
9F 90/-1.3/-1.0/-0.7/-0.3/+0.3/
+0.7/+1.0/+1.3
4Take pictures.
･Take the number of pictures in the bracketing program.
･The modied values for shutter speed and aperture are shown in
the display.
･While bracketing is in eect, the display shows a bracketing icon, a
bracketing progress indicator, and the number of shots remaining
in the bracketing sequence. After each shot, a segment will
disappear from the indicator and the number of shots remaining
will be reduced by one.
No. shots: 3
Increment: 0.7
Display after rst shot
･Exposure changes due to bracketing are added to those made
with exposure compensation.
Cancelling bracketing
❚❚
To cancel bracketing, select [0F] for [Number of shots].
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
271
DBracketing options
When [AE & ash bracketing] is selected, the camera varies both exposure
and ash level. Select [AE bracketing] to vary only exposure, [Flash
bracketing] to vary only ash level. Note that ash bracketing is available in
i-TTL and, where supported, auto aperture (qA) ash control modes only
(0495, 0535).
DExposure and ash bracketing
･In continuous release modes, shooting will pause after the number of
shots specied in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting will
resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed.
･If the camera is turned o before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, bracketing will resume from the rst shot in the sequence when
the camera is turned on.
DExposure bracketing
The settings (shutter speed and/or aperture) altered during exposure
bracketing vary with the shooting mode.
Mode Setting
PShutter speed and aperture1
SAperture1
AShutter speed1
MShutter speed2, 3
1 If [On] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO sensitivity
control] in the photo shooting menu, the camera will automatically vary
ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera
exposure system are exceeded.
2 If [On] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO sensitivity
control] in the photo shooting menu, the camera will rst use auto ISO
sensitivity control to bring exposure as close as possible to the optimum
and then bracket this exposure by varying shutter speed.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
272
3 Use Custom Setting e5 [Auto bracketing (mode M)] to choose whether
the camera varies shutter speed, aperture, or both shutter speed and
aperture.
White balance bracketing
1Select [WB bracketing] for [Auto bracketing set].
[Number of shots] and [Increment] options will be displayed.
2Choose the number of shots.
･Highlight [Number of shots] and press 4 or 2 to choose the
number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
･At settings other than [0F], a bracketing icon will appear in the
display.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
273
3Select a white balance increment.
･Highlight [Increment] and press 4 or 2 to choose the bracketing
increment.
･The size of the increment can be chosen from 1 (1 step), 2 (2 steps),
or 3 (3 steps).
･Each step is equivalent to 5 mired. Higher “A” values correspond to
increased amounts of amber. Higher “B” values correspond to
increased amounts of blue.
･The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below.
[Number
of shots]
White balance
bracketing indicator
No. of
shots
White
balance
increment
Bracketing
order
0F 0 1 0
B3F 3 1B 0/B1/B2
A3F 3 1A 0/A2/A1
B2F 2 1B 0/B1
A2F 2 1A 0/A1
3F 3 1A, 1B 0/A1/B1
5F 5 1A, 1B 0/A2/A1/B1/B2
7F 7 1A, 1B 0/A3/A2/A1/B1
/B2/B3
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
274
[Number
of shots]
White balance
bracketing indicator
No. of
shots
White
balance
increment
Bracketing
order
9F 9 1A, 1B 0/A4/A3/A2/A1
/B1/B2/B3/B4
4Take pictures.
･Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies
specied in the bracketing program, and each copy will have a
dierent white balance.
･Modications to white balance are added to the white balance
adjustment made with white balance ne-tuning.
･If the number of shots in the bracketing program is greater than
the number of exposures remaining, the shutter release will be
disabled. Shooting can begin when a new memory card is inserted.
Cancelling bracketing
❚❚
To cancel bracketing, select [0F] for [Number of shots].
DWhite balance bracketing restrictions
White balance bracketing is not available at image quality settings of RAW or
RAW + JPEG.
DWhite balance bracketing
･White balance bracketing aects only color temperature (the amber–blue
axis in the white balance ne-tuning display). No adjustments are made
on the green–magenta axis.
･If the camera is turned o while shooting, the camera will power o only
after all photographs have been taken.
･In self-timer mode, the number of copies specied in Step 2 of “White
balance bracketing” (0272) will be created each time the shutter is
released, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c2 [Self-
timer] > [Number of shots].
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
275
ADL bracketing
1Select [ADL bracketing] for [Auto bracketing set].
[Number of shots] and [Amount] options will be displayed.
2Choose the number of shots.
･Highlight [Number of shots] and press 4 or 2 to choose the
number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
･At settings other than [0F], a bracketing icon will appear in the
display.
･The number of shots determines the bracketing sequence:
No. of shots Bracketing sequence
2 [O]→Value selected in Step 3
3 [O]→[Low]→[Normal]
4 [O]→[Low]→[Normal]→[High]
5 [O]→[Low]→[Normal]→[High]→[Extra high]
･If you chose more than two shots, proceed to Step 4.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
276
3If you selected 2 shots, choose the Active D-Lighting amount.
･When the number of shots is 2, the Active D-Lighting setting for
the second shot can be selected by highlighting [Amount] and
pressing 4 or 2.
･The following options are available.
[Amount] Bracketing sequence
OFF L [O] → [Low]
OFF N [O] → [Normal]
OFF H [O] → [High]
OFF H+[O] → [Extra high]
OFF AUTO [O] → [Auto]
4Take pictures.
･Take the number of pictures in the bracketing program.
･While bracketing is in eect, the display shows an ADL bracketing
icon and the number of shots remaining in the bracketing
sequence. After each shot, the number of shots remaining will be
reduced by one.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
277
Cancelling ADL bracketing
❚❚
To cancel bracketing, select [0F] for [Number of shots].
DADL bracketing
･In continuous release modes, shooting will pause after the number of
shots specied in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting will
resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed.
･If the camera is turned o before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, bracketing will resume from the rst shot in the sequence when
the camera is turned on.
Multiple exposure
G button U C photo shooting menu
Record two to ten RAW exposures as a single photograph.
Option Description
[Multiple
exposure
mode]
･[On (series)]: Take a series of multiple exposures. To end
multiple exposure photography, select [Multiple
exposure mode] again and choose [O].
･[On (single photo)]: End multiple exposure photography
after creating a single multiple exposure.
･[O]: End multiple exposure photography.
[Number of
shots]
Choose the number of exposures that will be combined to
form a single photograph.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
278
Option Description
[Overlay
mode]
･[Add]: The exposures are overlaid without modication;
gain is not adjusted.
･[Average]: Gain is adjusted before the exposures are
overlaid. The gain for each exposure is equal to 1 divided
by the total number of exposures taken. For example, in
a photo made by combining two exposures, the gain for
each exposure will be set to 1/2, while in a photo
combining three exposures, gain will be set to 1/3.
･[Lighten]: The camera compares the pixels in each
picture and uses only the brightest.
･[Darken]: The camera compares the pixels in each
picture and uses only the darkest.
[Save
individual
pictures
(RAW)]
･[On]: Save both the multiple exposure and the shots that
make it up; the pictures are saved in RAW format.
･[O]: Discard the individual shots and save only the
multiple exposure.
[Overlay
shooting]
･[On]: Earlier exposures are superimposed on the view
through the lens. The earlier exposures aid composition
of the next shot.
･[O]: Earlier exposures are not displayed while shooting
is in progress.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
279
Option Description
[Select rst
exposure
(RAW)]
Choose the rst exposure from the RAW images on the
memory card.
Creating a multiple exposure
1Highlight [Multiple exposure] in the photo shooting menu and
press 2.
2Choose an option for [Multiple exposure mode].
･Highlight [Multiple exposure mode] and press 2.
･Highlight a multiple exposure mode using 1 or 3 and press J.
･If [On (series)] or [On (single photo)] is selected, an icon will
appear in the display.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
280
3Choose a value for [Number of shots] (number of exposures).
･Highlight [Number of shots] and press 2.
･Choose the number of exposures using 1 or 3 and press J.
4Choose an option for [Overlay mode].
･Highlight [Overlay mode] and press 2.
･Highlight an option using 1 or 3 and press J.
5Choose a setting for [Save individual pictures (RAW)].
･Highlight [Save individual pictures (RAW)] and press 2.
･Highlight an option using 1 or 3 and press J.
･To save both the multiple exposure and the shots that make it up,
select [On]; the individual shots are saved in RAW format. To save
only the multiple exposure, select [O].
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
281
6Choose an option for [Overlay shooting].
･Highlight [Overlay shooting] and press 2.
･Highlight an option using 1 or 3 and press J.
･Select [On] to superimpose earlier exposures on the view through
the lens. You can use the earlier exposures as a guide when
composing subsequent shots.
7Choose an option for [Select rst exposure (RAW)].
･To choose the rst exposure from existing RAW pictures, highlight
[Select rst exposure (RAW)] and press 2.
･Use the multi selector to highlight the desired picture.
･To view the highlighted picture zoomed in, press and hold the X
button.
･After highlighting the desired picture, press J.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
282
8Start shooting.
･Take the selected number of shots. If you used [Select rst
exposure (RAW)] to select an existing RAW image as the rst
exposure in Step 7, shooting will start from the second exposure.
･Once you have taken the selected number of shots, the pictures
will be overlaid to create a multiple exposure.
･If [On (series)] is selected for [Multiple exposure mode], you can
continue to take additional multiple exposures until [O] is
selected.
･If [On (single photo)] is selected, the camera will exit multiple
exposure mode once the number of shots selected in Step 3 has
been taken.
DSaved overlays
If you took pictures with the image quality set to RAW, JPEG images in the
[JPEG ne] image quality will be saved.
The i menu
❚❚
Pictures can be viewed by pressing the K button while a multiple
exposure is in progress. The most recent shot in the current multiple
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
283
exposure is indicated by a $ icon; pressing the i button when this icon
is present displays the multiple exposure i menu.
･Highlight items and press J to select.
･You can also have the option of using touch controls after pressing
the i button.
Option Description
[View progress]View a preview created from the exposures recorded
to the current point.
[Retake last
exposure]Retake the most recent exposure.
[Save and exit]Create a multiple exposure from the exposures taken
to current point.
[Discard and exit]
Exit without recording a multiple exposure.
･If [On] is selected for [Save individual pictures
(RAW)], the individual exposures will be saved
separately.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
284
DMultiple exposure
･If you use the menus or view pictures in the display while shooting a
multiple exposure, remember that shooting will end and the multiple
exposure will be recorded if no operations are performed for about 40
seconds (or in the case of menus, about 90 seconds). The time available to
record the next exposure can be extended by choosing longer times for
Custom Setting c3 [Power o delay] > [Playback] or [Menus].
･Multiple exposures may be aected by “noise” in the form of randomly-
spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines.
･In continuous shooting modes, the camera records all exposures in a
single burst. If [On (single photo)] is selected, multiple exposure shooting
will end after the rst multiple exposure is recorded. If [On (series)] is
selected, an additional multiple exposure will be recorded each time the
shutter-release button is pressed.
･In self-timer mode, the interval between each shot in the exposure is
selected using Custom Setting c2 [Self-timer] > [Interval between
shots]. Regardless of the value selected for the c2 [Number of shots]
option, shooting will however end after the number of shots selected for
the multiple exposure.
･Multiple exposures may end if settings are changed while shooting is in
progress.
･Shooting settings and photo info for multiple exposure photographs are
those for the rst exposure.
･Do not remove or replace the memory card while a multiple exposure is in
progress.
･Memory cards cannot be formatted while a multiple exposure is in
progress. Some menu items will be grayed out and unavailable.
DMultiple exposure: Restrictions
Multiple exposure cannot be combined with some camera features,
including:
･modes other than P, S, A, and M,
･video recording,
･bracketing,
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
285
･HDR (high dynamic range),
･interval-timer photography,
･time-lapse video recording, and
･focus shift.
Ending multiple exposures
❚❚
To end a multiple exposure before the specied number of exposures
have been taken, select [O] for multiple exposure mode. A multiple
exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to
that point (if [Average] is selected for [Overlay mode], gain will be
adjusted to reect the number of exposures actually recorded).
The multiple exposure will also end if:
･the standby timer expires after the rst exposure has been taken, or
･you press the K button followed by the i button and select either
[Save and exit] or [Discard and exit]
HDR (high dynamic range)
G button U C photo shooting menu
Used with high contrast subjects, High Dynamic Range (HDR) preserves
details in highlights and shadows by combining two shots taken at
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
286
dierent exposures. Use with high-contrast scenes and other subjects to
preserve a wide range of details, from highlights to shadows.
Option Description
[HDR mode]
･[On (series)]: Take a series of HDR photographs. To end
HDR photography, select [HDR mode] again and
choose [O].
･[On (single photo)]: End HDR photography after
recording a single HDR photograph.
･[O]: End HDR photography.
[Exposure
dierential]
Choose the dierence in exposure between the two
shots. The higher the value, the greater the dynamic
range. If [Auto] is selected, the camera will automatically
adjust the exposure dierential to suit the scene.
[Smoothing]Choose how much the boundaries between the two
images are smoothed.
[Save individual
pictures (RAW)]
Choose [On] to save each of the individual shots used to
create the HDR image; the shots are saved in RAW format.
Taking HDR photographs
We recommend that you use the matrix metering option when shooting
with HDR.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
287
1Highlight [HDR (high dynamic range)] in the photo shooting
menu and press 2.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
288
2Select an [HDR mode].
･Highlight [HDR mode] and press 2.
･Highlight one of the following options using 1 or 3 and press J.
Option Description
0[On (series)]
Take a series of HDR photographs. HDR shooting
will continue until you select [O] for [HDR
mode].
[On (single photo)]Normal shooting will resume after you have
taken a single HDR photograph.
[O]Proceed without taking additional HDR
photographs.
･If [On (series)] or [On (single photo)] is selected, an icon will
appear in the display.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
289
3Choose a value for [Exposure dierential].
･Highlight [Exposure dierential] and press 2.
･Highlight an option using 1 or 3 and press J.
･Choose higher values for high-contrast subjects.
･Note, however, that choosing a higher value than required may
not produce the desired results. Match your choice to the level of
contrast in the scene.
･If [Auto] is selected, the camera will automatically adjust the
exposure dierential to suit the scene.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
290
4Adjust [Smoothing].
･Highlight [Smoothing] and press 2.
･Highlight an option using 1 or 3 and press J; the selected option
represents the amount the boundaries between the two images
are smoothed.
･Higher values produce a smoother composite image.
5Choose a setting for [Save individual pictures (RAW)].
･Highlight [Save individual pictures (RAW)] and press 2.
･Highlight an option using 1 or 3 and press J.
･Choose [On] to save each of the individual shots used to create the
HDR image; the shots are saved in RAW format.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
291
6Frame the photograph, focus, and shoot.
･The camera takes two exposures when the shutter-release button
is pressed all the way down.
･If [On (series)] is selected for [HDR mode], you can continue to
take HDR photographs until [O] is selected.
･If [On (single photo)] is selected, HDR will turn o automatically
after a single shot.
･HDR photographs are recorded in JPEG format regardless of the
option selected for image quality.
DHDR photography
･The edges of the image will be cropped out.
･The desired results may not be achieved if the camera or subject moves
during shooting. Use of a tripod is recommended.
･Depending on the scene, you may notice shadows around bright objects
or halos around dark objects. This can be mitigated using [Smoothing].
･Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects.
･With spot or center-weighted metering, an [Exposure dierential] of
[Auto] is equivalent to [2 EV].
･Optional ash units will not re.
･In continuous release modes, only one photograph will be taken each
time the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down.
･Shutter speeds of “Bulb” and “Time” are not available.
DHDR restrictions
HDR cannot be combined with some camera features, including:
･modes other than P, S, A, and M,
･icker reduction,
･bracketing,
･multiple exposures,
･interval-timer photography,
･time-lapse video recording, and
･focus shift.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
292
Interval timer shooting
G button U C photo shooting menu
Take photographs at the selected interval until the specied number of
shots has been recorded. When using the interval timer, select a release
mode other than E.
Option Description
[Start]
Start interval timer shooting. Shooting will begin
either after 3 s ([Now] selected for [Choose start day/
time]) or at a selected date and time ([Choose day/
time]). Shooting will continue at the selected interval
until all shots have been taken.
[Choose start day/
time]
Choose a start option. Select [Now] to start shooting
immediately, [Choose day/time] to start shooting at a
chosen date and time.
[Interval]Specify the interval between shots in hours, minutes,
and seconds.
[Intervals×shots/
interval]
Choose the number of intervals and the number of
shots per interval.
[Exposure
smoothing]
Selecting [On] allows the camera to adjust exposure
to match the previous shot.
･Large changes in subject brightness during
shooting may result in apparent variations in
exposure. This can be addressed by shortening the
interval between shots.
･Exposure smoothing will not take eect in mode M
if [O] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] >
[Auto ISO sensitivity control] in the photo
shooting menu.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
293
Option Description
[Silent
photography]
Select [On] to silence the shutter and eliminate the
vibrations it produces during shooting.
･Selecting [On] does not completely silence the
camera. Camera sounds may still be audible, for
example during autofocus or aperture adjustment,
in the latter case most noticeably at apertures
smaller (i.e., at f-numbers higher) than f/5.6.
[Interval priority]
･[On]: Enable interval priority to ensure that frames
shot in modes P and A are taken at the chosen
interval.
- Select [Release] for Custom Setting a2 [AF-S
priority selection] when AF-S is selected for
focus mode and for Custom Setting a1 [AF-C
priority selection] when AF-C is selected.
- If [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO
sensitivity control] in the photo shooting menu
is set to [On], set [Minimum shutter speed] so
that it is shorter than the shooting interval.
･[O]: Disable interval priority to ensure that photos
are correctly exposed.
[Focus before each
shot]
If [On] is selected, the camera will focus between
shots.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
294
Option Description
[Options]
Combine interval-timer photography with other
options.
･[AE bracketing]: Perform exposure bracketing
during interval-timer photography.
･[Time-lapse video]: Use the photos taken during
interval-timer photography to create a time-lapse
video with an aspect ratio of 16:9.
- The camera saves both the photos and the time-
lapse video.
- Selecting [1:1 (16×16)] for [Choose image area]
in the photo shooting menu disables the shutter
release.
- Videos created using [Time-lapse video] are
recorded in the [sRGB] color space, regardless of
the option selected for [Color space] in the photo
shooting menu.
･[O]: Do not perform additional operations during
interval-timer photography.
[Starting storage
folder]
Highlight an option and press 2 to select (M) or
deselect (U).
･[New folder]: A new folder is created for each new
sequence.
･[Reset le numbering]: File numbering is reset to
0001 whenever a new folder is created.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
295
Interval-timer photography
DBefore shooting
･Take a test shot at current settings.
･Before proceeding, select [Time zone and date] in the setup menu and
make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date.
･To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, use a fully-charged battery or
an optional charging AC adapter.
1Highlight [Interval timer shooting] in the photo shooting menu.
Press 2 to select the highlighted item and view interval timer
shooting options.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
296
2Adjust interval timer settings.
･Choose the start day and time.
Highlight [Choose start
day/time] and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
- To start shooting immediately, select [Now].
- To start shooting at a chosen date and time, select [Choose day/
time]. Choose the date and time and press J.
･Choose the interval between shots.
Highlight [Interval] and
press 2.
Choose an interval (in
hours, minutes, and
seconds) and press J.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
297
･Choose the number of shots per interval.
Highlight
[Intervals×shots/
interval] and press 2.
Choose the number of
intervals and the number
of shots per interval and
press J.
- In single frame release mode, if the number of shots per interval
is set to two or more, the photographs for each interval will be
taken at the rate for continuous high-speed release mode.
- When [O] is selected for [Silent photography], the maximum
number of intervals will vary with the number of shots per
interval.
･Enable or disable exposure smoothing.
Highlight [Exposure
smoothing] and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
- Selecting [On] allows the camera to adjust exposure to match
the previous shot.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
298
･Enable or disable silent photography.
Highlight [Silent
photography] and press
2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
･Choose an interval priority option.
Highlight [Interval
priority] and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
･Choose whether the camera focuses between shots.
Highlight [Focus before
each shot] and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
299
･Choose additional options.
Highlight [Options] and
press 2.
Highlight [AE bracketing]
or [Time-lapse video]
and press J.
- If you selected [AE bracketing], choose values for [Number of
shots] and [Increment]; if you selected [Time-lapse video],
choose a setting for [Frame size/frame rate].
･Choose starting folder options.
Highlight [Starting
storage folder] and press
2.
Select the desired options
and press J to proceed.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
300
3Highlight [Start] and press J.
･If [Now] was selected for [Choose start day/time] in Step 2,
shooting will start after three seconds.
･Otherwise shooting will start at the time selected for [Choose
start day/time] > [Choose day/time].
･The display turns o during shooting.
･Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have
been taken.
DDuring shooting
･During interval timer photography, the memory card access lamp will
ash.
･If the display is turned on by pressing the shutter-release button halfway,
the message [Interval timer shooting] will be displayed and the Q icon
will ash.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
301
Pausing interval-timer photography
❚❚
Interval-timer photography can be paused between intervals by
pressing J or by selecting [Interval timer shooting] in the photo
shooting menu, highlighting [Pause], and pressing J. Note that the
menus may not be displayed when the G button is pressed if the time
selected for [Interval] is very short.
･If [Time-lapse video] is selected for [Options], pressing J between
intervals will end interval-timer photography.
Resuming interval timer shooting
❚❚
Interval timer shooting can be resumed as described below.
･To resume shooting immediately:
Highlight [Restart] and
press J.
･To resume shooting at a specied time:
Select [Restart
option], highlight
[Choose day/time]
and press 2.
Choose a starting
date and time and
press J.
Highlight [Restart]
and press J.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
302
Ending interval timer shooting
❚❚
To end interval-timer photography before all the photos are taken,
select [Interval timer shooting] in the photo shooting menu, highlight
[O], and press J. Note that the menus may not be displayed when the
G button is pressed if the time selected for [Interval] is very short. In
this case you will need to press J to pause interval-timer photography
and then select [Interval timer shooting] in the photo shooting menu,
highlight [O], and press J.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
303
DInterval-timer photography
･Choose an interval longer than the time needed to take the selected
number of shots at the predicted shutter speed. Note that during actual
interval-timer photography, the camera must not only take shots at the
selected interval but must also have sucient time to complete the
exposures and perform such tasks as processing the photographs. If the
interval is too short to take the selected number of photos, the camera
may skip to the next interval without shooting.
･If the interval is too short, the total number of shots taken may be less
than that selected for [Intervals×shots/interval].
･If you are using a ash, choose an interval longer than the time needed for
the ash to charge. If the interval is too short, the ash may re at less
than the power needed for full exposure.
･If shooting cannot proceed at current settings—for example, if shutter
speed is set to “Bulb” or “Time”, the [Interval] is [00:00'00"], or the start
time is in less than a minute—a warning will be displayed in the monitor.
･Interval-timer photography will not start if [On] is selected for both
[Silent photography] and [Interval priority] and [00:00'0.5"] is selected
for [Interval].
･If [On] is selected for [Silent photography] or [Time-lapse video] is
selected for [Options], the standby timer will not expire during interval-
timer photography, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting
c3 [Power o delay] > [Standby timer].
･If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no
pictures will be taken. Insert another memory card and resume shooting
(0301).
･Interval timer shooting will pause if:
- The camera is turned o and then on again (when the camera is o,
batteries and memory cards can be replaced without ending interval-
timer photography)
-E is selected for release mode
･Changing camera settings while the interval timer is active may cause
shooting to end.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
304
DRelease mode
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take the specied
number of shots at each interval.
DAdjusting settings between shots
Pictures can be viewed and shooting and menu settings adjusted between
shots. Note, however, that the monitor will turn o and shooting will resume
a few seconds before the next shot is taken.
DInterval-timer photography: Restrictions
Interval-timer photography cannot be combined with some camera features,
including:
･video recording,
･long time-exposures (“Bulb” or “Time”),
･the self-timer,
･bracketing,
･HDR (high dynamic range),
･multiple exposures, and
･focus shift.
DWhen [On] is selected for [Silent photography]
Selecting [On] for [Silent photography] disables some camera features,
including:
･ISO sensitivities of Hi 1 and Hi 2,
･ash photography,
･long-exposure noise reduction, and
･icker reduction.
DInterval timer settings
Turning the camera o or selecting a new release mode does not aect
interval-timer photography settings.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
305
Time-lapse video
G button U C photo shooting menu
The camera automatically takes photos at selected intervals to create a
time-lapse video.
Option Description
[Start]
Start time-lapse recording. Shooting starts after about 3
s and continues at the interval selected for [Interval] for
the time selected for [Shooting time].
[Interval]Choose the interval between shots, in minutes and
seconds.
[Shooting time]Choose how long the camera will continue to take
pictures, in hours and minutes.
[Exposure
smoothing]
Selecting [On] smooths abrupt changes in exposure.
･Large changes in subject brightness during shooting
may result in apparent variations in exposure. This can
be addressed by shortening the interval between
shots.
･Exposure smoothing will not take eect in mode M if
[O] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto
ISO sensitivity control] in the photo shooting menu.
[Silent
photography]
Select [On] to silence the shutter and eliminate the
vibrations it produces during shooting.
･Selecting [On] does not completely silence the
camera. Camera sounds may still be audible, for
example during autofocus or aperture adjustment, in
the latter case most noticeably at apertures smaller
(i.e., at f-numbers higher) than f/5.6.
[Frame size/
frame rate]Choose the frame size and rate for the nal video.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
306
Option Description
[Interval
priority]
･[On]: Enable interval priority to ensure that frames
shot in modes P and A are taken at the chosen
interval.
- Select [Release] for Custom Setting a2 [AF-S
priority selection] when AF-S is selected for focus
mode and for Custom Setting a1 [AF-C priority
selection] when AF-C is selected.
- If [On] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] >
[Auto ISO sensitivity control] and the time chosen
for [Minimum shutter speed] is longer than the
interval, the time selected for the interval will take
priority over the selected shutter speed.
･[O]: Disable interval priority to ensure that photos
are correctly exposed.
[Focus before
each shot]If [On] is selected, the camera will focus between shots.
Recording time-lapse videos
DBefore shooting
･Time-lapse videos are shot using the video crop.
･Take test shots and check the results in the monitor.
･Before proceeding, select [Time zone and date] in the setup menu and
make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date.
･To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, use a fully-charged battery or
an optional charging AC adapter.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
307
1Highlight [Time-lapse video] in the photo shooting menu.
Press 2 to select the highlighted item and view the [Time-lapse
video] menu.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
308
2Adjust time-lapse video settings.
･Choose the interval between shots.
Highlight [Interval] and
press 2.
Choose an interval (in
minutes and seconds) and
press J.
- Choose an interval longer than the slowest anticipated shutter
speed.
･Choose the total shooting time.
Highlight [Shooting
time] and press 2.
Choose a shooting time
(in hours and minutes)
and press J.
- The maximum shooting time is 7 hours and 59 minutes.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
309
･Enable or disable exposure smoothing.
Highlight [Exposure
smoothing] and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
- Selecting [On] smooths abrupt changes in exposure.
･Enable or disable silent photography.
Highlight [Silent
photography] and press
2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
･Choose the frame size and rate.
Highlight [Frame size/
frame rate] and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
310
･Choose an interval priority option.
Highlight [Interval
priority] and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
･Choose whether the camera focuses between shots.
Highlight [Focus before
each shot] and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
- If [On] is selected for [Focus before each shot], the camera will
focus before each shot according to the option currently selected
for focus mode.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
311
3Highlight [Start] and press J.
･Shooting starts after about 3 s.
･The display turns o during shooting.
･The camera takes pictures at interval selected for [Interval] for the
time selected for [Shooting time] in Step 2.
Ending shooting
❚❚
To end shooting before all the photos are taken, press J or select [Time-
lapse video] in the photo shooting menu, highlight [O], and press J.
Note that the menus may not be displayed when the G button is
pressed if the time selected for [Interval] is very short.
･A video will be created from the frames shot to the point where
shooting ended and normal photography will resume.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
312
DCalculating the length of the nal video
･The total number of frames in the nal video can be calculated by
dividing the shooting time selected in Step 2 by the interval, rounding up,
and adding 1.
･The length of the nal video can then be calculated by dividing the
number of shots by the frame rate selected for [Frame size/frame rate]
(for example, a 48-frame video recorded with [1920×1080; 24p] selected
for [Frame size/frame rate] will be about two seconds long).
･The maximum length for time-lapse videos is 20 minutes.
1Frame size/frame rate
2Length recorded/maximum
length
3Memory card indicator
DPicture review
The K button cannot be used to view pictures while shooting is in progress.
The current frame will however be displayed for a few seconds after each
shot if [On] is selected for [Picture review] in the playback menu. Note that
other playback operations cannot be performed while the frame is displayed.
The current frame may not be displayed if the interval is very short.
DTime-lapse videos
･Sound is not recorded with time-lapse videos.
･The shutter speed and the time needed to record the image to the
memory card may vary from shot to shot. As a result, the interval between
a shot being recorded and the start of the next shot may vary.
･Shooting will not begin if a time-lapse video cannot be recorded at
current settings, for example if:
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
313
- The value selected for [Interval] is longer than that selected for
[Shooting time]
- [00:00'00"] is selected for [Interval] or [Shooting time]
- [On] is selected for both [Silent photography] and [Interval priority]
and [00:00'0.5"] is selected for [Interval]
- The memory card is full
･If time-lapse video recording cannot start at current settings, for example
because shutter speed is set to “Bulb” or “Time”, a warning will be
displayed.
･The K button cannot be used to view pictures while time-lapse recording
is in progress.
･For consistent coloration, choose a white balance setting other than 4
[Auto] or D [Natural light auto] when recording time-lapse videos.
･Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 [Power o delay]
> [Standby timer], the standby timer will not expire while recording is in
progress.
･Shooting may end if camera controls are used, settings are changed, or an
HDMI cable is connected. A video will be created from the frames shot to
the point where shooting ended.
･The following end shooting without a beep sounding or a video being
recorded:
- Removing the battery
- Ejecting the memory card
DDuring shooting
The memory card access lamp lights while shooting is in progress.
DSettings between recordings
Shooting and menu settings can be adjusted between time-lapse video
recordings. Note, however, that the monitor will turn o and shooting will
resume in about 2 seconds before the next shot is taken.
DTime-lapse videos: Restrictions
Time-lapse video recording cannot be combined with some camera features,
including:
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
314
･video recording,
･long time-exposures (“Bulb” or “Time”),
･the self-timer,
･bracketing,
･HDR (high dynamic range),
･multiple exposures,
･interval-timer photography, and
･focus shift.
DWhen [On] is selected for [Silent photography]
Selecting [On] for [Silent photography] disables some camera features,
including:
･ISO sensitivities of Hi 1 and Hi 2,
･ash photography,
･exposure delay mode,
･long-exposure noise reduction, and
･icker reduction.
Focus shift shooting
G button U C photo shooting menu
Focus shift automatically varies focus over a series of shots. Use it to take
photos that will later be combined using focus stacking to create a
single image with increased depth of eld. Before using focus shift,
choose a focus mode of AF-A, AF-S, or AF-C and a release mode other
than E.
Option Description
[Start]
Start shooting. The camera will take the selected
number of shots, changing the focus distance by the
selected amount with each shot.
[No. of shots] Choose the number of shots (maximum 300).
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
315
Option Description
[Focus step
width]
Focus shift varies the focus distance over a series of
photographs. Choose the amount the focus distance
changes with each shot.
[Interval until
next shot]
Choose the interval between shots, in seconds.
･Select [00] to take photos at up to about 3 fps.
･To ensure correct exposure when using a ash,
choose an interval long enough for the ash to
charge.
[First-frame
exposure lock]
･[On]: The camera locks exposure for all shots at the
setting for the rst frame.
･[O]: The camera adjusts exposure before each shot.
[Silent
photography]
Select [On] to eliminate shutter sounds during
shooting.
･Selecting [On] does not completely silence the
camera. Camera sounds may still be audible, for
example during autofocus or aperture adjustment, in
the latter case most noticeably at apertures smaller
(i.e., at f-numbers higher) than f/5.6.
[Starting storage
folder]
Highlight an option and press 2 to select (M) or
deselect (U).
･[New folder]: A new folder is created for each new
sequence.
･[Reset le numbering]: File numbering is reset to
0001 whenever a new folder is created.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
316
Focus shift photography
DBefore shooting
･Take a test shot at current settings.
･To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, use a fully-charged battery or
an optional charging AC adapter.
1Focus.
･During focus shift, the camera takes a series of shots starting from
a selected focus position and continuing toward innity. Given
that shooting ends when innity is reached, the starting focus
position should be slightly in front of (i.e., closer to the camera
than) the closest point on the subject.
･Do not move the camera after focusing.
2Highlight [Focus shift shooting] in the photo shooting menu.
Press 2 to select the highlighted item and display focus shift
settings.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
317
3Adjust focus shift settings.
･Choose the number of shots.
Highlight [No. of shots]
and press 2.
Choose the number of
shots and press J.
- The maximum number of shots is 300.
-We recommend taking more shots than you think you’ll need.
You can winnow them down during focus stacking.
- More than 100 shots may be required for photographs of insects
or other small objects. On the other hand, only a few may be
needed to photograph a landscape from front to back with a
wide-angle lens.
･Choose the amount the focus distance changes with each shot.
Highlight [Focus step
width] and press 2.
Choose a focus step width
and press J.
- Press 4 to reduce the focus step width, 2 to increase.
-Note that high settings increase the risk that some areas will be
out of focus when the shots are stacked. A value of 5 or less is
recommended.
- Try experimenting with dierent settings before shooting.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
318
･Choose the interval until next shot.
Highlight [Interval until
next shot] and press 2.
Choose the interval
between shots and press
J.
- Choose the interval between shots, in seconds.
-Select [00] to take photos at up to about 3 fps.
- To ensure correct exposure when using a ash, choose an
interval long enough for the ash to charge. A setting of [00] is
recommended when shooting without a ash.
･Enable or disable rst-frame exposure lock.
Highlight [First-frame
exposure lock] and press
2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
- [O] is recommended if lighting and other conditions will not
change during shooting, [On] when photographing landscapes
and the like under variable lighting.
- Selecting [On] locks exposure at the value for the rst shot,
ensuring that all photos have the same exposure. Large changes
in subject brightness during shooting may however result in
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
319
apparent variations in exposure. This can be addressed by
selecting [O].
･Enable or disable silent photography.
Highlight [Silent
photography] and press
2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
･Choose starting folder options.
Highlight [Starting
storage folder] and press
2.
Select the desired options
and press J to proceed.
- Highlight an option and press 2 to select; selected items are
marked with a check (M). To deselect (remove the check from: U)
a selected option, highlight it and press 2 again.
- Place a check (M) next to [New folder] to create a new folder for
each new sequence.
- Place a check (M) next to [Reset le numbering] to reset le
numbering to 0001 whenever a new folder is created.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
320
4Highlight [Start] and press J.
･Shooting starts after about 3 s.
･The display turns o during shooting.
･The camera takes photographs at the selected interval, starting at
the focus distance selected at the start of shooting and
progressing out toward innity by the selected focus step distance
with each shot.
･Shooting ends when the selected number of shots has been taken
or focus reaches innity.
Ending focus shift photography
❚❚
To end shooting before all shots have been taken, either:
･select [Focus shift shooting] in the photo shooting menu, highlight
[O], and press J, or
･press the shutter-release button halfway or press the J button
between shots.
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
321
DAperture
Given that pictures shot at very small apertures (high f-numbers) may lack
denition, we recommend that you choose apertures wider (f-numbers
lower) than f/8–f/11.
DDuring shooting
The memory card access lamp ashes while shooting is in progress.
DFocus shift photography
･The shutter speed and the time needed to record the image may vary
from shot to shot. As a result, the interval between a shot being recorded
and the start of the next shot may vary.
･Shooting ends when focus reaches innity, and consequently depending
on the focus position at the start of shooting, shooting may end before
the selected number of shots has been taken.
･Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 [Power o delay]
> [Standby timer], the standby timer will not expire while shooting is in
progress.
･If you are using a ash, choose an interval longer than the time needed for
the ash to charge. If the interval is too short, the ash may re at less
than the power needed for full exposure.
･If shooting cannot proceed at current settings, for example because
shutter speed is set to “Bulb” or “Time”, a warning will be displayed.
･Changing camera settings while focus shift photography is in progress
may cause shooting to end.
DFocus shift photography: Restrictions
Focus-shift photography cannot be combined with some camera features,
including:
･video recording,
･long time-exposures (“Bulb” or “Time”),
･the self-timer,
･bracketing,
･HDR (high dynamic range),
･multiple exposures,
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
322
･interval-timer photography, and
･time-lapse video recording.
DWhen [On] is selected for [Silent photography]
Selecting [On] for [Silent photography] disables some camera features,
including:
･ISO sensitivities of Hi 1 and Hi 2,
･ash photography,
･exposure delay mode,
･long-exposure noise reduction, and
･icker reduction.
AClose-ups
Because focus depth is reduced at short focus distances, we recommend
choosing smaller focus steps and increasing the number of shots when
photographing subjects close to the camera.
Silent photography
G button U C photo shooting menu
Eliminate shutter sounds during shooting (0114).
C The photo shooting menu: Shooting options
323
Option Description
[On]
Eliminate vibrations produced by the shutter. Use for landscapes,
still lifes, and other static subjects. Use of a tripod is recommended.
･Selecting [On] for [Silent photography] does not completely
silence the camera. Camera sounds may still be audible, for
example during autofocus or aperture adjustment, in the latter
case most noticeably at apertures smaller (i.e., at f-numbers
higher) than f/5.6.
･Flash photography is disabled.
･Long-exposure noise reduction is disabled.
･There is no limit to the number of photos that can be taken in a
single burst, regardless of the option chosen for Custom Setting
d2 [Maximum shots per burst].
･The electronic shutter is used, regardless of the option selected
for Custom Setting d4 [Shutter type].
･Regardless of the settings selected for [Beep options] in the
setup menu, beeps will not sound when the camera focuses or
while the self-timer is in operation.
･Enabling silent photography changes the frame advance rates for
continuous release modes (0138).
[O] Disable silent photography.
1 The video recording menu: Video recording options
324
1 The video recording menu: Video
recording options
To view the video recording menu, select the 1 tab in the camera
menus.
The video recording menu contains the following items:
Item 0
[Reset video recording menu]325
[File naming]325
[Frame size/frame rate]325
[Video quality]325
[Video le type]326
[ISO sensitivity settings]326
[White balance]327
[Set Picture Control]328
[Manage Picture Control]328
[Active D-Lighting]328
[High ISO NR]329
[Vignette control]329
Item 0
[Diraction compensation]329
[Auto distortion control]329
[Flicker reduction]329
[Metering]330
[Release mode (save frame)]330
[Focus mode]330
[AF-area mode]331
[Vibration reduction]331
[Electronic VR]331
[Microphone sensitivity]331
[Attenuator]332
[Frequency response]332
1 The video recording menu: Video recording options
325
Item 0
[Wind noise reduction]333
Item 0
[Timecode]333
DSee also
“Video recording menu defaults” (0217)
Reset video recording menu
G button U 1 video recording menu
Highlight [Yes] and press J to restore video recording menu options to
their default values (0217).
File naming
G button U 1 video recording menu
Choose the three-letter prex used in naming the image les in which
videos are stored; the default prex is “DSC” (0239).
Frame size/frame rate
G button U 1 video recording menu
Choose the video frame size (in pixels) and frame rate. For more
information, see “Frame size and rate/Video quality” in “The i menu”
(0172).
Video quality
G button U 1 video recording menu
Choose from [High quality] and [Normal]. For more information, see
“Frame size and rate/Video quality” in “The i menu” (0172).
1 The video recording menu: Video recording options
326
Video le type
G button U 1 video recording menu
Record videos in MOV or MP4 format.
･The audio recording format varies with video le format. Linear PCM
is used for MOV les and AAC for MP4 les.
ISO sensitivity settings
G button U 1 video recording menu
Adjust the ISO sensitivity settings for video mode.
Option Description
[Maximum
sensitivity]
Choose the upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control
to prevent it being raised too high.
･The selected value serves as the upper limit for ISO
sensitivity in modes P, S, and A and when [On] is
selected for [Auto ISO control (mode M)] in mode M.
[Auto ISO
control (mode
M)]
If you select [On] and press the J button, the camera will
automatically adjust the ISO sensitivity for video mode in
mode M. If [O] is selected, [ISO sensitivity (mode M)]
will remain xed at the value selected by the user.
･Regardless of the option selected, auto ISO sensitivity
control is used in modes other than M.
1 The video recording menu: Video recording options
327
Option Description
[ISO sensitivity
(mode M)]
Choose the ISO sensitivity for mode M from values
between ISO 100 and 25600.
DAuto ISO sensitivity control
･At high ISO sensitivities, “noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or
lines) may increase.
･At high ISO sensitivities, the camera may have diculty focusing.
･The foregoing can be prevented by choosing a lower value for [ISO
sensitivity settings] > [Maximum sensitivity].
White balance
G button U 1 video recording menu
Choose the white balance for videos. Select [Same as photo settings]
to use the option currently selected for photos (0244).
1 The video recording menu: Video recording options
328
Set Picture Control
G button U 1 video recording menu
Choose a Picture Control for videos. Select [Same as photo settings] to
use the option currently selected for photos (0251).
Manage Picture Control
G button U 1 video recording menu
Save modied Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls (0253).
Active D-Lighting
G button U 1 video recording menu
Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating videos with natural
contrast. Select [Same as photo settings] to use the option currently
selected for photos (0165, 0178).
1 The video recording menu: Video recording options
329
High ISO NR
G button U 1 video recording menu
Reduce “noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels) in videos recorded at
high ISO sensitivities (0259).
Vignette control
G button U 1 video recording menu
Reduce vignetting in videos. Select [Same as photo settings] to use the
option currently selected for photos (0260).
Diraction compensation
G button U 1 video recording menu
Reduce diraction in videos (0260).
Auto distortion control
G button U 1 video recording menu
Reduce barrel and pin-cushion distortion in videos (0261).
Flicker reduction
G button U 1 video recording menu
Reduce icker and banding when shooting under uorescent or
mercury-vapor lighting during video recording. Choose [Auto] to allow
the camera to automatically choose the correct frequency. If [Auto] fails
to produce the desired results, select [50 Hz] or [60 Hz] according to the
frequency of the local power supply. Choose [50 Hz] for areas with a 50
Hz power supply, [60 Hz] for areas with a 60 Hz power supply.
1 The video recording menu: Video recording options
330
DFlicker reduction in the video recording menu
･If [Auto] fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the
frequency of the local power supply, test both the 50 and 60 Hz options
and choose the one that produces the best results.
･Flicker reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very
bright. If this is the case, try choosing a smaller aperture (higher f-
number).
･Flicker reduction may not produce the desired results in modes other
than M. If this is the case, select mode M and choose a shutter speed
adapted to the frequency of the local power supply:
- 50Hz: 1/100 s, 1/50 s, 1/25 s
- 60Hz: 1/125 s, 1/60 s, 1/30 s
Metering
G button U 1 video recording menu
Choose how the camera meters exposure in video mode. [Spot
metering] is not available in the video recording menu (0163).
Release mode (save frame)
G button U 1 video recording menu
In video mode, you can choose the operation performed (0139) when
the shutter-release button is pressed (083).
Focus mode
G button U 1 video recording menu
Choose a focus mode for video recording (090).
1 The video recording menu: Video recording options
331
AF-area mode
G button U 1 video recording menu
Choose how the camera focuses in video mode (092).
Vibration reduction
G button U 1 video recording menu
Adjust vibration reduction settings for video mode. Select [Same as
photo settings] to use the option currently selected for photos (0168).
Electronic VR
G button U 1 video recording menu
Choose whether to enable electronic vibration reduction in video mode
(0178).
Microphone sensitivity
G button U 1 video recording menu
Turn built-in or external microphones on or o or adjust microphone
sensitivity. For more information, see “Microphone sensitivity” in “The i
menu” (0175).
Option Description
[Auto] Adjust microphone sensitivity automatically.
[Manual]
Adjust microphone sensitivity manually. Choose from
values of from [1] to [20]. The higher the value, the
higher the sensitivity; the lower the value, the lower the
sensitivity.
1 The video recording menu: Video recording options
332
Option Description
[Microphone o] Turn sound recording o.
Attenuator
G button U 1 video recording menu
Select [Enable] to reduce microphone gain and prevent audio distortion
when recording videos in loud environments.
Frequency response
G button U 1 video recording menu
Choose the range of frequencies to which built-in and external
microphones respond.
Option Description
S[Wide
range]
Record a wide range of frequencies. Choose for
everything from music to the bustling hum of a city
street.
If you are concerned about environmental sounds such
as the sound of air conditioning equipment, select [Vocal
range].
T[Vocal
range]
Choose for human voices.
If the low or high frequency ranges are faint, select [Wide
range].
1 The video recording menu: Video recording options
333
Wind noise reduction
G button U 1 video recording menu
Choose whether to use wind noise reduction when recording videos. For
more information about wind noise reduction, see “Wind noise
reduction” in “The i menu” (0176).
Timecode
G button U 1 video recording menu
Choose whether to record time codes giving the hour, minute, second,
and frame number for each frame when recording videos. Time codes
are available only with videos recorded in MOV format.
Option Description
[Record
timecodes]
･[On]: Record time codes. The time code appears in the
shooting display.
･[On (with HDMI output)]: Time codes will be included
with footage saved to external recorders connected to
the camera via an HDMI cable. The camera supports
Atomos SHOGUN, NINJA, and SUMO-series Monitor
recorders.
･[O]: Time codes are not recorded.
[Count-up
method]
･[Record run]: Time codes are incremented only while
recording is in progress.
･[Free run]: Time codes are incremented continuously.
Time codes continue to be incremented while the camera
is o.
1 The video recording menu: Video recording options
334
Option Description
[Timecode
origin]
･[Reset]: Reset the time code to 00:00:00.00.
･[Enter manually]: Enter the hour, minute, second, and
frame number manually.
･[Current time]: Set the time code to the current time as
reported by the camera clock. Before proceeding, select
[Time zone and date] in the setup menu and make sure
that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date.
[Drop frame]
Select [On] to compensate for discrepancies between the
frame count and the actual recording time at frame rates of
30 and 60 fps.
DHDMI devices
Selecting [On (with HDMI output)] for [Record timecodes] may disrupt
footage output to HDMI devices.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
335
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera
settings
To view Custom Settings, select the A tab in the camera menus.
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit individual
preferences. The Custom Settings menu is divided into two levels.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
336
The following Custom Settings are available: 1
Item 0
[Reset custom settings]337
a [Autofocus]
a1 [AF-C priority selection]338
a2 [AF-S priority selection]338
a3 [Focus tracking with
lock-on]339
a4 [Focus points used]339
a5 [Store points by
orientation]340
a6 [AF activation]342
a7 [Limit AF-area mode
selection]343
a8 [Focus point wrap-
around]343
a9 [Focus point options]344
a10 [Low-light AF]344
a11 [Manual focus ring in AF
mode] 2345
b [Metering/exposure]
b1 [Easy exposure
compensation]345
b2 [Center-weighted area]346
Item 0
b3 [Fine-tune optimal
exposure]346
c [Timers/AE lock]
c1 [Shutter-release button
AE-L]347
c2 [Self-timer]348
c3 [Power o delay]348
d [Shooting/display]
d1 [CL mode shooting
speed]349
d2 [Maximum shots per
burst]349
d3 [Exposure delay mode]349
d4 [Shutter type]350
d5 [File number sequence]350
d6 [Apply settings to live
view]352
d7 [Framing grid display]353
d8 [Focus peaking]353
d9 [View all in continuous
mode]354
e [Bracketing/ash]
e1 [Flash sync speed]354
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
337
Item 0
e2 [Flash shutter speed]355
e3 [Exposure comp. for
ash]355
e4 [Auto c ISO sensitivity
control]356
e5 [Auto bracketing (mode
M)]356
e6 [Bracketing order]357
f [Controls]
f1 [Customize i menu]358
f2 [Custom controls
(shooting)]359
f3 [Custom controls
(playback)]369
Item 0
f4 [Customize command
dials]370
f5 [Release button to use
dial]373
f6 [Reverse indicators]374
g [Video]
g1 [Customize i menu]374
g2 [Custom controls]375
g3 [AF speed]383
g4 [AF tracking sensitivity]384
g5 [Highlight display]384
1 Items modied from default values are indicated by asterisks (“U”).
2 Available only with compatible lenses that have a focus ring.
DSee also
“Custom Settings menu defaults” (0219)
Reset custom settings
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Restore Custom Settings to their default values.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
338
a: Autofocus
a1: AF-C priority selection
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether photos can be taken before the camera focuses when
AF-C is selected.
Option Description
G[Release]Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is
pressed (release priority).
F[Focus]Photos can be taken only when the camera is in focus (focus
priority).
a2: AF-S priority selection
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether photos can be taken before the camera focuses when
AF-S is selected.
Option Description
G[Release]Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is
pressed (release priority).
F[Focus]Photos can be taken only when the camera is in focus (focus
priority).
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
339
a3: Focus tracking with lock-on
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose how quickly focus responds if something passes between the
subject and the camera when AF-C is selected for focus mode or when
AF-A is selected and you are shooting in AF-C.
･Choose [5 (Delayed)] to help maintain focus on your original subject.
･Choose [1 (Quick)] to make it easier to shift focus to objects crossing
your eld of view.
･If [Auto-area AF], [Auto-area AF (people)], or [Auto-area AF
(animals)] is selected for AF-area mode, blocked shot AF response
will function in mode [3] when [2] or [1 (Quick)] is selected.
a4: Focus points used
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus-point
selection when an option other than [Auto-area AF], [Auto-area AF
(people)], or [Auto-area AF (animals)] is selected for AF-area mode.
Option Description
6[All points]
Every focus point available in the current AF-area mode
can be selected. The number of points available varies
with the AF-area mode.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
340
Option Description
7[Alternating
points]
The number of available focus points is reduced to one
quarter of the number available when [All points] is
selected. Use for quick focus-point selection. The
number of focus points available in [Pinpoint AF],
[Wide-area AF (L)], [Wide-area AF (L-people)], or
[Wide-area AF (L-animals)] mode does not change.
a5: Store points by orientation
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether separate focus points can be selected for “wide”
(landscape) orientation, for “tall” (portrait) orientation with the camera
rotated 90° clockwise, and for “tall” orientation with the camera rotated
90° counterclockwise.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
341
･Select [No] to use the same focus point regardless of camera
orientation.
Camera rotated 90°
counter-clockwise
Landscape (wide)
orientation
Camera rotated 90°
clockwise
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
342
･Select [Yes] to enable separate focus-point selection.
Camera rotated 90°
counter-clockwise
Landscape (wide)
orientation
Camera rotated 90°
clockwise
a6: AF activation
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether the shutter-release button can be used to focus. If [AF-
ON only] is selected, the camera will not focus when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway. Focus can only be adjusted using other
controls to which AF-ON has been assigned using Custom Setting f2
[Custom controls (shooting)].
Out-of-focus release
To choose whether the shutter can be released even in circumstances in
which it would normally be disabled, select Custom Setting a6 [AF
activation], highlight [AF-ON only], and press 2. Selecting [Enable]
allows the shutter to be released at any time.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
343
Option Description
[Enable] Shutter-release enabled.
[Disable] Shutter-release disabled.
a7: Limit AF-area mode selection
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the AF-area modes that can be selected using the i menu or
custom controls.
･Highlight an option and press 2 to select (M) or deselect (U). Modes
marked with a check (M) are available for selection via the sub-
command dial.
･To complete the operation, press J.
a8: Focus point wrap-around
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one edge of
the display to another. If [Wrap] is selected, focus-point selection will
“wrap around” from top to bottom, bottom to top, right to left, and left
to right, so that, for example, pressing multi selector 2 when a focus
point at the right edge of the shooting display is highlighted selects the
corresponding focus point at the left edge of the display.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
344
a9: Focus point options
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose from the focus point display options below.
Manual focus mode
Option Description
[On] The focus point is displayed at all times in manual focus mode.
[O] The focus point is displayed only during focus point selection.
Dynamic-area AF assist
Choose whether both the selected focus point and the surrounding
focus points are displayed in dynamic-area AF mode.
Option Description
[On] Display both the selected focus point and surrounding focus points.
[O] Display only the selected focus point.
a10: Low-light AF
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose [On] for more accurate focus under low-light conditions when
AF-S is selected for focus mode or when AF-A is selected and you are
shooting in AF-S.
･This option only takes eect in photo mode.
･In b mode, [Low-light AF] is xed at [On].
･Low-light AF is disabled during interval-timer photography and time-
lapse video recording.
･The camera may require more time to focus when [On] is selected.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
345
･While low-light AF is in eect, “Low-light” will appear in the display.
The display refresh rate may drop.
a11: Manual focus ring in AF mode
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether the lens focus ring can be used for manual focus in
autofocus mode. Available only with compatible lenses that have a focus
ring.
Option Description
[Enable]
Autofocus can be over-ridden by rotating the lens focus ring
(autofocus with manual override). The focus ring can be used for
manual focus while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
To refocus using autofocus, lift your nger from the shutter-
release button and then press it halfway again.
[Disable]The lens focus ring cannot be used for manual focus while
autofocus mode is selected.
b: Metering/exposure
b1: Easy exposure compensation
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether the E button is needed for exposure compensation.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
346
Option Description
[On (Auto
reset)]
Exposure compensation can be adjusted using only a command
dial. The setting selected with the command dial is reset when
the camera turns o or the standby timer expires.
[On]
Exposure compensation can be adjusted using only a command
dial. Exposure compensation is not reset when the camera turns
o or the standby timer expires (in b mode, exposure
compensation is reset when the camera is turned o).
[O]Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E button and
rotating the main command dial.
･Enabled in modes P, S, A, and b. Easy exposure compensation is not
available in other modes.
･The command dial used varies with the shooting mode.
b2: Center-weighted area
G button U A Custom Settings menu
When [Center-weighted metering] is selected, the camera assigns the
greatest weight to an area in the center of the shooting display when
setting exposure. Custom Setting b2 [Center-weighted area] is used to
choose the size of the area given the greatest weight when [Center-
weighted metering] is selected.
b3: Fine-tune optimal exposure
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Use this option to ne-tune the exposure value selected by the camera;
exposure can be ne-tuned separately for each metering method.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
347
Exposure can be adjusted up for brighter exposures or down for darker
exposures in the range +1 to −1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV. The default is 0.
DFine-tuning exposure
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting b3 [Fine-tune optimal
exposure], the exposure compensation icon (E) will not be displayed. The
only way to determine how much exposure has been altered is to view the
amount in the ne-tuning menu for Custom Setting b3.
c: Timers/AE lock
c1: Shutter-release button AE-L
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether exposure locks when the shutter-release button is
pressed.
Option Description
O[On (half press)]Pressing the shutter-release button halfway locks
exposure.
P[On (burst
mode)]
Exposure only locks while the shutter-release
button is pressed all the way down.
[O]Pressing the shutter-release button does not lock
exposure.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
348
c2: Self-timer
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the length of the shutter release delay, the number of shots
taken, and the interval between shots in self-timer mode.
Option Description
[Self-timer delay] Choose the length of the shutter-release delay.
[Number of
shots]
Press 1 and 3 to choose the number of shots taken
each time the shutter-release button is pressed; choose
from values of from 1 to 9.
[Interval
between shots]
Choose the interval between shots when [Number of
shots] is more than 1.
c3: Power o delay
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose how long the monitor remains on when no operations are
performed.
･Dierent settings can be chosen for [Playback], [Menus], [Picture
review], and [Standby timer].
･[Standby timer] determines how long the monitor remains on after
the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. The monitor dims a few
seconds before the standby timer expires. If [10 s] is selected, the
timer will be extended to 20 seconds while the i menu is displayed.
･With the exception of [Picture review], each of the power-o delays
is extended by one minute in self-timer mode.
･Longer power-o delays reduce battery endurance.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
349
d: Shooting/display
d1: CL mode shooting speed
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the frame advance rate for low-speed continuous release mode;
options range from [4 fps] to [1 fps].
d2: Maximum shots per burst
G button U A Custom Settings menu
The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst in
continuous release modes can be set to any value between 1 and 100.
･Note that regardless of the option selected, there is no limit to the
number of photos that can be taken in a single burst when a shutter
speed of 1 s or slower is selected in mode S or M, and during silent
photography.
DThe memory buer
Custom Setting d2 [Maximum shots per burst] is used to select the number
of shots that can be taken in a single burst. The number of shots that can be
taken before the memory buer lls and shooting slows varies with image
quality and other settings. When the buer is full, the camera will display
“r00” and the frame advance rate will drop.
d3: Exposure delay mode
G button U A Custom Settings menu
In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures,
shutter release can be delayed by from about 0.2 to 3 seconds after the
shutter-release button is pressed.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
350
d4: Shutter type
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the type of shutter used for photographs.
Option Description
O[Auto]
The camera chooses the shutter type automatically
according to shutter speed. The electronic front-
curtain shutter is used to reduce blur caused by
camera shake at slow shutter speeds.
P[Mechanical
shutter]
The camera uses the mechanical shutter for all
photos.
x[Electronic front-
curtain shutter]
The camera uses the electronic front-curtain shutter
for all photos.
D“Mechanical shutter”
[Mechanical shutter] is not available with some lenses.
DThe electronic front-curtain shutter
The fastest shutter speed available when [Electronic front-curtain shutter]
is selected is 1/2000 s.
d5: File number sequence
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose a le numbering option.
Option Description
[On]
When a new folder is created or a new memory card is inserted in
the camera, le numbering will continue from the last number
used. This simplies le management by minimizing the
occurrence of duplicate le names when multiple cards are used.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
351
Option Description
[O]
When a new folder is created or a new memory card is inserted, le
numbering restarts from 0001. If the current folder already contains
images, le numbering will instead continue from the highest le
number in the current folder.
If you select [O] after selecting [On], the camera will store the
current le number. File numbering will resume from the
previously-stored value the next time [On] is selected.
[Reset]
Reset the le numbering for [On]. If the current folder is empty, le
numbering will restart from 0001 with the next picture taken. If the
current folder contains images, the next picture taken will be
assigned a le number by adding one to the highest le number in
the current folder.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
352
DFile number sequence
･If a picture is taken when the current folder contains a picture numbered
9999, a new folder will be created and le numbering will restart from
0001.
･When the current folder number reaches 999, the camera will no longer
be able to create new folders and the shutter release will be disabled if:
- the current folder contains 5000 pictures (in addition, video recording
will be disabled if the camera calculates that the number of les needed
to record a video of the maximum length would result in the folder
containing over 5000 les), or
- the current folder contains a picture numbered 9999 (in addition,
video recording will be disabled if the camera calculates that the
number of les needed to record a video of the maximum length would
result in a le numbered over 9999).
To resume shooting, choose [Reset] for Custom Setting d5 [File number
sequence] and then either format the memory card or insert a new
memory card.
DFolder numbering
･If a picture is taken when the current folder contains 5000 pictures or a
picture numbered 9999, a new folder will be created and selected as the
current folder.
･The new folder is assigned a number one higher than current folder
number. If a folder with that number already exists, the new folder will be
assigned the lowest available folder number.
d6: Apply settings to live view
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether the camera adjusts the preview in the monitor to
reect how shooting settings will aect the hue and brightness of the
nal picture. Regardless of the option selected, the eects of camera
settings are always visible in video mode.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
353
Option Description
[On]
The eects of changes to settings such as white balance, Picture
Controls, and exposure compensation are visible in the shooting
display.
[O]
･The eects of changes to settings such as white balance, Picture
Controls, and exposure compensation are not visible in the
shooting display. The hue and brightness of the display can be
adjusted for ease of viewing during extended photo shoots.
･A g icon appears in the shooting display.
d7: Framing grid display
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Display 3×3 (9 divisions) or 4×4 (16 divisions) grid lines, which are useful
for checking composition on the display.
d8: Focus peaking
G button U A Custom Settings menu
When focus peaking is enabled in manual focus mode, objects that are
in focus are indicated by colored outlines in the display. You can choose
the color.
Peaking level
Choose from [3 (high sensitivity)], [2 (standard)], [1 (low sensitivity)],
and [O]. The higher the value, the greater the depth that will be shown
as being in focus.
Peaking highlight color
Choose the highlight color.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
354
d9: View all in continuous mode
G button U A Custom Settings menu
If [O] is selected, the display will go blank during burst photography.
e: Bracketing/ash
e1: Flash sync speed
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the ash sync speed.
Option Description
[1/200 s
(Auto FP)]
Auto FP high-speed sync is enabled with compatible ash
units and the maximum sync speed for other ash units is set
to 1/200 s.
･When the camera shows a shutter speed of 1/200 s in mode
P or A, auto FP high-speed sync will be activated if the
actual shutter speed is faster than 1/200 s. If the ash
supports auto FP high-speed sync, the camera can select
shutter speeds as fast as 1/4000 s.
･In mode S or M, the user can select shutter speeds as fast as
1/4000 s when using ash units that support auto FP high-
speed sync.
[1/200 s]
Flash sync speed set to selected value, which can be from
1/200 to 1/60 s.
[1/160 s]
[1/125 s]
[1/100 s]
[1/80 s]
[1/60 s]
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
355
DAuto FP high-speed sync
･Auto FP high-speed sync allows the ash to be used at the highest shutter
speed supported by the camera. When [1/200 s (Auto FP)] is selected, the
camera automatically enables auto FP high-speed sync at shutter speeds
faster than the ash sync speed. This makes it possible to choose the
maximum aperture for reduced depth of eld even when the subject is
backlit in bright sunlight.
e2: Flash shutter speed
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the slowest shutter speed available with a ash in mode P or A.
Regardless of the setting chosen for Custom Setting e2 [Flash shutter
speed], shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in modes S and M or at
ash settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction
with slow sync.
e3: Exposure comp. for ash
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose how the camera adjusts ash level when exposure
compensation is used.
Option Description
YE[Entire frame]
The camera adjusts both the ash level and
exposure. This changes the exposure for the
entire frame.
E[Background only]Exposure compensation is adjusted for the
background only.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
356
e4: Auto c ISO sensitivity control
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose what the camera targets for exposure adjustment when auto
ISO sensitivity control is enabled during ash photography.
Option Description
e[Subject and
background]
The camera takes both the main subject and
background lighting into account when adjusting
ISO sensitivity.
f[Subject only]ISO sensitivity is adjusted only to ensure that the
main subject is correctly exposed.
e5: Auto bracketing (mode M)
G button U A Custom Settings menu
The settings aected when bracketing is enabled in mode M are
determined by the options selected for [Auto bracketing] > [Auto
bracketing set] in the photo shooting menu and the option chosen for
Custom Setting e5 [Auto bracketing (mode M)].
Custom Setting e5 [Auto
bracketing (mode M)]
Photo shooting menu [Auto bracketing
set]
AE & ash bracketing* AE bracketing*
F[Flash/speed]Shutter speed and
ash level Shutter speed
G[Flash/speed/
aperture]
Shutter speed,
aperture, and ash
level
Shutter speed
and aperture
H[Flash/aperture]Aperture and ash
level Aperture
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
357
Custom Setting e5 [Auto
bracketing (mode M)]
Photo shooting menu [Auto bracketing
set]
AE & ash bracketing* AE bracketing*
I[Flash only] Flash level —
* If a ash is not used when [On] is selected for [Auto ISO sensitivity
control] and [Flash/speed], [Flash/speed/aperture], or [Flash/
aperture] is selected for e5 [Auto bracketing (mode M)], ISO sensitivity
will be xed at the value for the rst shot in each bracketing sequence.
DFlash bracketing
Flash bracketing is performed only with i-TTL or qA (auto aperture) ash
control.
e6: Bracketing order
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the order in which the shots in the bracketing program are
taken.
Option Description
H[MTR > under >
over]
The unmodied shot is taken rst, followed by
the shot with the lowest value, followed by the
shot with the highest value.
I[Under > MTR >
over]
Shooting proceeds in order from the lowest to
the highest value.
･Custom Setting e6 [Bracketing order] has no eect on the order of
the shots taken when [ADL bracketing] is selected for [Auto
bracketing] > [Auto bracketing set] in the photo shooting menu.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
358
f: Controls
f1: Customize i menu
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the items listed in the i menu displayed when the i button is
pressed in photo mode.
･Highlight a position in the i menu, press J, and select the desired
item.
･The following items can be assigned to the i menu.
Item 0
J[Choose image area]240
8[Image quality]161
o[Image size]162
E[Exposure
compensation]134
9[ISO sensitivity
settings]131
m[White balance]109
h[Set Picture Control]147
p[Color space]258
y[Active D-Lighting]165
q[Long exposure NR]258
r[High ISO NR]259
w[Metering]163
Item 0
c[Flash mode]498
Y[Flash compensation]501
s[Focus mode]90
t[AF-area mode]92
u[Vibration reduction]168
t[Auto bracketing]266
$[Multiple exposure]277
2[HDR (high dynamic
range)]285
7[Interval timer
shooting]292
8[Time-lapse video]305
9[Focus shift shooting]314
L[Silent photography]114
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
359
Item 0
v[Release mode]136
w[Custom controls
(shooting)]359
z[Exposure delay mode]349
O[Shutter type]350
y[Apply settings to live
view]352
Item 0
W[Focus peaking]353
3[Monitor brightness]389
Z[Bluetooth connection]359
U[Wi-Fi connection]165
L[Wireless remote
connection]408
Bluetooth connection
Enable or disable Bluetooth.
f2: Custom controls (shooting)
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the operations performed in photo mode using the camera
controls or lens control ring.
･Choose the roles played by the controls below. Highlight the desired
control and press J.
Option
w[Fn1 button]
y[Fn2 button]
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
360
Option
j[AE-L/AF-L button]
k[OK button]
z[Video record button]
S[Lens Fn button]
3[Lens Fn2 button]
l[Lens control ring]
･The roles that can be assigned to these controls are as follows:
Option w y j k1z S 3 l
K[Select center focus point] — — 4 4 — — — —
4[Save focus position] — — — — — 4— —
3[Recall focus position] — — — — — — 4—
A[AF-ON]4 4 4 — — 4 4 —
F[AF lock only]4 4 4 — — 4 4 —
E[AE lock (Hold)]4 4 4 —4 4 4 —
D[AE lock (Reset on release)]4 4 4 —4 4 4 —
C[AE lock only]4 4 4 — — 4 4 —
B[AE/AF lock]4 4 4 — — 4 4 —
r[FV lock]4 4 — — — 4 4 —
h[cDisable/enable]4 4 — — — 4 4 —
q[Preview]4 4 — — 4 4 4 —
L[Matrix metering]4 4 — — — 4 4 —
M[Center-weighted metering]4 4 — — — 4 4 —
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
361
Option w y j k1z S 3 l
N[Spot metering]4 4 — — — 4 4 —
t[Highlight-weighted metering]4 4 — — — 4 4 —
1[Bracketing burst]4 4 — — — 4 4 —
4[+ RAW]4 4 — — 4 4 4 —
n[Subject tracking]4 4 — — — 4 4 —
L[Silent photography]4 4 — — — 4 4 —
b[Live view info display o]4 4 4 —4 4 4 —
b[Framing grid display]4 4 — — 4 4 4 —
p[Zoom on/o]4 4 4 4 4 4 4 —
O[MY MENU]4 4 — — 4 4 4 —
3[Access top item in MY MENU]4 4 — — 4 4 4 —
K[Playback]4 4 — — — 4 4 —
J[Choose image area]4 4 — — 4— — —
8[Image quality/size]4 4 — — 4— — —
m[White balance]4 4 — — 4— — —
h[Set Picture Control]4 4 — — 4— — —
y[Active D-Lighting]4 4 — — 4— — —
w[Metering]4 4 — — 4— — —
I/Y[Flash mode/compensation]4 4 — — 4— — —
v[Release mode]4 4 — — — — — —
z[Focus mode/AF-area mode]4 4 — — 4— — —
t[Auto bracketing]4 4 — — 4— — —
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
362
Option w y j k1z S 3 l
$[Multiple exposure]4 4 — — 4— — —
2[HDR (high dynamic range)]4 4 — — 4— — —
z[Exposure delay mode]4 4 — — 4— — —
W[Focus peaking]4 4 — — — — — —
w[Choose non-CPU lens number]4 4 — — 4— — —
X[Focus (M/A)] — — — — — — — 42, 3
q[Aperture] — — — — — — — 43
E[Exposure compensation] — — — — — — — 43
9[ISO sensitivity] — — — — — — — 43
[None]4 4 4 4 4 4 4 43
1 Regardless of the option selected, when [Auto-area AF], [Auto-area
AF (people)], or [Auto-area AF (animals)] is chosen for AF-area
mode, the button functions only to initiate subject-tracking AF
(0100).
2 Available with compatible lenses only.
3 Regardless of the option selected, in manual focus mode the control
ring can only be used to adjust focus.
･The following options are available:
Role Description
K[Select center
focus point]
Pressing the control selects the center focus
point.
4[Save focus
position]
Pressing and holding the lens Fn button
registers the focus position.
For more information, see “Save focus
position/Recall focus position” in the “Focus”
section of “Basic settings” (0106).
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
363
Role Description
3[Recall focus
position]
Pressing the lens Fn2 button recalls the focus
position registered in [Save focus position].
For more information, see “Save focus
position/Recall focus position” in the “Focus”
section of “Basic settings” (0106).
A[AF-ON] Pressing the control initiates autofocus.
F[AF lock only] Focus locks while the control is pressed.
E[AE lock (Hold)]
Exposure locks when the control is pressed.
Exposure lock does not end when the shutter
is released. Exposure remains locked until the
control is pressed a second time or the
standby timer expires.
D[AE lock (Reset on
release)]
Exposure locks when the control is pressed.
Exposure remains locked until the control is
pressed a second time, the shutter is
released, or the standby timer expires.
C[AE lock only] Exposure locks while the control is pressed.
B[AE/AF lock]Focus and exposure lock while the control is
pressed.
r[FV lock]
Press the control to lock ash value for
optional ash units; press again to cancel FV
lock.
h[cDisable/enable]
If the ash is currently enabled, it will be
disabled while the control is pressed. If the
ash is currently o, front-curtain sync will be
selected while the control is pressed.
q[Preview]Keep the control pressed to preview photo
color, exposure, and depth of eld.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
364
Role Description
L[Matrix metering][Matrix metering] is activated while the
control is pressed.
M[Center-weighted
metering]
[Center-weighted metering] is activated
while the control is pressed.
N[Spot metering][Spot metering] is activated while the
control is pressed.
t
[Highlight-
weighted
metering]
[Highlight-weighted metering] is activated
while the control is pressed.
1[Bracketing burst]
- If the control is pressed when an option
other than [WB bracketing] is selected for
[Auto bracketing] > [Auto bracketing set]
in the photo shooting menu in continuous
release mode, the camera will take all the
shots in the current bracketing program
and repeat the bracketing burst while the
shutter-release button is pressed. In single-
frame release mode, shooting will end after
the rst bracketing burst.
- If [WB bracketing] is selected for [Auto
bracketing set], the camera will take
pictures while the shutter-release button is
pressed and apply white balance
bracketing to each shot.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
365
Role Description
4[+ RAW]
- If a JPEG option is currently selected for
image quality, “RAW” will be displayed and
a RAW copy will be recorded with the next
picture taken after the control is pressed.
The original image quality setting will be
restored when you remove your nger
from the shutter-release button or press
the control again, canceling [+ RAW].
- RAW copies are recorded at the settings
currently selected for [RAW recording] in
the photo shooting menu.
n[Subject tracking]
Pressing the control when [Auto-area AF],
[Auto-area AF (people)], or [Auto-area AF
(animals)] is selected for AF-area mode
enables subject tracking; the focus point will
change to a targeting reticle and the monitor
to a subject-tracking display.
- To end subject-tracking AF, press the
control again or press the W (Q) button.
L[Silent
photography]
Press the control to perform silent
photography. Press again to cancel silent
photography.
b[Live view info
display o]
Press the control to hide the icons and
shooting information on the display. Icons
and shooting information can be displayed
by pressing the button again.
b[Framing grid
display]
Each time you press the button, the
composition framing grid on the display
changes between [O], [On (3×3)], and [On
(4×4)].
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
366
Role Description
p[Zoom on/o]
Press the control to zoom the display in on
the area around the current focus point (the
zoom ratio is selected in advance). Press
again to cancel zoom.
O[MY MENU] Press the control to display “MY MENU”.
3[Access top item
in MY MENU]
Press the control to jump to the top item in
“MY MENU”. Place frequently-used menu
items at the top of “MY MENU” for quick
access.
K[Playback] Press the control to start playback.
J[Choose image
area]
Press the control and rotate a command dial
to choose the image area.
8[Image quality/
size]
Press the control and rotate the main
command dial to choose an image quality
option and the sub-command dial to select
image size.
m[White balance]
To choose a white balance option, hold the
button and rotate the main command dial.
Some options oer sub-options that can be
selected by rotating the sub-command dial.
h[Set Picture
Control]
Press the control and rotate a command dial
to choose a Picture Control.
y[Active D-
Lighting]
Press the control and rotate a command dial
to adjust Active D-Lighting.
w[Metering]Press the control and rotate a command dial
to choose a metering option.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
367
Role Description
I/Y[Flash mode/
compensation]
Press the control and rotate the main
command dial to choose a ash mode and
the sub-command dial to adjust ash output.
v[Release mode]
Press the control and rotate the main
command dial to choose a release mode.
When the release mode is [Continuous L],
you can change the frame advance rate
setting by rotating the sub-command dial,
and when the release mode is [Self-timer],
you can change the setting of the time until
the shutter is released by rotating the sub-
command dial.
z[Focus mode/AF-
area mode]
Hold the control and rotate the main
command dial to choose the focus mode, the
sub-command dial to choose the AF-area
mode.
t[Auto bracketing]
Press the control and rotate the main
command dial to choose the number of
shots and the sub-command dial to select
the bracketing increment or Active D-
Lighting amount.
$[Multiple
exposure]
Press the control and rotate the main
command dial to choose the mode and the
sub-command dial to choose the number of
shots.
2[HDR (high
dynamic range)]
Press the control and rotate the main
command dial to choose the mode and the
sub-command dial to choose the exposure
dierential.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
368
Role Description
z[Exposure delay
mode]
Press the control and rotate a command dial
to choose the shutter-release delay.
W[Focus peaking]
Press the control and rotate the main
command dial to choose a peaking level and
the sub-command dial to select the peaking
color.
w[Choose non-CPU
lens number]
Press the control and rotate a command dial
to choose a lens number saved using the
[Non-CPU lens data] item in the setup
menu.
X[Focus (M/A)]
Autofocus can be over-ridden by rotating the
lens control ring (autofocus with manual
override). The control ring can be used for
manual focus while the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway. To refocus using
autofocus, lift your nger from the shutter-
release button and then press it halfway
again.
q[Aperture]Rotate the lens control ring to adjust
aperture.
E[Exposure
compensation]
Rotate the lens control ring to adjust
exposure compensation.
9[ISO sensitivity]Rotate the lens control ring to adjust ISO
sensitivity.
[None] The control has no eect.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
369
f3: Custom controls (playback)
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the role assigned to the camera buttons during playback.
Option Role Description
j[AE-L/AF-L
button]
g[Protect]Press the control to protect the
current picture.
c[Rating]
When you press the control, you can
press 4 or 2 or rotate the main
command dial to change the rating
setting for the displayed image.
p[Zoom on/o]
Press the control to zoom the display
in on the area around the current
focus point (the zoom ratio is
selected in advance). Press again to
cancel zoom.
･To choose the zoom ratio,
highlight [Zoom on/o] and press
2.
･Zoom is available in both full-
frame and thumbnail playback.
[None] The control has no eect.
k[OK
button]*
n[Thumbnail
on/o]
Press the control to toggle between
full-frame playback, 4-, 9-, and 72-
frame thumbnail playback, and
calendar playback.
o[View
histograms]
A histogram is displayed while the
control is pressed. The histogram
display is available in both full-frame
and thumbnail playback.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
370
Option Role Description
k[OK
button]*
p[Zoom on/o]
Press the control to zoom the display
in on the area around the current
focus point (the zoom ratio is
selected in advance). Press again to
cancel zoom.
･To choose the zoom ratio,
highlight [Zoom on/o] and press
2.
･Zoom is available in both full-
frame and thumbnail playback.
u[Choose
folder]
Press the control to display the
[Choose folder] dialog, where you
can then choose a folder for
playback.
* Regardless of the option selected, pressing J when a video is displayed
full frame starts video playback.
f4: Customize command dials
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Customize the operation of the main and sub-command dials.
Reverse rotation
Reverse the direction of rotation of the command dials for selected
operations.
･Highlight [Exposure compensation] or [Shutter speed/aperture]
and press 2 to select (M) or deselect (U).
･Press J to save changes and exit.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
371
Change main/sub
Reverse the roles of the main- and sub-command dials.
Option Description
[Exposure
setting]
If [On] is selected, the main command dial will control
aperture and the sub-command dial shutter speed. If [On
(Mode A)] is selected, the main command dial will be used
to set aperture in mode A only.
[Autofocus
setting]
If [On] is selected and [Focus mode/AF-area mode] has
been assigned to a control using Custom Setting f2 [Custom
controls (shooting)], you can choose the AF-area mode by
holding the control and rotating the main command dial
and focus mode by holding the control and rotating the
sub-command dial.
Menus and playback
Choose the roles played by the multi selector and command dials
during playback and menu navigation.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
372
Option Description
[On]
Playback:
･The main command dial can be used to choose the
picture displayed during full-frame playback. The
sub-command dial can be used to skip forward or
back according to the option selected for [Sub-dial
frame advance].
･During thumbnail playback, the main command dial
can be used to highlight thumbnails and the sub-
command dial to page up or down.
Menus*:
Use the main command dial to highlight menu items.
Rotating the sub-command dial right displays the sub-
menu for the highlighted option. Rotating it left
displays the previous menu.
2
[On (picture
review
excluded)]
As for [On] except that the command dials cannot be
used for playback during picture review.
[O]
Use the multi selector to choose the picture displayed
during full-frame playback or to highlight pictures or
menu items.
* The sub-command dial cannot be used to select highlighted items. To
select highlighted items, press J or 2.
Sub-dial frame advance
Choose the operation performed when rotating the sub-command dial
during full-frame playback. This option only takes eect when [On] or
[On (picture review excluded)] is selected for [Menus and playback].
Option Description
[10 frames] Skip forward or back 10 frames at a time.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
373
Option Description
[50 frames] Skip forward or back 50 frames at a time.
c[Rating]
Skip to the next or previous pictures with the selected
rating. To choose the rating, highlight [Rating] and
press 2.
P[Protect] Skip to the next or previous protected picture.
C[Photos only] Skip to the next or previous photo.
1[Videos only] Skip to the next or previous video.
u[Folder] Rotate the sub-command dial to select a folder.
f5: Release button to use dial
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Selecting [Yes] allows adjustments that are normally made by holding a
button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the
command dial after the button is released. This ends when the button is
pressed again, the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, or the
standby timer expires.
･[Release button to use dial] applies to the E, S, and c (E)
buttons.
･[Release button to use dial] also applies to controls to which the
following roles have been assigned using Custom Setting f2 [Custom
controls (shooting)] or g2 [Custom controls]: [Choose image area],
[Image quality/size], [White balance], [Set Picture Control], [Active
D-Lighting], [Metering], [Flash mode/compensation], [Release
mode], [Release mode (save frame)], [Focus mode/AF-area mode],
[Auto bracketing], [Multiple exposure], [HDR (high dynamic
range)], [Exposure delay mode], [Focus peaking], [Choose non-
CPU lens number], and [Microphone sensitivity].
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
374
f6: Reverse indicators
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Switch the positive and negative value directions of some indicators
displayed horizontally in screens such as the information display.
Option Description
VThe indicator is displayed with positive values
on the left and negative values on the right.
W
The indicator is displayed with negative
values on the left and positive values on the
right.
g: Video
g1: Customize i menu
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the items listed in the i menu displayed when the i button is
pressed in video mode.
･Highlight a position in the i menu, press J, and select the desired
item.
･The following items can be assigned to the i menu.
Item 0
G[Frame size and
rate/Video quality]172
E[Exposure
compensation]134
9[ISO sensitivity
settings]131
Item 0
m[White balance]172
h[Set Picture Control]172
y[Active D-Lighting]178
w[Metering]177
s[Focus mode]179
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
375
Item 0
t[AF-area mode]179
u[Vibration
reduction]179
4[Electronic VR]178
H[Microphone
sensitivity]175
5[Attenuator]332
6[Frequency
response]332
7[Wind noise
reduction]176
c[Release mode (save
frame)]139
Item 0
W[Focus peaking]353
9[Highlight display]384
3[Monitor
brightness]389
Z[Bluetooth
connection]375
U[Wi-Fi connection]165,
177
L[Wireless remote
connection]408
Bluetooth connection
Enable or disable Bluetooth.
g2: Custom controls
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the operations performed in video mode using the camera
controls or lens control ring.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
376
･Choose the roles played by the controls below. Highlight the desired
control and press J.
Option
w[Fn1 button]
y[Fn2 button]
j[AE-L/AF-L button]
k[OK button]
G[Shutter-release button]
S[Lens Fn button]
3[Lens Fn2 button]
l[Lens control ring]
･The roles that can be assigned to these controls are as follows:
Option w y j k1GS 3 l
K[Select center focus point] — — 4 4 — — — —
4[Save focus position] — — — — — 4— —
3[Recall focus position] —————— 4—
A[AF-ON] — — 4— — 4 4 —
F[AF lock only] — — 4— — 4 4 —
E[AE lock (Hold)] — — 4— — 4 4 —
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
377
Option w y j k1GS 3 l
C[AE lock only] — — 4— — 4 4 —
B[AE/AF lock] — — 4— — 4 4 —
t[Power aperture (open)]4—————— —
q[Power aperture (close)] — 4— — — — — —
i[Exposure compensation +]4—————— —
h[Exposure compensation -] — 4— — — — — —
n[Subject tracking]4 4 ——— 4 4 —
b[Live view info display o]444— — 4 4 —
b[Framing grid display]4 4 ——— 4 4 —
p[Zoom on/o]4444—4 4 —
O[MY MENU]4 4 ——— 4 4 —
3[Access top item in MY MENU]4 4 ——— 4 4 —
K[Playback]4 4 ——— 4 4 —
C[Take photos] ———— 4— — —
1[Record videos] — — 444— — —
m[White balance]4 4 — — — — — —
h[Set Picture Control]4 4 — — — — — —
y[Active D-Lighting]4 4 — — — — — —
w[Metering]4 4 — — — — — —
c[Release mode (save frame)]4 4 — — — — — —
z[Focus mode/AF-area mode]4 4 — — — — — —
H[Microphone sensitivity]4 4 — — — — — —
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
378
Option w y j k1GS 3 l
W[Focus peaking]4 4 — — — — — —
X[Focus (M/A)] ———————42, 3
q[Power aperture] ——————— 43
E[Exposure compensation] ——————— 43
9[ISO sensitivity] ——————— 43
[None]4444—4 4 43
1 Regardless of the option selected, when [Auto-area AF], [Auto-area
AF (people)], or [Auto-area AF (animals)] is chosen for AF-area
mode, the button functions only to initiate subject-tracking AF
(0100).
2 Available with compatible lenses only.
3 Regardless of the option selected, in manual focus mode the control
ring can only be used to adjust focus.
･The following options are available:
Role Description
K[Select center
focus point]
Pressing the control selects the center focus
point.
4[Save focus
position]
Pressing and holding the lens Fn button
registers the focus position.
For more information, see “Save focus
position/Recall focus position” in the “Focus”
section of “Basic settings” (0106).
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
379
Role Description
3[Recall focus
position]
Pressing the lens Fn2 button recalls the
focus position registered in [Save focus
position].
For more information, see “Save focus
position/Recall focus position” in the “Focus”
section of “Basic settings” (0106).
A[AF-ON] Pressing the control initiates autofocus.
F[AF lock only] Focus locks while the control is pressed.
E[AE lock (Hold)]
Exposure locks when the control is pressed.
Exposure lock does not end when the
shutter is released. Exposure remains locked
until the control is pressed a second time or
the standby timer expires.
C[AE lock only] Exposure locks while the control is pressed.
B[AE/AF lock]Focus and exposure lock while the control is
pressed.
t[Power aperture
(open)]
Aperture widens while the Fn1 button is
pressed. Use in combination with Custom
Setting g2 [Custom controls] > [Fn2
button] > [Power aperture (close)] for
button-controlled aperture adjustment.
q[Power aperture
(close)]
Aperture narrows while the Fn2 button is
pressed. Use in combination with Custom
Setting g2 [Custom controls] > [Fn1
button] > [Power aperture (open)] for
button-controlled aperture adjustment.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
380
Role Description
i[Exposure
compensation +]
Exposure compensation increases while the
Fn1 button is pressed. Use in combination
with Custom Setting g2 [Custom controls] >
[Fn2 button] > [Exposure compensation -]
for button-controlled exposure
compensation.
h[Exposure
compensation -]
Exposure compensation decreases while the
Fn2 button is pressed. Use in combination
with Custom Setting g2 [Custom controls] >
[Fn1 button] > [Exposure compensation +]
for button-controlled exposure
compensation.
n[Subject tracking]
Pressing the control when [Auto-area AF],
[Auto-area AF (people)], or [Auto-area AF
(animals)] is selected for AF-area mode
enables subject tracking; the focus point will
change to a targeting reticle and the
monitor to a subject-tracking display.
･To end subject-tracking AF, press the
control again or press the W (Q) button.
b[Live view info
display o]
Press the control to hide the icons and
shooting information on the display. Icons
and shooting information can be displayed
by pressing the button again.
b[Framing grid
display]
Each time you press the button, the
composition framing grid on the display
changes between [O], [On (3×3)], and [On
(4×4)].
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
381
Role Description
p[Zoom on/o]
Press the control to zoom the display in on
the area around the current focus point (the
zoom ratio is selected in advance). Press
again to cancel zoom.
O[MY MENU] Press the control to display “MY MENU”.
3[Access top item in
MY MENU]
Press the control to jump to the top item in
“MY MENU”. Place frequently-used menu
items at the top of “MY MENU” for quick
access.
K[Playback] Press the control to start playback.
C[Take photos]
Press the shutter-release button all the way
down to take a photograph with an aspect
ratio of 16:9.
1[Record videos]Press the control to start recording. Press
again to end recording.
m[White balance]
Hold the control and rotate the main
command dial to adjust white balance for
videos. Some options oer sub-options that
can be selected by rotating the sub-
command dial.
h[Set Picture
Control]
Press the control and rotate a command dial
to choose a Picture Control.
y[Active D-Lighting]Press the control and rotate a command dial
to adjust Active D-Lighting for videos.
w[Metering]Press the control and rotate a command dial
to choose a video metering option.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
382
Role Description
c[Release mode
(save frame)]
Press the control and rotate a command dial
to choose the release mode for photographs
taken in video mode.
z[Focus mode/AF-
area mode]
Hold the control and rotate the main
command dial to choose the focus mode,
the sub-command dial to choose the AF-
area mode.
H[Microphone
sensitivity]
Press the control and rotate a command dial
to adjust microphone sensitivity.
W[Focus peaking]
Press the control and rotate the main
command dial to choose a peaking level and
the sub-command dial to select the peaking
color.
X[Focus (M/A)]
The lens control ring can be used for manual
focus regardless of the option selected for
focus mode. To refocus using autofocus,
press the shutter-release button halfway or
press a control to which AF-ON has been
assigned.
q[Power aperture]Rotate the lens control ring to adjust
aperture.
E[Exposure
compensation]
Rotate the lens control ring to adjust
exposure compensation.
9[ISO sensitivity]Rotate the lens control ring to adjust ISO
sensitivity.
[None] The control has no eect.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
383
DPower aperture
･Power aperture is available only in modes A and M.
･A 6 icon in the shooting display indicates that power aperture cannot be
used.
･The display may icker while aperture is adjusted.
g3: AF speed
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the focus speed in video mode when the focus mode is set to
AF-C or AF-F.
Use [When to apply] to choose when the selected option applies.
Option Description
D[Always]The camera focuses at the selected speed at all times
in video mode.
E[Only while
recording]
Focus is adjusted at the selected speed only during
video recording. At other times, the focus speed is
“+5”, or in other words as fast possible.
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
384
g4: AF tracking sensitivity
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Set the AF tracking sensitivity from values 1 to 7 in video mode when
the focus mode is set to AF-C or AF-F.
･Choose [7 (Low)] to help maintain focus on your original subject.
･If the subject leaves the selected focus area when [1 (High)] is
selected, the camera will respond by quickly shifting focus to a new
subject in the same area.
g5: Highlight display
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether shading is used to indicate highlights (bright areas of
the frame) during video recording.
Display pattern
To enable the highlight display, select [Pattern 1] or [Pattern 2].
Pattern 1 Pattern 2
A Custom Settings: Fine-tuning camera settings
385
Highlight display threshold
Choose the brightness needed to trigger the video highlight display.
The lower the value, the greater the range of brightnesses that will be
shown as highlights. If [255] is selected, the highlight display will show
only areas that are potentially overexposed.
DHighlight display
If both the highlight display and focus peaking are enabled, only focus
peaking will be displayed in manual focus mode. To view the highlight
display in manual focus mode, select [O] for Custom Setting d8 [Focus
peaking] > [Peaking level].
B The setup menu: Camera setup
386
B The setup menu: Camera setup
To view the setup menu, select the B tab in the camera menus.
The setup menu contains the following items:
Item 0
[Format memory card]387
[Save user settings]387
[Reset user settings]388
[Language]388
[Time zone and date]388
[Monitor brightness]389
[Monitor color balance]389
[REC lamp brightness]390
[Information display]391
[AF ne-tuning options]392
[Non-CPU lens data]394
[Save focus position]395
[Image Dust O ref photo]395
[Pixel mapping]398
Item 0
[Image comment]398
[Copyright information]399
[Beep options]400
[Touch controls]401
[Self-portrait mode]402
[HDMI]402
[Airplane mode]402
[Connect to smart device]403
[Connect to computer]405
[Wireless remote (ML-L7)
options]408
[Conformity marking]409
[USB power delivery]410
[Energy saving (photo
mode)]412
B The setup menu: Camera setup
387
Item 0
[Slot empty release lock]412
[Save/load menu settings]413
Item 0
[Reset all settings]417
[Firmware version]417
DSee also
“Setup menu defaults” (0224)
Format memory card
G button U B setup menu
Format memory cards. Note that formatting permanently deletes all
pictures and other data on the card. Before formatting, be sure to
make backup copies as required.
DDuring formatting
Do not turn the camera o or remove memory cards until the message
[Format memory card] clears from the display.
Save user settings
G button U B setup menu
Frequently-used combinations of settings can be assigned to the U1 to
U3 positions on the mode dial (0128).
B The setup menu: Camera setup
388
Reset user settings
G button U B setup menu
Reset settings for U1 to U3 to default values (0129).
Language
G button U B setup menu
Choose a language for camera menus and messages. The languages
available vary with the country or region in which the camera was
originally purchased.
Time zone and date
G button U B setup menu
Change time zones and set the camera clock. We recommend that the
camera clock be adjusted regularly.
Option Description
[Time zone]Choose a time zone. [Date and time] is automatically set
to the time in the new time zone.
[Date and time]Set the camera clock to the time in the selected [Time
zone].
[Date format]Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are
displayed.
[Daylight
saving time]
Select [On] to turn daylight saving time on, [O] to turn it
o. Selecting [On] automatically advances the clock one
hour. The default setting is [O].
If the camera clock has been initialized, the 1 icon is displayed in the
shooting display as a warning.
B The setup menu: Camera setup
389
Monitor brightness
G button U B setup menu
Press 1 or 3 to adjust monitor brightness. Choose higher values for
increased brightness, lower values for reduced brightness.
･Higher values increase the drain on the battery.
Monitor color balance
G button U B setup menu
Adjust monitor color balance to your taste.
･Color balance is adjusted using the multi selector. Press 1, 3, 4, or
2 to adjust color balance as shown below. Press J to save changes.
1Increase green
2Increase amber
3Increase magenta
4Increase blue
･Monitor color balance applies only to menus, playback, and the
shooting display; photos and videos taken with the camera are not
aected.
B The setup menu: Camera setup
390
･The reference image is either the last picture taken or, in playback
mode, the picture last displayed. If the memory card contains no
pictures, an empty frame will be displayed instead.
･To choose a dierent picture, press the W (Q) button. Highlight the
desired picture and press J to select it as the reference image.
･To view the highlighted picture zoomed in, press and hold the X
button.
REC lamp brightness
G button U B setup menu
Set the REC lamp brightness while recording videos and time-lapse
videos. The brightness decreases from [3], [2], and [1]. When [O] is
selected, the REC lamp does not light up or ash.
Option Description
[Video
recording]
Set the brightness when the REC lamp lights up or ashes
while recording videos or in video mode.
･When an option other than [O] is selected, the REC lamp
lights up while recording videos.
･For information on the ashing of the REC lamp while
recording videos or in video mode, see “The REC lamp”
(082).
B The setup menu: Camera setup
391
Option Description
[Time-lapse
video
recording]
Set the brightness when the REC lamp lights up or ashes
while recording time-lapse videos.
･When an option other than [O] is selected, the REC lamp
lights up while recording time-lapse videos.
･If an option other than [O] is selected and the battery is
low while recording time-lapse videos, the REC lamp
repeatedly ashes twice quickly.
･When an option other than [O] is selected, the REC lamp
lights up or ashes even if [Time-lapse video] is selected
for [Interval timer shooting] > [Options] in the photo
shooting menu.
Information display
G button U B setup menu
Adjust the appearance of the information display according to lighting
conditions.
Dark on light Light on dark
Option Description
w[Dark on
light]
To make the display easier to read in bright locations, the
monitor lights and the lettering is displayed in black.
x[Light on
dark]
To make the display easier to read in dark locations, the
monitor dims and the lettering is displayed in white.
B The setup menu: Camera setup
392
AF ne-tuning options
G button U B setup menu
Fine-tune focus for the current lens.
･Use only as required.
･We recommend that you perform ne-tuning at a focus distance you
use frequently. If you perform focus-tuning at a short focus distance,
for example, you may nd it less eective at longer distances.
Option Description
[AF ne-
tune]
･[On]: Turn AF ne-tuning on.
･[O]: Turn AF ne-tuning o.
[Fine-tune
and save
lens]
Fine-tune focus for the current lens. Press 1 or 3 to highlight
items and press 4 or 2 to choose from values between +20
and -20.
･The larger the ne-tuning value, the farther the focal point
is from the lens; the smaller the value, the closer the focal
point.
･The display shows the current and previous values.
･The camera can store values for up to 40 lens types.
･If a lens for which values have already been saved is used,
the ne-tuning values will be overwritten.
[Default]
Choose the ne-tuning values for lenses for which no values
have previously been saved using [Fine-tune and save lens].
Press 4 or 2 to choose from values between +20 and -20.
B The setup menu: Camera setup
393
Option Description
[List saved
values]
List values saved using [Fine-tune and save lens].
Highlighting a lens in the list and pressing 2 displays a
[Choose lens number] dialog.
･The [Choose lens number] dialog is used to enter the lens
identier.
･The serial number is automatically entered for Z mount
lenses and some F mount lenses.
DDeleting saved values
To delete values saved using [Fine-tune and save lens], highlight the
desired lens in the [List saved values] list and press O.
Creating and saving ne-tuning values
1Attach the lens to the camera.
2Select [AF ne-tuning options] in the setup menu, then
highlight [Fine-tune and save lens] and press 2.
An AF ne-tuning dialog will be displayed.
B The setup menu: Camera setup
394
3Press 4 or 2 to ne-tune autofocus.
･Choose from values between +20 and −20.
･The current value is shown by g, the previously-selected value by
j.
･If a zoom lens is attached, you can choose separate ne-tuning
values for maximum angle (WIDE) and maximum zoom (TELE). Use
1 and 3 to choose between the two.
･The larger the ne-tuning value, the farther the focal point is from
the lens; the smaller the value, the closer the focal point.
4Press J to save the new value.
Choosing a default ne-tuning value
1Select [AF ne-tuning options] in the setup menu, then
highlight [Default] and press 2.
2Press 4 or 2 to ne-tune autofocus.
･Choose from values between +20 and −20.
･The current value is shown by g, the previously-selected value by
j.
･The larger the ne-tuning value, the farther the focal point is from
the lens; the smaller the value, the closer the focal point.
3Press J to save the new value.
Non-CPU lens data
G button U B setup menu
Record data for non-CPU lenses attached using an optional mount
adapter. By registering the focal length and maximum aperture of a non-
CPU lens in the camera, you can display this data as shooting data.
B The setup menu: Camera setup
395
Option Description
[Lens number] Choose a lens identier.
[Focal length (mm)] Enter the focal length.
[Maximum aperture] Enter the maximum aperture.
Save focus position
G button U B setup menu
If [On] is selected, the camera will save the focus position in eect when
the camera is turned o and restore it when the camera is turned on.
･The focus position may change due to changes in zoom or ambient
temperature.
･This option applies only with autofocus Z mount lenses.
･If [On] is selected, it may be some time before you can operate the
camera after turning it on.
Image Dust O ref photo
G button U B setup menu
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust O option in NX Studio.
Image Dust O processes RAW images to mitigate eects caused by
dust adhering in front of the camera image sensor. For more
information, refer to NX Studio online help.
B The setup menu: Camera setup
396
Acquiring Image Dust O reference data
1Select photo mode by rotating the photo/video selector to C.
2Select [Image Dust O ref photo] in the setup menu.
Highlight [Image Dust O ref photo] and press 2.
3Select [Start] on the Image Dust O ref photo dialog.
･Highlight [Start] and press J to display the shooting screen.
4With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-lit,
featureless white object, frame the object so that it lls the
display and then press the shutter-release button halfway.
･In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to innity.
･In manual focus mode, set focus to innity manually.
B The setup menu: Camera setup
397
5Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
acquire Image Dust O reference data.
･The monitor turns o when the shutter-release button is pressed.
･If the reference object is too bright or too dark, the camera may be
unable to acquire Image Dust O reference data and a message
will be displayed and the camera will return to the display shown
in Step 3. Choose another reference object and press the shutter-
release button again.
DAcquiring Image Dust O reference data
･A lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended.
･When using a zoom lens, zoom all the way in.
･The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with dierent
lenses or at dierent apertures.
･Reference images cannot be viewed using computer imaging software.
･A grid pattern is displayed when reference images are viewed on the
camera.
B The setup menu: Camera setup
398
Pixel mapping
G button U B setup menu
Pixel mapping checks and optimizes the camera image sensor. If you
notice unexpected bright spots appearing in pictures taken with the
camera, perform pixel mapping as described below.
･Pixel mapping is available only when a Z mount lens or an optional
FTZ II/FTZ mount adapter is attached.
･To prevent unexpected loss of power, use a fully-charged battery or
an optional charging AC adapter.
1Select [Pixel mapping] in the setup menu.
Turn the camera on, press the G button, and select [Pixel
mapping] in the setup menu.
2Select [Start].
Pixel mapping will start. A message is displayed while the operation
is in progress.
3Turn the camera o when pixel mapping is complete.
DPixel mapping
･Do not attempt to operate the camera while pixel mapping is in progress.
Do not turn the camera o or remove the battery.
･Pixel mapping may not be available if the camera’s internal temperature is
elevated.
Image comment
G button U B setup menu
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken. Comments can
be viewed in NX Studio’s [Info] tab.
B The setup menu: Camera setup
399
Input comment
Input a comment of up to 36 characters. Highlight [Input comment]
and press 2 to display a text-entry dialog. For information on text entry,
see “Text entry” (0236).
Attach comment
To attach the comment to subsequent photographs, highlight [Attach
comment], press 2, and conrm that a check (M) appears in the
adjacent check box. Press J to save changes and exit; the comment will
be attached to all subsequent photographs.
DPhoto info
Comments can be viewed on the shooting data page in the photo
information display.
Copyright information
G button U B setup menu
Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken.
Copyright information can be viewed in NX Studio’s [Info] tab.
Artist/Copyright
Enter the names of the photographer (maximum 36 characters) and
copyright holder (maximum 54 characters). Highlight [Artist] or
[Copyright] and press 2 to display a text-entry dialog. For information
on text entry, see “Text entry” (0236).
B The setup menu: Camera setup
400
Attach copyright information
To attach copyright information to subsequent photographs, highlight
[Attach copyright information], press 2, and conrm that a check (M)
appears in the adjacent check box. Press J to save changes and exit;
copyright information will be attached to all subsequent photographs.
DCopyright information
･To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names,
make sure that [Attach copyright information] is not selected before
lending or transferring the camera to another person. You will also need
to make sure that the artist and copyright elds are blank.
･Nikon does not accept liability for any damages or disputes arising from
the use of the [Copyright information] option.
DPhoto info
Copyright information is included in the shooting data shown in the photo
information display.
Beep options
G button U B setup menu
Beep on/o
Turn the beep speaker on or o.
･If [On] is selected for [Beep on/o], beeps sound when:
- the self-timer counts down,
B The setup menu: Camera setup
401
- interval-timer photography, time-lapse video recording, or focus
shift ends,
- the camera focuses in photo mode (note that this does not apply if
AF-C is selected for focus mode or when AF-A is selected and you
are shooting in AF-C, and [Release] is selected for Custom Setting
a2 [AF-S priority selection]),
- touch controls are used, or
- the shutter-release button is pressed with a write-protected
memory card inserted in the camera.
･Select [O (touch controls only)] to disable the beep for touch
controls while enabling it for other purposes.
･When [On] is selected for [Silent photography] in the photo
shooting menu, a beep will not sound when the camera focuses or
while the self-timer is in operation, regardless of the settings selected
for [Beep options].
Volume
Adjust beep volume.
Pitch
Choose the pitch of the beep from [High] and [Low].
Touch controls
G button U B setup menu
Adjust settings for monitor touch controls.
Enable/disable touch controls
Enable or disable touch controls. Select [Playback only] to enable touch
controls in playback mode only.
B The setup menu: Camera setup
402
Full-frame playback icks
Choose whether the next image in full-frame playback is displayed by
icking left or by icking right.
Option Description
S[LeftURight] Flick left to display the next picture.
T[LeftVRight] Flick right to view the next picture.
Self-portrait mode
G button U B setup menu
When set to [Disable], the monitor will not switch to self-portrait mode
even if it is set to the self-portrait mode position.
HDMI
G button U B setup menu
Adjust settings for connection to HDMI devices (0489).
Airplane mode
G button U B setup menu
Select [Enable] to disable the camera’s built-in Bluetooth and Wi-Fi
functions.
B The setup menu: Camera setup
403
Connect to smart device
G button U B setup menu
Connect to smartphones or tablets (smart devices) via Bluetooth or Wi-
Fi.
Pairing (Bluetooth)
Pair with or connect to smart devices using Bluetooth.
Option Description
[Start pairing]Pair the camera with a smart device (0475).
[Paired devices]List paired smart devices. To connect, select a
device from the list.
[Bluetooth
connection]Select [Enable] to enable Bluetooth.
Select for upload (Bluetooth)
Select pictures for upload to a smart device. You can also opt to upload
pictures as they are taken.
B The setup menu: Camera setup
404
Option Description
[Auto select for
upload]
Select [On] to mark pictures for upload as they are
taken. Photos are uploaded in JPEG format at a size of 2
megapixels, even if other upload size and format
options are selected with the camera. Photos taken in
video mode will not be uploaded. They must be
uploaded manually.
[Manually select
for upload]
Upload selected pictures. Transfer marking appears on
the selected pictures.
[Deselect all] Remove transfer marking from all pictures.
Wi-Fi connection
Connect to smart devices via Wi-Fi.
Establish Wi-Fi connection
❚❚
Initiate a Wi-Fi connection to a smart device.
･The camera SSID and password will be displayed. To connect, select
the camera SSID on the smart device and enter the password (0478).
･Once a connection is established, this option will change to [Close
Wi-Fi connection].
･Use [Close Wi-Fi connection] to end the connection when desired.
Wi-Fi connection settings
❚❚
Access the following Wi-Fi settings:
Option Description
[SSID] Choose the camera SSID.
[Authentication/
encryption]Choose [OPEN] or [WPA2-PSK-AES].
B The setup menu: Camera setup
405
Option Description
[Password] Choose the camera password.
[Channel]
Choose a channel.
･Select [Auto] to have the camera choose the
channel automatically.
･Select [Manual] to choose the channel
manually.
[Current settings] View current Wi-Fi settings.
[Reset connection
settings]
Select [Yes] to reset Wi-Fi settings to default
values.
Upload while o
If [On] is selected, upload of images to smart devices connected via
Bluetooth or Wi-Fi will continue even when the camera is o.
Location data (smart device)
Display latitude, longitude, altitude, and UTC (Universal Coordinated
Time) data downloaded from a smart device.
Connect to computer
G button U B setup menu
Connect to computers via Wi-Fi.
B The setup menu: Camera setup
406
Wi-Fi connection
Select [Enable] to connect using the settings currently selected for
[Network settings].
Network settings
Select [Create prole] to create a new network prole (0454, 0460).
･If more than one prole already exists, you can press J to select a
prole from a list.
･To edit an existing prole, highlight it and press 2.
Option Description
[General]
･[Prole name]: Rename the prole. The default prole name
is the same as the network SSID.
･[Password protection]: Select [On] to require that a
password be entered before the prole can be changed. To
change the password, highlight [On] and press 2.
[Wireless]
･Infrastructure mode: Adjust settings for connection to a
network via a router.
- [SSID]: Enter the network SSID.
- [Channel]: Selected automatically.
- [Authentication/encryption]: Choose [OPEN] or [WPA2-
PSK-AES].
- [Password]: Enter the network password.
･Access-point mode: Adjust settings for direct wireless
connection to the camera.
- [SSID]: Choose the camera SSID.
- [Channel]: Choose [Auto] or [Manual].
- [Authentication/encryption]: Choose [OPEN] or [WPA2-
PSK-AES].
- [Password]: If [WPA2-PSK-AES] is selected for
[Authentication/encryption], you can choose the camera
password.
B The setup menu: Camera setup
407
Option Description
[TCP/IP]
Adjust TCP/IP settings for infrastructure connections. An IP
address is required.
･If [Enable] is selected for [Obtain automatically], the IP
address and sub-net mask for infrastructure mode
connections will be acquired via a DHCP server or automatic
IP addressing.
･Select [Disable] to enter the IP address ([Address]) and sub-
net mask ([Mask]) manually.
Options
Adjust upload settings.
Auto upload
❚❚
Select [On] to upload new photos as they are taken.
･Upload begins only after the photo has been recorded to the
memory card. Be sure a memory card is inserted in the camera.
･Videos and photos taken during video mode are not uploaded
automatically when recording is complete. They must instead be
uploaded from the playback display (0468).
Delete after upload
❚❚
Select [Yes] to delete photographs from the camera memory card
automatically once upload is complete.
･Files marked for transfer before you selected [Yes] are not deleted.
･Deletion may be suspended during some camera operations.
Upload le as
❚❚
When uploading RAW + JPEG images, choose whether to upload both
the RAW and JPEG les or only the JPEG copy.
B The setup menu: Camera setup
408
･The option chosen for [Upload le as] takes eect when [On] is
selected for [Auto upload].
Deselect all?
❚❚
Select [Yes] to remove transfer marking from all images. Upload of
images with an “uploading” icon will immediately be terminated.
MAC address
View the MAC address.
Wireless remote (ML-L7) options
G button U B setup menu
Connect an optional ML-L7 Remote Control through Bluetooth. You can
also assign roles to the Fn1/Fn2 buttons on the ML-L7.
･For the functions that can be used with the remote control and
connecting this camera and the remote control, see “ML-L7 Remote
Control” in “Other compatible accessories” (0559).
Wireless remote connection
Option Description
[Enable]
Start connecting a paired ML-L7. If the camera is connected to a
smartphone or computer, connection to those devices will be
terminated.
B The setup menu: Camera setup
409
Option Description
[Disable] Disconnect the ML-L7.
Save wireless remote controller
Pair the camera with an ML-L7 (0563).
Delete wireless remote controller
Delete a paired ML-L7.
Assign Fn1 button/Assign Fn2 button
Choose the role assigned to the Fn1 or Fn2 button on the ML-L7.
Option Description
[Same as camera K
button]Set the same role as the camera’s K button.
[Same as camera G
button]Set the same role as the camera’s G button.
[Same as camera i button] Set the same role as the camera’s i button.
[None] Pressing the button has no eect.
Conformity marking
G button U B setup menu
View some of the information related to standards with which the
camera complies.
B The setup menu: Camera setup
410
USB power delivery
G button U B setup menu
Choose whether optional charging AC adapters or computers
connected via USB can be used to power the camera (USB power
delivery). USB power delivery allows the camera to be used while
limiting the drain on the battery.
Option Description
[Enable]
The camera draws power from connected devices while on.
Connected devices will also supply power when the camera is o
if Bluetooth upload is in progress or the memory card access
lamp is lit.
[Disable]The camera does not draw power from connected devices at any
time.
･Power will only be supplied to the camera when the battery is
inserted.
･A USB power delivery icon appears in the shooting display when the
camera is powered by an external source.
･For more information, see “Charging the battery” (065).
B The setup menu: Camera setup
411
DComputer USB power delivery
･Use the supplied USB cable or optional UC-E25 USB cable to connect the
camera to the computer. Choose a USB cable with a connector that
matches the USB connector on the computer.
･If you use the supplied USB cable to supply power from a computer, the
camera battery will be consumed even while power is being supplied. If
you use the separately sold UC-E25 USB cable, the camera battery will not
be consumed (the camera battery may be consumed depending on your
computer model and specications).
･Depending on the model and product specications, some computers
will not supply current to power the camera.
D“Power delivery” versus “charging”
The supply of power for camera operations is referred to as “power delivery”,
while the term “charging” is used when power is supplied only to charge the
camera battery. The conditions under which the power supplied by external
devices is used to power the camera or charge the battery are shown below.
Option selected for [USB power
delivery] CameraExternal power source used for
[Enable]
On* Power delivery
O Charging
[Disable]
On* —
O Charging
* Includes instances in which the power switch is in the “OFF” position but
Bluetooth upload is in progress or the memory card access lamp is lit.
B The setup menu: Camera setup
412
Energy saving (photo mode)
G button U B setup menu
In photo mode, the shooting display will turn o to save power
approximately 15 seconds before the standby timer expires.
Option Description
[Enable] Enable energy saving. The display refresh rate may drop.
[Disable]
Disable energy saving. Note selecting [Disable] does not stop
the shooting display dimming a few seconds before the standby
expires.
DEnergy saving
･Note that even when [Enable] is selected, energy saving will not function:
- if [No limit] is selected for Custom Setting c3 [Power o delay] >
[Standby timer] or if the delay selected is less than 30 seconds,
- in self-portrait mode,
- during zoom,
- while the camera is connected to another device via HDMI, or
- while the camera is connected to and exchanging data with a computer
or smartphone via USB.
･Selecting [Disable] increases the drain on the battery.
Slot empty release lock
G button U B setup menu
Choose whether the shutter can be released when no memory card is
inserted in the camera.
Option Description
a[Release
locked]
The shutter cannot be released when no memory
card is inserted.
B The setup menu: Camera setup
413
Option Description
b[Enable
release]
The shutter can be released with no memory card
inserted. No pictures will be recorded; during
playback, the camera displays [Demo].
Save/load menu settings
G button U B setup menu
Save current camera menu settings to a memory card. You can also load
saved settings, allowing menu settings to be shared among cameras of
the same model.
･The following settings are saved:
Settings that can be saved and loaded
PLAYBACK MENU
[Playback display options]
[Picture review]
[Rotate tall]
PHOTO SHOOTING MENU
[File naming]
[Choose image area]
[Image quality]
[Image size]
[RAW recording]
[ISO sensitivity settings]
[White balance]
[Set Picture Control] (Custom Picture Controls
are saved as [Auto])
[Color space]
B The setup menu: Camera setup
414
Settings that can be saved and loaded
PHOTO SHOOTING MENU
[Active D-Lighting]
[Long exposure NR]
[High ISO NR]
[Vignette control]
[Diraction compensation]
[Auto distortion control]
[Flicker reduction shooting]
[Metering]
[Flash control]
[Flash mode]
[Flash compensation]
[Focus mode]
[AF-area mode]
[Vibration reduction] (the options available
vary with the lens)
[Auto bracketing]
VIDEO RECORDING MENU
[File naming]
[Frame size/frame rate]
[Video quality]
[Video le type]
[ISO sensitivity settings]
[White balance]
B The setup menu: Camera setup
415
Settings that can be saved and loaded
VIDEO RECORDING MENU
[Set Picture Control] (Custom Picture Controls
are saved as [Auto])
[Active D-Lighting]
[High ISO NR]
[Vignette control]
[Diraction compensation]
[Auto distortion control]
[Flicker reduction]
[Metering]
[Focus mode]
[AF-area mode]
[Vibration reduction] (the options available
vary with the lens)
[Electronic VR]
[Microphone sensitivity]
[Attenuator]
[Frequency response]
[Wind noise reduction]
[Timecode] (excepting [Timecode origin])
CUSTOM SETTINGS MENU All items
SETUP MENU
[Save user settings]
[Language]
[Time zone and date] (except [Date and time])
B The setup menu: Camera setup
416
Settings that can be saved and loaded
SETUP MENU
[REC lamp brightness]
[Information display]
[Non-CPU lens data]
[Save focus position]
[Image comment]
[Copyright information]
[Beep options]
[Touch controls]
[HDMI]
[USB power delivery]
[Energy saving (photo mode)]
[Slot empty release lock]
MY MENU
The current contents of “My Menu”
[Choose tab]
RECENT SETTINGS
The current contents of the recent settings
menu (up to 20 items)
[Choose tab]
Save menu settings
Save settings to a memory card. If the card is full, an error will be
displayed and settings will not be saved. Saved settings can only be
used with other cameras of the same model.
B The setup menu: Camera setup
417
Load menu settings
Load saved settings from a memory card. Note that [Load menu
settings] is available only when a memory card containing saved
settings is inserted.
DSaved settings
Settings are saved to les named “NCSET***”. “***” is an identier that varies
from camera to camera. The camera will not be able to load settings if the le
name is changed.
Reset all settings
G button U B setup menu
Reset all settings except [Language] and [Time zone and date] to their
default values. Copyright information and other user-generated entries
are also reset. Once reset, settings cannot be restored.
We recommend that you save settings using the [Save/load menu
settings] item in the setup menu before performing a reset.
Firmware version
G button U B setup menu
View the current camera rmware version. If new rmware for the
camera is on a memory card, you can update the rmware.
B The setup menu: Camera setup
418
AUpdating the rmware
To update the camera rmware, you can use either a computer or smart
device.
･When using a computer: You can conrm if there is a new rmware
version at the Nikon Download Center. For the update procedure, see the
rmware download website.
･When using a smart device: If the camera and your smart device are
already paired using the SnapBridge app, the app will notify you when
there is new rmware for your camera. You can then transfer the rmware
to the memory card in the camera by using your smart device. For the
update procedure, see the SnapBridge app online help. The timing of the
notication may dier from the timing at which the update is released on
the Nikon Download Center.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
419
N The retouch menu: Creating
retouched copies
To view the retouch menu, select the N tab in the camera menus.
The items in the retouch menu are used to trim or retouch existing
pictures.
･The retouch menu is grayed out if a memory card is not inserted in
the camera or if a memory card does not contain pictures.
･Retouched copies are saved to new les, separate from the original
pictures.
･The retouch menu contains the following items:
Item 0
7[RAW processing]423
k[Trim]426
8[Resize]427
i[D-Lighting]431
j[Red-eye correction]432
Z[Straighten]433
Item 0
a[Distortion control]433
e[Perspective control]434
l[Monochrome]435
o[Overlay pictures]* 436
9[Trim video]443
* Not displayed when [Retouch] is selected in the playback i menu.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
420
Creating retouched copies
1Select an item in the retouch menu.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an item, 2 to select.
2Select a picture.
･Highlight a picture using the multi selector.
･To view the highlighted picture zoomed in, press and hold the X
button.
･Press J to select the highlighted picture.
3Select retouch options.
･For more information, see the section for the selected item.
･To exit without creating a retouched copy, press G. The retouch
menu will be displayed.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
421
4Create a retouched copy.
･Press J to create a retouched copy.
･Retouched copies are indicated by a p icon.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
422
DRetouching the current picture
To create a retouched copy of the current image, press i and select
[Retouch].
DRetouch
･The camera may not be able to display or retouch images that were taken
or retouched using other cameras or that have been retouched on a
computer.
･If no actions are performed for a brief period, the display will turn o and
any unsaved changes will be lost. To increase the time the display remains
on, choose a longer menu display time using Custom Setting c3 [Power
o delay] > [Menus].
DRetouching copies
･Most items can be applied to copies created using other retouch options,
although multiple edits may result in reduced image quality or faded
colors.
･With the exception of [Trim video], each item can be applied only once.
･Some items may be unavailable depending on the items used to create
the copy.
･Items that cannot be applied to the current image are grayed out and
unavailable.
DImage quality
･Copies created from RAW pictures are saved at an [Image quality] of
[JPEG ne].
･Copies created from JPEG pictures are the same quality as the original.
･In the case of dual-format pictures recorded in image-quality settings of
RAW + JPEG at the same time, only the RAW copy will be retouched.
DImage size
Except in the case of copies created with [RAW processing], [Trim], and
[Resize], copies are the same size as the original.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
423
RAW processing: Converting RAW to JPEG
G button U N retouch menu
The process of converting RAW images to other formats such as JPEG is
referred to as “RAW processing”. JPEG copies of RAW pictures can be
created on the camera as described below.
1Select [RAW processing] in the retouch menu.
Highlight [RAW processing] and press 2.
2Choose how pictures are selected.
Option Description
[Select picture(s)]Create JPEG copies of selected RAW images.
Multiple RAW images can be selected.
[Select date]Create JPEG copies of all RAW pictures taken on
selected dates.
[Select folder]Create JPEG copies of all RAW pictures in a selected
folder.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
424
3Select photographs.
If you chose [Select picture(s)]:
･Highlight pictures using the multi selector.
･To view the highlighted picture zoomed in, press and hold the X
button.
･To select the highlighted picture, press the W (Q) button. Selected
pictures are marked by a $ icon. To deselect the current picture,
press the W (Q) button again; the $ icon will no longer be
displayed. All images will be processed using the same settings.
･Press J to proceed once selection is complete.
If you chose [Select date]:
･Highlight dates using the multi selector and press 2 to select (M)
or deselect (U).
･All images taken on dates marked with a check (M) will be
processed using the same settings.
･Press J to proceed once selection is complete.
If you chose [Select folder]:
Highlight a folder and press J to select; all images in the selected
folder will be processed using the same settings.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
425
4Choose settings for the JPEG copies.
･The settings in eect when the photograph was taken appear
below a preview.
･To use the setting in eect when the photograph was taken, if
applicable, select [Original].
1Image quality (0241)
2Image size (0241)
3White balance (0244)
4Exposure compensation
(0134)
5Set Picture Control (0251)
6High ISO NR (0259)
7Color space (0258)
8Vignette control (0260)
9Active D-Lighting (0165)
10 Diraction compensation
(0260)
･To exit without copying the photographs, press the K button.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
426
5Copy the photographs.
･Highlight [EXE] and press J to create JPEG copies of the selected
photographs.
･If multiple photos are selected, a conrmation dialog will be
displayed after you highlight [EXE] and press J; highlight [Yes]
and press J to create JPEG copies of the selected photos.
･To cancel the operation before all copies have been created, press
the G button; when a conrmation dialog is displayed, highlight
[Yes] and press J.
DRAW processing
･RAW processing is available only with RAW images created with this
camera. RAW images created with other cameras, RAW images created
with NX Tether, or images in formats other than RAW cannot be selected.
･[Exposure compensation] can only be set to values between −2 and +2
EV.
Trim
G button U N retouch menu
Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The photograph is
displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow; create a cropped copy
as described below.
To Description
Size the crop Press X or W (Q) to choose the crop size.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
427
To Description
Change the crop
aspect ratio
Rotate the main command dial to choose the
aspect ratio.
Position the crop Use the multi selector to position the crop.
Save the crop Press J to save the current crop as a separate le.
DCropped pictures
･Depending on the size of the cropped copy, playback zoom may not be
available when cropped copies are displayed.
･The crop size appears at upper left in the crop display. The size of the copy
varies with crop size and aspect ratio.
Resize
G button U N retouch menu
Create small copies of selected photographs.
Resizing multiple images
If you accessed the retouch menu via the G button, you can resize
multiple selected images.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
428
1Select [Resize] in the retouch menu.
Highlight [Resize] and press 2.
2Choose a size.
･Highlight [Choose size] and press 2.
･Highlight the desired size (length in pixels) using 1 and 3 and
press J.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
429
3Choose how pictures are selected.
Option Description
[Select picture(s)]Resize selected pictures. Multiple pictures can be
selected.
[Select date] Resize all pictures taken on selected dates.
[Select folder] Resize all pictures in a selected folder.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
430
4Choose pictures.
If you chose [Select picture(s)]:
･Highlight pictures using the multi selector.
･To view the highlighted picture zoomed in, press and hold the X
button.
･To select the highlighted picture, press the W (Q) button. Selected
pictures are indicated by a 8 icon. To deselect the current picture,
press the W (Q) button again; the 8 will no longer be displayed.
The selected pictures will all be copied at the size selected in Step
2.
･Press J to proceed once selection is complete.
If you chose [Select date]:
･Highlight dates using the multi selector and press 2 to select (M)
or deselect (U).
･All pictures taken on dates marked with a check (M) will be copied
at the size selected in Step 2.
･Press J to proceed once selection is complete.
If you chose [Select folder]:
Highlight a folder and press J to select; all pictures in the selected
folder will be copied at the size selected in Step 2.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
431
5Save the resized copies.
･A conrmation dialog will be displayed; highlight [Yes] and press
J to save the resized copies.
･To cancel the operation before all copies have been created, press
the G button; when a conrmation dialog is displayed, highlight
[Yes] and press J.
DResize
Depending on the copy size, playback zoom may not be available when
resized copies are displayed.
D-Lighting
G button U N retouch menu
D-Lighting brightens shadows. It is ideal for dark or backlit photographs.
Before After
The edit display shows before and after images.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
432
･Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of correction performed. The
eect can be previewed in the edit display.
･Press J to save the retouched copy.
Red-eye correction
G button U N retouch menu
Correct “red-eye” caused by light from the ash reecting from the
retinas of portrait subjects.
･Red-eye correction is available only with photographs taken using a
ash.
･Red-eye that cannot be detected by the camera will not be corrected.
･Press J to save the retouched copy.
DRed-eye correction
･Note the following:
- Red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results.
- In very rare circumstances, red-eye correction may be applied to
portions of the image that are not aected by red-eye.
･Check the preview thoroughly before proceeding.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
433
Straighten
G button U N retouch menu
Rotate pictures by up to ±5° in increments of approximately 0.25°.
･The eect can be previewed in the edit display.
･The greater the rotation, the more will be trimmed from the edges.
･Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of straightening performed.
･Press J to save the retouched copy.
Distortion control
G button U N retouch menu
Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion; this can reduce barrel
distortion in pictures taken with wide-angle lenses or pin-cushion
distortion in pictures taken with telephoto lenses. Select [Auto] to let
the camera correct distortion automatically and then make ne
adjustments using the multi selector. Select [Manual] to reduce
distortion manually.
･The eect can be previewed in the edit display.
･Note that [Manual] must be used with copies created using the
[Auto] option and with photos taken using the [Auto distortion
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
434
control] option in the photo shooting menu. Manual distortion
control cannot be further applied to copies created using [Manual].
･Press 4 to reduce pin-cushion distortion, 2 to reduce barrel
distortion.
･Press J to save the retouched copy.
DDistortion control
Note that greater amounts of distortion control result in more of the edges
being cropped out.
Perspective control
G button U N retouch menu
Create copies that reduce the eects of perspective in photos taken
looking up from the base of a tall object.
･The eect can be previewed in the edit display.
･Note that greater amounts of perspective control result in more of
the edges being cropped out.
･Use the multi selector (1, 3, 4, or 2) to adjust perspective.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
435
･Press J to save the retouched copy.
Before After
Monochrome
G button U N retouch menu
Copy photographs in monochrome. [Monochrome] gives you a choice
of the following monochrome tints:
Option Description
[Black-and-white] Copy photographs in black-and-white.
[Sepia] Copy photographs in sepia.
[Cyanotype] Copy photographs in blue-and-white monochrome.
･The eect can be previewed in the edit display.
･In the case of [Sepia] or [Cyanotype], color saturation can be
adjusted using the multi selector. Press 1 to increase, 3 to decrease.
The changes are reected in the preview.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
436
･Press J to save the retouched copy.
Overlay pictures
G button U N retouch menu
Combine existing photographs to create a single picture that is saved
separately from the originals. One RAW image can be overlaid on
another using additive blending ([Add]), or multiple images can be
combined using [Lighten] or [Darken].
Add
Overlay two RAW images to create a single new JPEG copy.
1Select [Overlay pictures] in the retouch menu.
Highlight [Overlay pictures] and press 2.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
437
2Select [Add].
Highlight [Add] and press 2 to display edit options with [Picture 1]
highlighted.
3Highlight the rst image.
･Press J to display a picture-selection dialog listing only RAW
images, where you can use the multi selector to highlight the rst
photograph in the overlay.
･To view the highlighted picture zoomed in, press and hold the X
button.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
438
4Select the rst image.
Press J to select the highlighted photograph and return to the
preview display; the selected image will appear as [Picture 1].
5Select the second image.
Press 2 and select [Picture 2], then select the second photo as
described in Steps 3 and 4.
6Adjust gain.
･The overlay of [Picture 1] and [Picture 2] can be previewed in the
“Preview” column. Highlight [Picture 1] or [Picture 2] and
optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing 1 or 3 to adjust
gain.
･Choose from values between 0.1 and 2.0 in increments of 0.1.
･The eects are relative to the default value of 1.0 (no gain). For
example, selecting 0.5 halves gain.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
439
7Select the “Preview” column.
･Press 4 or 2 to place the cursor in the “Preview” column.
･To proceed without previewing the overlay, highlight [Save] and
press J.
8Preview the overlay.
･To preview the overlay, highlight [Overlay] and press J.
･To select new photos or adjust gain, press W (Q). You will be
returned to Step 6.
9Save the overlay.
Press J while the preview is displayed to save the overlay and
display the resulting image.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
440
D[Add]
･Colors and brightness in the preview may dier from the nal image.
･Only RAW images created with this camera can be selected. Images
created with other cameras or in other formats cannot be selected.
･The overlay is saved at an [Image quality] of [JPEG ne].
･RAW pictures can be combined only if they were created with the same
options selected for:
- [Choose image area]
- [RAW recording]
･The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording,
metering, shutter speed, aperture, shooting mode, exposure
compensation, focal length, and image orientation) and values for white
balance and Picture Control as the photograph selected for [Picture 1].
Copyright information, however, is not copied to the new image. The
comment is similarly not copied; instead, the comment currently active on
the camera, if any, is appended.
Lighten and darken
The camera compares multiple selected pictures and selects only the
brightest or darkest pixels at each point in the image to create a single
new JPEG copy.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
441
1Select [Lighten] or [Darken].
After selecting [Overlay pictures] in the retouch menu, highlight
either [Lighten] or [Darken] and press 2.
･[Lighten]: The camera compares the pixels in each picture and
uses only the brightest.
･[Darken]: The camera compares the pixels in each picture and uses
only the darkest.
2Choose how pictures are selected.
Option Description
[Select individual
pictures]Select pictures for the overlay one-by-one.
[Select consecutive
pictures]
Select two pictures; the overlay will include the
two pictures and all images between them.
[Select folder]The overlay will include all pictures in the
selected folder.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
442
3Select pictures.
If you chose [Select individual pictures]:
･Highlight pictures using the multi selector.
･To view the highlighted picture zoomed in, press and hold the X
button.
･To select the highlighted picture, press the W (Q) button. Selected
pictures are marked by a $ icon. To deselect the current picture,
press the W (Q) button again; the $ icon will no longer be
displayed. The selected pictures will be combined using the option
selected in Step 1.
･Press J to proceed once selection is complete.
If you chose [Select consecutive pictures]:
･All pictures in a range chosen using the multi selector will be
combined using the option selected in Step 1.
- Use W (Q) to select the rst and last pictures in the desired
range.
- The rst and last pictures are indicated by % icons and the
pictures between them by $ icons.
- You can alter your selection by using the multi selector to
highlight dierent pictures to serve as the rst or last frame. Press
the A (g) button to switch the cursor between the start and
end points.
･To view the highlighted picture zoomed in, press and hold the X
button.
･Press J to proceed once selection is complete.
If you chose [Select folder]:
Highlight the desired folder and press J to overlay all pictures in the
folder using the option selected in Step 1.
N The retouch menu: Creating retouched copies
443
4Save the overlay.
･A conrmation dialog will be displayed; highlight [Yes] and press
J to save the overlay and display the resulting picture.
･To interrupt the process and display a conrmation dialog before
the operation is complete, press the G button; to save the
current overlay “as is” without adding the remaining pictures,
highlight [Save and exit] and press J. To exit without creating an
overlay, highlight [Discard and exit] and press J.
D[Lighten]/[Darken]
･The overlay will include only pictures created with this camera. Pictures
created with other cameras cannot be selected.
･The overlay will include only pictures created with the same options
selected for:
- [Choose image area]
- [Image size]
･The image quality setting for the completed overlay is that of the highest
quality picture it contains.
･Overlays that include RAW pictures will be saved at an image quality of
[JPEG ne].
･The size of overlays that include both RAW and JPEG images is
determined by the JPEG picture.
Trim video
G button U N retouch menu
Create a copy from which unwanted footage has been removed (0201).
O My Menu/m Recent settings
444
O My Menu/m Recent settings
To view [MY MENU], select the O tab in the camera menus.
O My Menu: Creating a custom menu
My Menu can be used to create and edit a customized list of up to 20
items from the playback, photo shooting, video recording, Custom
Settings, setup, and retouch menus. Options can be added, deleted, and
reordered as described below.
Adding items to My Menu
❚❚
1Select [Add items] in [O MY MENU].
Highlight [Add items] and press 2.
O My Menu/m Recent settings
445
2Select a menu.
Highlight the name of the menu containing the item you wish to
add and press 2.
3Select an item.
Highlight the desired menu item and press J.
4Position the new item.
Press 1 or 3 to position the new item and press J to add it to My
Menu.
O My Menu/m Recent settings
446
5Add more items.
･The items currently displayed in My Menu are indicated by a check
mark (L).
･Items indicated by a V icon cannot be selected.
･Repeat Steps 1–4 to select additional items.
Removing items from My Menu
❚❚
1Select [Remove items] in [O MY MENU].
Highlight [Remove items] and press 2.
2Select items.
･Highlight items and press 2 to select (M) or deselect.
･Continue until all the items you wish to remove are selected (L).
O My Menu/m Recent settings
447
3Remove the selected items.
Press J; a conrmation dialog will be displayed. Press J again to
remove the selected items.
DRemoving items while in My Menu
Items can also be removed by highlighting them in [O MY MENU] and
pressing the O button; a conrmation dialog will be displayed. Press the O
button again to remove the selected item.
Reordering items in My Menu
❚❚
1Select [Rank items] in [O MY MENU].
Highlight [Rank items] and press 2.
2Select an item.
Highlight the item you wish to move and press J.
O My Menu/m Recent settings
448
3Position the item.
･Press 1 or 3 to move the item up or down in My Menu and press
J.
･Repeat Steps 2–3 to reposition additional items.
4Exit to [O MY MENU].
Press the G button to return to [O MY MENU].
O My Menu/m Recent settings
449
Displaying [RECENT SETTINGS]
❚❚
1Select [Choose tab] in [O MY MENU].
Highlight [Choose tab] and press 2.
2Select [m RECENT SETTINGS].
･Highlight [m RECENT SETTINGS] in the [Choose tab] menu and
press J.
･The name of the menu will change from [MY MENU] to [RECENT
SETTINGS].
O My Menu/m Recent settings
450
m Recent settings: Accessing recently-used
settings
How items are added to [RECENT SETTINGS]
❚❚
Menu items are added to the top of the [RECENT SETTINGS] menu as
they are used. The twenty most recently-used settings are listed.
DRemoving items from the recent settings menu
To remove an item from the [RECENT SETTINGS] menu, highlight it and
press the O button; a conrmation dialog will be displayed. Press O button
again to remove the selected item.
DDisplaying My Menu
Selecting [Choose tab] in the [RECENT SETTINGS] menu displays the items
shown in Step 2 of “Displaying [RECENT SETTINGS]” (0449). Highlight [O
MY MENU] and press J to view My Menu.
Network options
451
Establishing wireless
connections to computers or
smart devices
Network options
The camera can:
･connect to computers via Wi-Fi (0452) or
･establish wireless connections to smartphones or tablets (smart
devices; 0474)
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
452
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
What Wi-Fi can do for you
Connect using the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi to upload selected pictures to
a computer.
The Wireless Transmitter Utility
Before you will be able to upload images via Wi-Fi, you will need to pair
the camera with the computer using Nikon’s Wireless Transmitter Utility
software.
･Once the devices are paired, you will be able to connect to the
computer from the camera.
･The Wireless Transmitter Utility is available for download from the
Nikon Download Center. Be sure to download the latest version after
reading the release notes and system requirements.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
Infrastructure and access-point modes
Either of the following two methods can be used to establish wireless
connections between the camera and a computer.
Direct wireless connection (access-point mode)
❚❚
The camera and computer connect via direct wireless link. The camera
acts as a wireless LAN access point, letting you connect when working
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
453
outdoors and in other situations in which the computer is not already
connected to a wireless network and eliminating the need for
complicated adjustments to settings. The computer cannot connect to
the Internet while connected to the camera.
･To create a new host prole, select [Direct connection to computer]
in the connection wizard.
Infrastructure mode
❚❚
The camera connects to a computer on an existing network (including
home networks) via a wireless router. The computer can still connect to
the Internet while connected to the camera.
･To create a new network prole, select [Search for Wi-Fi network] in
the connection wizard.
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
454
DInfrastructure mode
･This guide assumes you are connecting via an existing wireless network.
･Connection to computers beyond the local area network is not supported.
You can connect only to computers on the same network.
Connecting in access-point mode
1Select [Connect to computer] in the camera setup menu, then
highlight [Network settings] and press 2.
2Highlight [Create prole] and press J.
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
455
3Highlight [Direct connection to computer] and press J.
The camera SSID and encryption key will be displayed.
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
456
4Establish a connection to the camera.
Windows:
･Click the wireless LAN icon in the taskbar.
･Select the SSID displayed by the camera in Step 3.
･When prompted to enter the network security key, enter the
encryption key displayed by the camera in Step 3. The computer
will initiate a connection to the camera.
macOS:
･Click the wireless LAN icon in the menu bar.
･Select the SSID displayed by the camera in Step 3.
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
457
･When prompted to enter the network security key, enter the
encryption key displayed by the camera in Step 3. The computer
will initiate a connection to the camera.
5Start pairing.
When prompted, launch the Wireless Transmitter Utility on the
computer.
6Select the camera in the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
Select the name displayed by the camera in Step 5 and click [Next].
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
458
7In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, enter the authentication code
displayed by the camera.
･The camera will display an authentication code.
･Enter the authentication code in the dialog displayed by the
Wireless Transmitter Utility and click [Next].
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
459
8Complete the pairing process.
･When the camera displays a message stating that pairing is
complete, press J.
･In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, click [Next]; you will be
prompted to choose a destination folder. For more information,
see online help for the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
･A wireless connection will be established between the camera and
computer when pairing is complete.
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
460
9Check the connection.
When a connection is established, the network SSID will be
displayed in green in the camera [Connect to computer] menu.
･If the camera SSID is not displayed in green, connect to the camera
via the wireless network list on your computer.
A wireless connection has now been established between the
camera and the computer.
Pictures taken with the camera can be uploaded to the computer as
described in “Uploading pictures” (0468).
Connecting in infrastructure mode
1Select [Connect to computer] in the camera setup menu, then
highlight [Network settings] and press 2.
2Highlight [Create prole] and press J.
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
461
3Highlight [Search for Wi-Fi network] and press J.
The camera will search for networks currently active in the vicinity
and list them by name (SSID).
D[Easy Connect]
･To connect without entering an SSID or encryption key, press X in Step
3. Next, press J and choose from the following options:
Option Description
[Push-
button
WPS]
For routers that support push-button WPS. Press the
WPS button on the router and then press the camera J
button to connect.
[PIN-entry
WPS]
The camera will display a PIN. Using a computer, enter
the PIN on the router. For more information, see the
documentation provided with the router.
･After connecting, proceed to Step 6.
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
462
4Choose a network.
･Highlight a network SSID and press J.
･Encrypted networks are indicated by a h icon. If the selected
network is encrypted (h), you will be prompted to enter the
encryption key. If the network is not encrypted, proceed to Step 6.
･If the desired network is not displayed, press X to search again.
DHidden SSIDs
Networks with hidden SSIDs are indicated by blank entries in the
network list.
･To connect to a network with a hidden SSID, highlight a blank entry
and press J. Next, press J; the camera will prompt you to provide an
SSID.
･Enter the network name and press X. Press X again; the camera will
now prompt you to enter the encryption key.
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
463
5Enter the encryption key.
･Press J and enter the encryption key for the wireless router.
･For more information, see the documentation for the wireless
router.
･Press X when entry is complete.
･Press X again to initiate the connection. A message will be
displayed for a few seconds when the connection is established.
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
464
6Obtain or select an IP address.
･Highlight one of the following options and press J.
Option Description
[Obtain
automatically]
Select this option if the network is congured to
supply the IP address automatically. A
“conguration complete” message will be
displayed once an IP address has been assigned.
[Enter
manually]
Enter the IP address and sub-net mask manually.
･Rotate the main command dial to highlight
segments.
･Press 4 or 2 to change the highlighted segment
and press J to save changes.
･Next, press X; a “conguration complete”
message will be displayed. Press X again to
display the sub-net mask.
･Press 1 or 3 to edit the sub-net mask and press
J; a “conguration complete” message will be
displayed.
･Press J to proceed when the “conguration complete” message is
displayed.
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
465
7Start pairing.
When prompted, launch the Wireless Transmitter Utility on the
computer.
8Select the camera in the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
Select the name displayed by the camera in Step 7 and click [Next].
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
466
9In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, enter the authentication code
displayed by the camera.
･The camera will display an authentication code.
･Enter the authentication code in the dialog displayed by the
Wireless Transmitter Utility and click [Next].
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
467
10
Complete the pairing process.
･When the camera displays a message stating that pairing is
complete, press J.
･In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, click [Next]; you will be
prompted to choose a destination folder. For more information,
see online help for the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
･A wireless connection will be established between the camera and
computer when pairing is complete.
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
468
11
Check the connection.
When a connection is established, the network SSID will be
displayed in green in the camera [Connect to computer] menu.
･If the camera SSID is not displayed in green, connect to the camera
via the wireless network list on your computer.
A wireless connection has now been established between the
camera and the computer.
Pictures taken with the camera can be uploaded to the computer as
described in “Uploading pictures” (0468).
Uploading pictures
Pictures can be selected for upload during playback. They can also be
uploaded automatically as they are taken.
DDestination folders
By default, images are uploaded to the following folders:
･Windows: \Users\(user name)\Pictures\Wireless Transmitter Utility
･macOS: /Users/(user name)/Pictures/Wireless Transmitter Utility
The destination folder can be selected using the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
For more information, see online help for the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
DAccess point mode
Computers cannot access the Internet while connected to the camera in
access point mode. To access the Internet, terminate the connection to the
camera and then reconnect to a network with Internet access.
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
469
Selecting pictures for upload
❚❚
1Press the K button on the camera and select full-frame or
thumbnail playback.
2Select a picture and press the i button.
3Highlight [Select for upload to computer] and press J.
･A white “upload” icon will appear on the picture. If the camera is
currently connected to a network, upload will begin immediately
and the icon will turn green.
･Otherwise, upload will begin when a connection is established.
･Repeat Steps 2–3 to upload additional pictures.
DRemoving upload marking
･Repeat Steps 2–3 to remove transfer marking from selected images.
･To remove transfer marking from all pictures, select [Connect to
computer] > [Options] > [Deselect all?] in the setup menu.
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
470
Uploading photos as they are taken
❚❚
To upload new photos as they are taken, select [On] for [Connect to
computer] > [Options] > [Auto upload] in the setup menu.
･Upload begins only after the photo has been recorded to the
memory card. Be sure a memory card is inserted in the camera.
･Videos and photos taken during video mode are not uploaded
automatically when recording is complete. They must instead be
uploaded from the playback display.
The transfer icon
❚❚
Upload status is indicated by the transfer icon.
W (white): Send
The picture has been selected for automatic upload but upload has not
yet begun.
X (green): Sending
Upload in progress.
Y (blue): Sent
Upload complete.
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
471
The status display
❚❚
The [Connect to computer] display shows the following:
1Status: The status of the
connection to the host. The
host name is displayed in green
when a connection is
established.
While les are being
transferred, the status display
shows “Now sending” preceded
by the name of the le being
sent. Errors are also displayed
here.
2Signal strength: Wireless
signal strength.
3Pictures/time remaining: The
number of pictures remaining
and the time needed to send
them. The time remaining is an
estimate only.
DLoss of signal
Wireless transmission may be interrupted if the signal is lost. Upload of
pictures with “send” marking can be resumed by turning the camera o and
then on again once the signal has been re-established.
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
472
Disconnecting and reconnecting
Disconnecting
❚❚
You can end the connection by:
･turning the camera o,
･selecting [Disable] for [Connect to computer] > [Wi-Fi connection]
in the setup menu,
･selecting [Enable] for [Airplane mode] in the setup menu,
･selecting [Wi-Fi connection] > [Close Wi-Fi connection] in the
photo-mode i menu, or
･connecting to a smart device via Wi-Fi or Bluetooth.
DAccess-point mode
An error will occur if the computer’s wireless connection is disabled before
the camera’s. Disable camera Wi-Fi rst.
Reconnecting
❚❚
To reconnect to an existing network:
･select [Enable] for [Connect to computer] > [Wi-Fi connection] in
the setup menu, or
･select [Wi-Fi connection] > [Establish Wi-Fi connection with
computer] in the photo-mode i menu.
Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi
473
DAccess-point mode
Enable camera Wi-Fi before connecting.
DMultiple network proles
If the camera has proles for more than one network, it will reconnect to the
last network used. Other networks can be selected using the [Connect to
computer] > [Network settings] option in the setup menu.
Connecting to smart devices
474
Connecting to smart devices
The SnapBridge app
Use the SnapBridge app for wireless connections between the camera
and your smartphone or tablet (“smart device”).
･SnapBridge apps can be downloaded from the Apple App Store® or
on Google Play™.
･Visit the Nikon website for the latest SnapBridge news.
･Carefully read any license agreements or the like displayed when
SnapBridge is launched and only proceed if you are willing to accept
them.
What SnapBridge can do for you
The tasks that can be performed using the SnapBridge app are outlined
below. For details, see the SnapBridge app online help:
https://nikonimglib.com/snbr/onlinehelp/en/index.html
Downloading pictures from the camera
❚❚
Download existing pictures to your smart device. Pictures can be
uploaded as they are taken.
Connecting to smart devices
475
Remote photography
❚❚
Control the camera and take pictures from the smart device.
Wireless connections
Use the SnapBridge app for wireless connections between the camera
and your smart device. You can connect via either Bluetooth (0475) or
Wi-Fi (0478). Connecting using Bluetooth allows pictures to be
uploaded automatically as they are taken.
Connecting via Bluetooth (pairing)
Before connecting via Bluetooth for the rst time, you will need to pair
the camera and smart device.
DBefore pairing
･Enable Bluetooth on the smart device. For details, see the documentation
provided with the device.
･Ensure that the batteries in the camera and smart device are fully charged
to prevent the devices turning o unexpectedly.
･Check that there is space available on the camera memory card.
Pairing
❚❚
Pair the camera and smart device as described below.
･Some operations are performed using the camera, others on the
smart device.
･Additional instructions are available via SnapBridge online help.
Connecting to smart devices
476
1Camera: Select [Connect to smart device] > [Pairing (Bluetooth)]
in the setup menu, then highlight [Start pairing] and press J.
The camera name will be displayed in the monitor.
2Smart device: Launch the SnapBridge app and tap [Connect to
camera] in the tab.
･If this is the rst time you have launched the app, you should
instead tap [Connect to camera] in the welcome display.
3Smart device: Follow the on-screen instructions.
･When prompted, tap the category for your camera and then tap
the “pairing” option when prompted to choose the connection
type.
･Tap the camera name when prompted.
Connecting to smart devices
477
4Camera/smart device: After conrming that the camera and
smart device display the same authentication code, follow the
on-screen instructions on both devices to complete pairing.
･Tap the pairing button on the smart device and press the J button
on the camera.
･The camera and smart device will each display a message when
pairing is complete. The camera will then automatically exit to the
menus.
The camera and smart device are now paired.
For information on using the SnapBridge app, see online help.
Connecting to smart devices
478
DPairing error
If you wait too long between pressing the button on the camera and tapping
the button on the smart device in Step 4, the device will display an error
message and pairing will fail.
･If you are using an Android device, tap [OK] and return to Step 1.
･If you are using an iOS device, dismiss the SnapBridge app and check that
it is not running in the background, then request iOS to “forget” the
camera before returning to Step 1. The request to “forget” the camera is
made via the iOS “Settings” app.
DDisabling Bluetooth
To disable Bluetooth, select [Disable] for [Connect to smart device] >
[Pairing (Bluetooth)] > [Bluetooth connection] in the camera setup menu.
Connecting to a previously-paired smart device
❚❚
Once the smart device has been paired with the camera, you will be able
to connect simply by enabling Bluetooth on both the smart device and
camera and launching the SnapBridge app.
Connecting via Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi mode)
In Wi-Fi mode, the camera connects directly to the smart device via Wi-
Fi, no Bluetooth pairing required.
Connecting to smart devices
479
DBefore connecting (Wi-Fi mode)
･Enable Wi-Fi on the smart device. For details, see the documentation
provided with the device.
･Ensure that the batteries in the camera and smart device are fully charged
to prevent the devices turning o unexpectedly.
･Check that there is space available on the camera memory card.
Connecting
❚❚
Follow the steps below to establish a connection between the camera
and smart device in Wi-Fi mode.
･Some operations are performed using the camera, others on the
smart device.
･Additional instructions are available via SnapBridge online help.
1Smart device: Launch the SnapBridge app, open the tab, tap
, and select [Wi-Fi mode].
･If this is the rst time you have launched the app, you should
instead tap [Connect to camera] in the welcome display. When
prompted, tap the category for your camera and then tap the “Wi-
Fi” option when prompted to choose the connection type.
2Camera/smart device: Turn the camera on when prompted.
Do not use any of the controls in the app at this point.
Connecting to smart devices
480
3Camera: Select [Connect to smart device] > [Wi-Fi connection] in
the setup menu, then highlight [Establish Wi-Fi connection] and
press J.
The camera SSID and password will be displayed.
DEnabling Wi-Fi
You can also enable Wi-Fi by selecting [Wi-Fi connection] > [Establish
Wi-Fi conn. with smart device] in the i menu for shooting mode.
Connecting to smart devices
481
4Smart device: Follow the on-screen instructions to establish a
Wi-Fi connection.
･On iOS devices, the “Settings” app will launch. Tap [< Settings] to
open [Settings], then scroll up and tap [Wi-Fi] (which you’ll nd
near the top of the settings list) to display Wi-Fi settings.
･In the Wi-Fi settings display, select the camera SSID and enter the
password displayed by the camera in Step 3.
5Smart device: After adjusting device settings as described in
Step 4, return to the SnapBridge app.
･After establishing a Wi-Fi connection to the camera, the smart
device will display Wi-Fi mode options.
･The camera will display a message stating that the connection is
complete.
The camera and smart device are now connected via Wi-Fi.
For information on using the SnapBridge app, see online help.
Connecting to smart devices
482
DTerminating Wi-Fi mode
To end the Wi-Fi connection, tap in the SnapBridge tab. When the icon
changes to , tap and select [Exit Wi-Fi mode.].
Troubleshooting
483
Troubleshooting
Solutions to some common issues are listed below.
･Troubleshooting information for the SnapBridge app can be found in
the app’s online help, which can be viewed at:
https://nikonimglib.com/snbr/onlinehelp/en/index.html
･For information on the Wireless Transmitter Utility, see the utility’s
online help.
Problem Solution
The camera displays a
TCP/IP error.
Connection settings require adjustment. Check
settings for the host computer or wireless router
and adjust camera settings appropriately (0406).
The camera displays a
“no memory card”
error.
The memory card is inserted incorrectly or not at all.
Conrm that the memory card is correctly inserted
(062).
Upload is interrupted
and fails to resume.
Upload will resume if the camera is turned o and
then on again (0468).
The connection is
unreliable.
If [Auto] is selected for [Channel] when you are
connecting to a smart device, choose [Manual] and
select the channel manually (0404).
If the camera is connected to a computer in
infrastructure mode, check that the router is set to a
channel between 1 and 8 (0406).
Connecting to computers via USB
484
Cabled connections to
computers and HDMI devices
Connecting to computers via USB
Connect the camera using the supplied USB cable. You can then use
Nikon NX Studio software to copy pictures to the computer for viewing
and editing. For information on establishing wireless connections to
computers, see “Connecting to computers via Wi-Fi” (0452) in
“Establishing wireless connections to computers or smart devices”.
Installing NX Studio
You will need an Internet connection when installing NX Studio. Visit the
Nikon website for system requirements and other information.
･Download the latest NX Studio installer from the website below and
follow the on-screen instructions to complete installation.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
･Note that you may be unable to download pictures from the camera
using earlier versions of NX Studio.
Copying pictures to a computer using NX
Studio
See online help for detailed instructions.
Connecting to computers via USB
485
1Connect the camera to the computer.
After turning the camera o and ensuring that a memory card is
inserted, connect the supplied USB cable as shown.
2Turn the camera on.
･The Nikon Transfer 2 component of NX Studio will start. Nikon
Transfer 2 image transfer software is installed with NX Studio.
･If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program,
select Nikon Transfer 2.
･If Nikon Transfer 2 does not start automatically, launch NX Studio
and click the “Import” icon.
3Click [Start Transfer].
Pictures on the memory card will be copied to the computer.
Connecting to computers via USB
486
4Turn the camera o.
Disconnect the USB cable when transfer is complete.
Connecting to computers via USB
487
DWindows 10 and Windows 8.1
Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 may display an AutoPlay prompt when the
camera is connected.
Click the dialog and then click [Nikon Transfer 2] to select Nikon Transfer 2.
DmacOS
If Nikon Transfer 2 does not start automatically, conrm that the camera is
connected and then launch Image Capture (an application that comes with
macOS) and select Nikon Transfer 2 as the application that opens when the
camera is detected.
DTransferring videos
Do not attempt to transfer videos from the memory card while it is inserted
in a camera of a dierent make or model. Doing so could result in the videos
being deleted without being transferred.
DConnecting to computers
･Do not turn the camera o or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in
progress.
･Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle. Be sure
also to keep the connectors straight when disconnecting the cable.
Connecting to computers via USB
488
･Always turn the camera o before connecting or disconnecting a cable.
･To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera battery
is fully charged.
DUSB hubs
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the cable via a
USB hub or keyboard. Connect the camera to a pre-installed USB port.
AUsing a card reader
Pictures can also be copied from a memory card inserted in a third-party card
reader. You should however check that the card is compatible with the card
reader.
Connecting to HDMI devices
489
Connecting to HDMI devices
The camera can be connected to TVs, recorders, and other devices
featuring HDMI connectors. Use a third-party HDMI cable (Type D).
These items must be purchased separately. Always turn the camera o
before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable.
1HDMI connector for connection
to camera
2HDMI connector for connection
to external device*
* Choose a cable with a connector that matches the connector on the
HDMI device.
TVs
･After tuning the TV to the HDMI input channel, turn the camera on
and press the K button to view pictures on the television screen.
･Audio playback volume can be adjusted using the controls on the TV.
Camera controls cannot be used.
･If the camera is paired with a smart device running the SnapBridge
app, the device can be used to control playback remotely while the
camera is connected to a TV. See the SnapBridge app online help for
details.
Recorders
The camera can record video directly to connected HDMI recorders. Use
the [HDMI] item in the setup menu to adjust settings for HDMI output.
Connecting to HDMI devices
490
Some recorders will start and stop recording in response to camera
controls.
Output resolution
❚❚
Choose the format for images output to the HDMI device. If [Auto] is
selected, the camera will automatically choose the appropriate format.
Advanced
❚❚
Adjust settings for connection to the HDMI device.
Option Description
[Output
range]
The RGB video signal input range varies with the HDMI device.
[Auto], which matches the output range to the HDMI device, is
recommended in most situations. If the camera is unable to
determine the correct RGB video signal output range for the
HDMI device, you can choose from the following options:
･[Limited range]: For devices with an RGB video signal input
range of 16 to 235. Choose this option if you notice a loss of
detail in shadows.
･[Full range]: For devices with an RGB video signal input
range of 0 to 255. Choose this option if you notice that
shadows are “washed out” or too bright.
Connecting to HDMI devices
491
Option Description
[External
recording
control]
Choosing [On] allows camera controls to be used to start and
stop recording when the camera is connected via HDMI to a
third-party recorder that supports the Atomos Open Protocol.
･External recording control is available with Atomos
SHOGUN, NINJA, and SUMO-series Monitor recorders. For
more information on device features and operation, contact
the manufacturer or refer to the documentation provided
with the recorder.
･The camera display will turn o automatically when the
time selected for Custom Setting c3 [Power o delay] >
[Standby timer] expires, ending HDMI output. When
recording videos to an external device, select [Standby
timer] and choose [No limit] or a time longer than the
anticipated recording time.
･An icon will be displayed in the camera monitor when [On]
is selected: A is displayed during standby, B during
video recording. During recording, check the recorder and
recorder display to ensure that footage is being saved to the
device.
･If [On] is selected and a memory card is not inserted in the
camera, the REC lamp will not light up during video
recording on an external recorder.
･Note that selecting [On] may disrupt the footage output to
the device.
Connecting to HDMI devices
492
DNo HDMI output
If the video frame size and rate is set to 1920×1080 120p, 1920×1080 100p, or
1920×1080 slow-motion, HDMI output is not available.
DZoom
If you zoom in on the display during video recording, the video being
recorded will be displayed at 1:1 (100%) on HDMI devices. During video
recording standby, if you set the frame size to 3840 × 2160 and zoom in on
the display, the display on the HDMI devices will be at a frame size of 1920 ×
1080.
“On-camera” versus “remote”
493
On-camera ash photography
“On-camera” versus “remote”
You can take pictures using an optional ash unit mounted on the
camera accessory shoe or one or more remote ash units.
･When using a ash, select [O] for [Silent photography] in the
photo shooting menu.
Camera-mounted ash units
Take pictures using a ash unit mounted on the camera. See the
following pages for more information.
Remote ash photography
Take pictures with one or more remote ash units using wireless ash
control (Advanced Wireless Lighting, or AWL). For more information, see
“Remote ash photography” (0505).
Using an on-camera ash
494
Using an on-camera ash
1Mount a ash unit on the camera accessory shoe.
See the documentation provided with the unit for details.
2Turn on the camera and ash unit.
The ash will begin charging; the ash-ready indicator (c) will
appear in the shooting display when charging is complete.
3Choose the ash control mode (0497) and ash mode (0498).
4Adjust shutter speed and aperture.
5Take pictures.
Using an on-camera ash
495
DShutter speed
Shutter speed can be set as follows when an optional ash unit is used:
Mode Shutter speed
bSet automatically by camera (1/200 s–1/60 s)
P, ASet automatically by camera (1/200 s–1/60 s)*
S1/200 s–30 s
M1/200 s–30 s, Bulb, Time
* Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30 s if slow sync, rear-curtain sync, or
slow sync with red-eye reduction is selected for ash mode.
DThird-party ash units
The camera cannot be used with ash units that would apply voltages over
250 V to the camera’s X contacts or short-circuit contacts on the accessory
shoe. Use of such ash units could not only interfere with normal operation
of the camera but also damage the ash sync circuits of the camera and/or
ash.
Di-TTL ash control
When an optional ash unit that supports the Nikon Creative Lighting
System is attached and set to TTL, the camera uses monitor pre-ashes for
balanced or standard “i-TTL ll-ash” ash control. i-TTL ash control is not
available with ash units that do not support the Nikon Creative Lighting
System. The camera supports the following types of i-TTL ash control:
Flash control Description
i-TTL
balanced ll-
ash
The camera uses “i-TTL balanced ll-ash” ash control for a
natural balance between the main subject and ambient
background lighting. After the shutter-release button is
pressed and immediately before the main ash, the ash
unit emits a series of monitor pre-ashes which the camera
Using an on-camera ash
496
Flash control Description
i-TTL
balanced ll-
ash
uses to optimize ash output for a balance between the
main subject and ambient background lighting.
Standard i-
TTL ll-ash
Flash output is adjusted to bring lighting in the frame to a
standard level; the brightness of the background is not
taken into account. Recommended for shots in which the
main subject is emphasized at the expense of background
details, or when exposure compensation is used.
･Standard i-TTL ll-ash is activated automatically when [Spot metering]
is selected.
Flash control mode
497
Flash control mode
When a ash unit (an SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300) is mounted on the
camera, the ash control mode, ash level, and other ash settings can
be adjusted using the [Flash control] > [Flash control mode] item in
the photo shooting menu.
･Settings for ash units other than the SB-500, SB-400, and SB-300 can
only be adjusted using ash unit controls.
Option Description
[TTL]
･Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting
conditions.
･Flash compensation can be adjusted using [Flash
compensation] in the photo shooting menu.
[Manual]･Choose the ash level manually.
･Flash output is selected using [Manual output amount].
Flash modes
498
Flash modes
Use the [Flash mode] item in the photo shooting menu to choose the
eect produced by the ash. The options available vary with the
shooting mode.
Option Description Available
in
I
[Fill ash]
(front-curtain
sync)
This mode is recommended in most
situations. In modes P and A, shutter
speed will automatically be set to values
between 1/200 s (or 1/4000 s with auto FP
high-speed sync) and 1/60 s.
b, P, S, A,
M
J[Red-eye
reduction]
Use for portraits. The ash unit performs a
red-eye reduction ash before the ash
res, reducing “red-eye”.
･A ash unit with red-eye reduction is
required. If you use a ash unit that
does not support red-eye reduction, the
J icon in the shooting display will
ash.
･The desired results may not be achieved
if the subject or camera moves before
the shutter is released (this setting is
not recommended with moving
subjects or in other situations requiring
a quick shutter response).
b, P, S, A,
M
Flash modes
499
Option Description Available
in
L[Slow sync]
(Slow sync)
As for “ll ash”, except that shutter speed
slows automatically to capture
background lighting at night or under low
light.
･Note that photos may be prone to
blurring due to camera shake at slow
shutter speeds.
･Use of a tripod is recommended.
P, A
K
[Slow sync +
red-eye]
(red-eye
reduction
with slow
sync)
Use to include background lighting in
portraits. Red-eye reduction is combined
with slow shutter speeds to capture
background lighting at night or under low
light.
･A ash unit with red-eye reduction is
required. If you use a ash unit that
does not support red-eye reduction, the
K icon in the shooting display will
ash.
･Note that photos may be prone to
blurring due to camera shake at slow
shutter speeds.
･Use of a tripod is recommended.
P, A
M
[Rear-
curtain
sync]
The ash res just before the shutter
closes, creating the eect of a stream of
light behind moving light sources.
･Selecting P or A after choosing this
option sets the ash mode to slow sync.
･Note that photos may be prone to
blurring due to camera shake at slow
shutter speeds.
･Use of a tripod is recommended.
P, S, A, M
Flash modes
500
Option Description Available
in
s[Flash o] The ash does not re. b, P, S, A,
M
DStudio strobe lighting
Rear-curtain sync cannot be used with studio ash systems, as the correct
synchronization cannot be obtained.
Flash compensation
501
Flash compensation
Flash compensation is used to deliberately alter ash output, for
example in order to change the brightness of the subject relative to the
background. Via the [Flash compensation] item in the photo shooting
menu, ash output can be increased to make the main subject appear
brighter, reduced to prevent glare, or otherwise ne-tuned to produce
the desired result.
･Choose from values of from −3 to +1 in steps of 1/3.
･Higher values make the subject brighter, lower values darker.
･At values other than ±0.0, a Y icon will appear in the shooting
display.
･Normal ash output can be restored by setting ash compensation to
±0.0. Flash compensation is not reset when the camera is turned o.
FV lock
502
FV lock
This feature is used to lock ash output for CLS-compatible ash units,
letting you take multiple photos or recompose shots without changing
the ash level. Your subject need not be in the center of the frame,
giving you more freedom when composing shots.
･Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO
sensitivity and aperture.
･FV lock is not available in b mode.
1Assign [FV lock] to a control using Custom Setting f2 [Custom
controls (shooting)].
2Mount a CLS-compatible ash unit on the camera accessory
shoe.
3Turn the ash unit on and choose a ash control mode of TTL or
monitor pre-ash qA or A.
･If you are using an SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300 mounted on the
camera accessory shoe, choose [TTL] for [Flash control] > [Flash
control mode] in the photo shooting menu.
･For information on other ash units, see the documentation
provided with the unit.
FV lock
503
4Focus.
Position the subject in the center of the frame and press the shutter-
release button halfway to focus.
5Lock ash level.
･After conrming that the ash-ready indicator (c) appears in the
shooting display, press the [FV lock] control; the ash unit will
emit a monitor pre-ash to determine the appropriate ash level.
･Flash output will lock and an FV lock icon (r) will appear in the
shooting display.
6Recompose the shot.
FV lock
504
7Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
shoot.
If desired, additional pictures can be taken without releasing FV lock.
Repeat Steps 6 to 7 to take additional shots.
8Release FV lock.
Press the [FV lock] control to release FV lock and conrm that the FV
lock icon (r) is no longer displayed in the shooting display.
What is remote ash photography?
505
Remote ash photography
What is remote ash photography?
Take pictures with one or more remote ash units using wireless ash
control (Advanced Wireless Lighting, or AWL). For information on using a
ash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe, see “On-camera ash
photography” (0493).
Throughout this chapter, operations involving the camera and accessories
connected to the camera are indicated by C, operations involving remote
ash units by f. For more information on using remote ash units (f), see
the documentation provided with the ash unit.
Controlling remote ash units
506
Controlling remote ash units
Remote ash units can be controlled via optical signals from an optional
ash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe and functioning as a
master ash (optical AWL). For information on compatible ash units,
see “Features available with CLS-compatible ash units” (0535).
･If the ash unit in question is an SB-500, settings can be adjusted
from the camera. For more information, see “Using optical AWL with
the SB-500” (0506). See the documentation provided with the ash
units for more information.
･Settings for other ash units must be adjusted using ash unit
controls. For more information, see the documentation provided with
the ash unit in question.
Using optical AWL with the SB-500
When an optional ash unit SB-500 is mounted on the accessory shoe of
the camera, [Wireless ash options] is displayed in [Flash control] in
the photo shooting menu. Group ash can be performed by selecting
[Optical AWL] in [Wireless ash options].
Controlling remote ash units
507
1C: Highlight [Group ash options] in the [Flash control] display
and press 2.
Controlling remote ash units
508
2C: Adjust ash output and choose the channel and ash control
mode.
･Choose the ash control mode and ash level for the master ash
and the remote ash units in each group.
･The following options are available:
Option Description
TTL i-TTL ash control.
qAAuto aperture. Available only with compatible ash units.
MChoose the ash level manually.
––
(o) The remote units do not re. [Comp.] cannot be adjusted.
･Select [3] for [Channel].
3f: Set the channel of the remote ash units to [3].
Controlling remote ash units
509
4f: Group the remote ash units.
･Choose a group (A or B).
･There is no limit on the number of remote ash units that may be
used. The practical maximum, however, is three per group, as the
light emitted by the remote ash units will interfere with
performance if more ash units are used.
5C/f: Compose the shot and arrange the ash units.
･See the documentation provided with the ash units for more
information.
･Test-re the units and conrm that they are functioning normally.
To test-re the units, press the test button on the master ash.
6C/f: Take the photograph after conrming that the ash-ready
lights for all ash units are lit.
DRemote ash photography
･Position the sensor windows on the remote ash units to pick up the light
from the master ash. Particular care is required if the master ash is
mounted on a hand-held camera.
･Be sure that direct light or strong reections from the remote ash units
do not enter the camera lens (in [TTL] mode) or the photocells on the
remote ash units ([qA] mode). Otherwise light from the ash units may
interfere with exposure.
･Even if [––] is selected for [Master ash] > [Mode], the master ash may
emit low-intensity timing ashes. These ashes may appear in
photographs taken at short range. This can be prevented by choosing low
ISO sensitivities or small apertures (high f-numbers).
･After positioning the remote ash units, take a test shot and view the
results in the camera display.
Before contacting customer support
510
Troubleshooting
Before contacting customer support
You may be able to resolve any issues with the camera by following the
steps below. Check this list before consulting your retailer or Nikon-
authorized service representative.
STEP 1
Check the list of common problems.
Common problems and solutions are listed in the following
sections:
･“Problems and solutions” (0512)
･“Alerts and error messages” (0521)
STEP 2
Turn the camera o and remove the battery, then wait about
a minute, re-insert the battery and turn the camera on.
The camera may continue to write data to the memory card
after shooting. Wait at least a minute before removing the
battery.
STEP 3
Search Nikon websites.
･For support information and answers to frequently asked
questions, visit the website for your country or region (028).
･To download the latest rmware for your camera, visit:
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
Before contacting customer support
511
STEP 4Consult a Nikon-authorized service representative.
DRestoring default settings
･Depending on current settings, some menu items and other features may
be unavailable. To access menu items that are grayed out or features that
are otherwise unavailable, try restoring default settings using the [Reset
all settings] item in the setup menu.
･Note, however, that wireless network proles, copyright information, and
other user-generated entries will also be reset. Once reset, settings cannot
be restored.
Problems and solutions
512
Problems and solutions
Solutions to some common issues are listed below.
Battery/display
The camera is on but does not respond:●
･Wait for recording and other operations to end.
･If the problem persists, turn the camera o.
･If the camera does not turn o, remove and reinsert the battery.
- Any data currently being recorded will be lost.
- Data that have already been recorded are not aected by removing
the battery.
The display in the monitor turns o without warning:●
Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c3 [Power o delay].
Shooting
The camera takes time to turn on:●
More time will be needed to nd les if the memory card contains large
numbers of les or folders.
The shutter cannot be released:●
･Is a memory card inserted, and if so, does it have space available?
･Is the memory card write-protected?
･If you selected mode S after selecting a shutter speed of “Bulb” or
“Time” in mode M, choose a dierent shutter speed.
･Is [Release locked] selected for [Slot empty release lock] in the setup
menu?
The camera is slow to respond to the shutter-release button:●
Select [O] for Custom Setting d3 [Exposure delay mode].
Burst shooting is unavailable:●
Burst shooting cannot be used in conjunction with HDR.
Problems and solutions
513
Photos are out of focus:●
･Is the camera in manual focus mode? To enable autofocus, select AF-A,
AF-S, AF-C, or AF-F for focus mode.
･Autofocus does not perform well under the following conditions. In
these cases, use manual focus or focus lock. Autofocus does not perform
well if: there is little or no contrast between the subject and the
background, the focus point contains objects at dierent distances from
the camera, the subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns, the
focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness, background
objects appear larger than the subject, or the subject contains many ne
details.
The beep does not sound:●
･Is [On] selected for [Silent photography] in the photo shooting menu?
･If AF-C is selected for focus mode or if AF-A is selected and you are
shooting in AF-C, a beep will not sound when the camera focuses.
･Select an option other than [O] for [Beep options] > [Beep on/o] in
the setup menu.
･The beep does not sound in video mode.
The full range of shutter speeds is not available:●
Using a ash restricts the range of shutter speeds available. Flash sync
speed can be set to values of 1/200–1/60 s using Custom Setting e1 [Flash
sync speed]. When using ash units that support auto FP high-speed
sync, choose [1/200 s (Auto FP)] for a full range of shutter speeds.
Focus does not lock when the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway:
●
If AF-C is selected for focus mode or if AF-A is selected and you are
shooting in AF-C, press the A (g) button to lock the focus.
Focus-point selection is not available:●
Not available when [Auto-area AF], [Auto-area AF (people)], or [Auto-
area AF (animals)] is selected for AF-area mode.
Problems and solutions
514
The camera is slow to record photos:●
Is [On] selected for [Long exposure NR] in the photo shooting menu?
Photographs and videos do not appear to have the same
exposure as the preview shown in the display:
●
･The eects of changes to settings that aect exposure and color are not
visible in the display when [O] is selected for Custom Setting d6 [Apply
settings to live view].
･Note that changes to [Monitor brightness] have no eect on images
recorded with the camera.
Flicker or banding appears in video mode:●
Select [Flicker reduction] in the video recording menu and choose an
option that matches the frequency of the local AC power supply.
Bright regions or bands appear:●
Bright regions or bands may occur if the subject is lit by a ashing sign,
ash, or other light source with brief duration.
Smudges appear in photographs:●
･Are there smudges on the front or rear (mount-side) lens elements?
･Is there foreign matter on the image sensor? See “Manual cleaning”
(0569), or consult a Nikon-authorized service representative.
Bokeh
is irregular:●
With fast shutter speeds and/or fast lenses, you may notice irregularities in
how
Bokeh
is shaped. The eect can be mitigated by choosing slower
shutter speeds and/or higher f-numbers.
Pictures are aected by noticeable ghosting or are:●
You may notice ghosting or are in shots that include the sun or other
bright light sources. These eects can be mitigated by attaching a lens
hood or by composing shots with bright light sources well out of the
frame. You can also try such techniques as removing lens lters, choosing
a dierent shutter speed, or using silent photography.
Problems and solutions
515
Shooting ends unexpectedly or does not start:●
･Shooting may end automatically to prevent the camera overheating, for
example if:
- The ambient temperature is high
- The camera has been used for extended periods to record videos
- The camera has been used in continuous release modes for extended
periods
･If photographs cannot be taken because the camera is running hot, turn
the camera o and wait for it to cool before trying to take photographs
again. Note that the camera may feel warm to the touch, but this does
not indicate a malfunction.
Image artifacts appear in the display during shooting:●
･To reduce noise, adjust settings such as ISO sensitivity, shutter speed, or
Active D-Lighting.
･At high ISO sensitivities, noise may become more noticeable in long
exposures or in pictures recorded when the camera temperature is
elevated.
･Randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or bright spots may arise as a result
of increases in the temperature of the camera’s internal circuits. Turn the
camera o when it is not in use.
･Randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, lines or unexpected colors may
appear if you press the X button to zoom in on the view through the
lens during shooting.
･Note that the distribution of noise in the display may dier from that in
the nal picture.
･This issue can sometimes be addressed by checking and optimizing the
image sensor. Perform pixel mapping using [Pixel mapping] in the
setup menu.
The camera cannot measure a value for preset manual white
balance:
●
The subject is too dark or too bright.
Problems and solutions
516
Certain pictures cannot be selected as sources for preset manual
white balance:
●
Pictures created with cameras of other types cannot serve as sources for
preset manual white balance.
White balance (WB) bracketing is unavailable:●
･White balance bracketing is not available when a RAW or RAW + JPEG
option is selected for image quality.
･White balance bracketing cannot be used in multiple exposure and HDR
modes.
The eects of [Set Picture Control] dier from image to image:●
[Auto] is selected for [Set Picture Control] or as the basis for a custom
Picture Control created using [Manage Picture Control], or [A] (auto) is
selected for [Quick sharp], [Contrast], or [Saturation]. For consistent
results over a series of photographs, choose a setting other than [A] (auto).
The option selected for metering cannot be changed:●
The option selected for metering cannot be changed during exposure
lock.
Exposure compensation is not available:●
Changes to exposure compensation in mode M apply only to the
exposure indicator and have no eect on shutter speed or aperture.
Uneven shading may appear in long exposures:●
Uneven shading may appear in long exposures shot at shutter speeds of
“Bulb” or “Time”. The eect can be mitigated by selecting [On] for [Long
exposure NR] in the photo shooting menu.
Sound is not recorded with videos:●
･Is [Microphone o] selected for [Microphone sensitivity] in the video
recording menu?
･Was the video recorded with [Manual] chosen for [Microphone
sensitivity] in the video recording menu and a low sensitivity selected?
Problems and solutions
517
Playback
RAW pictures are not visible during playback:●
The camera displays only the JPEG copies of pictures taken with [RAW +
JPEG ne], [RAW + JPEG normal], or [RAW + JPEG basic] selected for
[Image quality].
Pictures taken with other cameras are not displayed:●
Pictures recorded with other types of camera may not display correctly.
Not all photos are visible during playback:●
Select [All] for [Playback folder] in the playback menu.
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide”
(landscape) orientation:
●
･Is [O] selected for [Rotate tall] in the playback menu?
･Auto image rotation is not available during picture review.
･Camera orientation may not be correctly recorded in photos taken with
the camera pointing up or down.
Pictures cannot be deleted:●
･Is the memory card write-protected?
･Are the pictures protected?
Pictures cannot be retouched:●
･The pictures cannot be further edited with this camera.
･There is insucient space on the memory card to record the retouched
copy.
The camera displays the message, [Folder contains no pictures.]:●
Select [All] for [Playback folder] in the playback menu.
RAW pictures cannot be printed:●
･Print JPEG copies of the pictures created using a tool such as the [RAW
processing] item in the retouch menu.
･Copy the pictures to a computer and print them using NX Studio or
other software that supports the RAW format.
Problems and solutions
518
Pictures are not displayed on HDMI devices:●
Conrm that an HDMI cable is correctly connected.
Output to HDMI devices does not function as expected:●
･Conrm that an HDMI cable is correctly connected.
･Is [On] selected for [HDMI] > [Advanced] > [External recording
control] in the setup menu?
･Pictures may display correctly if default settings are restored using the
[Reset all settings] item in the setup menu.
The eects of [Set Picture Control], [Active D-Lighting], or
[Vignette control] are not visible:
●
In the case of RAW images, the eects can only be viewed using Nikon
software. View RAW images using NX Studio.
Pictures cannot be copied to a computer:●
Depending on the operating system, you may be unable to upload
pictures when the camera is connected to a computer. Copy pictures from
the memory card to a computer using a card reader or other device.
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (wireless networks)
Smart devices do not display the camera SSID (network name):●
･Navigate to the setup menu and conrm both that [Disable] is selected
for [Airplane mode] and that [Enable] is selected for [Connect to smart
device] > [Pairing (Bluetooth)] > [Bluetooth connection].
･Conrm that [Connect to smart device] > [Wi-Fi connection] is
enabled in the setup menu.
･Try disabling and re-enabling wireless network features on the smart
device.
The camera cannot connect to printers and other wireless
devices:
●
The camera cannot establish wireless connections with devices other than
smartphones, tablets, computers, and the ML-L7 Remote Control.
Problems and solutions
519
Pictures cannot be uploaded to smart devices via auto upload:●
･If [Foreground] is selected for [Auto link] > [Link mode] in the
SnapBridge tab, pictures will not be uploaded to the smart device
automatically while the SnapBridge app is running in the background.
Pictures will only be uploaded when the SnapBridge app is displayed
(running in the foreground) on the smart device.
･Check that the camera is paired with the smart device.
･Check that the camera and smart device are congured for connection
via Bluetooth.
The camera cannot download location data from the smart
device:
●
･The camera may be unable to download or display location data from
smart devices depending on the version of the operating system and/or
SnapBridge app used.
･If [Foreground] is selected for [Auto link] > [Link mode] in the
SnapBridge tab, location data will not be downloaded to the camera.
Instead, they will be embedded in photographs after they are uploaded
to the smart device.
Miscellaneous
The date of recording is not correct:●
Is the camera clock set correctly? The clock is less accurate than most
watches and household clocks; check it regularly against more accurate
timepieces and reset as necessary.
Menu items cannot be selected:●
Some items are not available at certain combinations of settings.
[Wireless remote (ML-L7) options] cannot be selected, or the
camera cannot be paired with the ML-L7 Remote Control using
[Save wireless remote controller] in [Wireless remote (ML-L7)
options]:
●
･Use a fully-charged battery.
Problems and solutions
520
･Conrm that [Airplane mode] in the setup menu is set to [Disable].
･The remote control cannot be used while the camera is connected to
and exchanging data with a computer or smartphone via USB. End the
USB connection.
The camera does not respond even when the ML-L7 Remote
Control is used:
●
･The camera and ML-L7 Remote Control (optional) are not connected.
Press the power button on the remote control to connect them. If L is
not displayed on the shooting screen, pair again and connect (0563).
･Conrm that [Wireless remote (ML-L7) options] > [Wireless remote
connection] in the setup menu is set to [Enable].
･Conrm that [Airplane mode] in the setup menu is set to [Disable].
･The remote control cannot be used while the camera is connected to
and exchanging data with a computer or smartphone via USB. End the
USB connection.
Alerts and error messages
521
Alerts and error messages
This section lists the alerts and error messages that appear in the camera
display.
Alerts
The following alerts appear in the camera display:
Alert Problem Solution
HLow battery. Ready spare battery.
lLens is not correctly
attached.
･Ensure that the lens is correctly
attached.
･Ensure that retractable lenses are
extended.
･This indicator is also displayed
when a non-CPU lens is attached
via a mount adapter, but in this
case no action need be taken.
Bulb
(ashes)
“Bulb” selected in
mode S.
･Change shutter speed.
･Select mode M.
Time
(ashes)
“Time” selected in
mode S.
･Change shutter speed.
･Select mode M.
Alerts and error messages
522
Alert Problem Solution
(The
exposure
indicator and
shutter
speed or
aperture
display ash)
Subject too bright;
limits of camera
exposure metering
system exceeded.
･Lower ISO sensitivity.
･Shooting mode P: Use third-party
ND (neutral density) lter (lter can
also be used if alert is still displayed
after following settings are
adjusted in mode S or A).
･Shooting mode S: Choose faster
shutter speed.
･Shooting mode A: Choose smaller
aperture (higher f-number).
Subject too dark;
limits of camera
exposure metering
system exceeded.
･Increase ISO sensitivity.
･Shooting mode P: Use optional
ash unit (ash can also be used if
alert is still displayed after
following settings are adjusted in
mode S or A).
･Shooting mode S: Choose slower
shutter speed.
･Shooting mode A: Choose wider
aperture (lower f-number).
c (ashes)
Flash has red at full
power.
Photo may be underexposed. Check
distance to subject and settings such
as aperture, ash range, and ISO
sensitivity.
Subjects appear dark
and underexposed. Use optional ash unit.
Alerts and error messages
523
Alert Problem Solution
Full (ashes)
･Memory
insucient to
record further
photos.
･Camera has run out
of le numbers.
･Delete pictures from memory card
until there is room for additional
pictures to be recorded. Copy
pictures you wish to keep to
computer or other device before
proceeding.
･Insert new memory card.
Err (ashes) Camera malfunction.
Press shutter-release button again. If
error persists or appears frequently,
consult Nikon-authorized service
representative.
Card
(ashes)
The memory card is
write-protected
(“locked”).
Slide the lock switch to the “write”
position (0590).
Error messages
The following error messages may appear in the camera display:
Shutter release disabled. Recharge battery.●
Battery exhausted.
･Replace with spare battery.
･Charge battery.
This battery cannot be used. It does not communicate properly
with this camera. To use the camera safely, choose a battery
designated for use in this camera.
●
･Battery info not available.
- Battery cannot be used. Contact Nikon-authorized service
representative.
- Battery level is extremely low; charge battery.
･Battery cannot supply data to camera.
- Replace third-party batteries with genuine Nikon batteries.
Alerts and error messages
524
No memory card.●
Memory card not inserted or inserted incorrectly.
･Check that card is inserted correctly.
Cannot access this memory card. Insert another card.●
Error accessing memory card.
･Check that camera supports memory card.
･If error persists after card has been repeatedly ejected and reinserted,
card may be damaged. Contact retailer or Nikon-authorized service
representative.
Memory card is locked. Slide lock to "write" position.●
The memory card is write-protected (“locked”).
･Slide the lock switch to the “write” position (0590).
This card is not formatted. Format the card.●
Memory card is not correctly formatted.
･Format memory card.
･Replace with correctly-formatted memory card.
FTZ mount adapter rmware version not supported. Upgrade FTZ
rmware.
●
The rmware of the mount adapter is not the latest version.
･Update the rmware of the mount adapter to the latest version. For
information on rmware updates, see the Nikon website for your area.
Recording interrupted. Please wait.●
Memory card does not support required video write speed.
･Use card that supports required write speed or change option selected
for [Frame size/frame rate] in video recording menu.
The camera is too hot. It cannot be used until it cools. Please wait.
Camera will turn itself o.
●
･Camera’s internal temperature is elevated.
- Suspend shooting until camera has cooled.
･High battery temperature.
Alerts and error messages
525
- Remove battery and wait for it to cool.
Folder contains no pictures.●
･Folder contains no pictures.
- Insert memory card that contains pictures.
･No pictures in folder selected for playback.
- Use [Playback folder] item in playback menu to select folder that
contains pictures.
Cannot display this le.●
･File has been modied using computer application or does not conform
to DCF le standard.
･File is corrupt.
- Do not overwrite images using computer applications.
Cannot select this le.●
Selected picture cannot be retouched.
･Retouch options are available only with pictures taken with or previously
retouched on camera.
This video cannot be edited.●
Selected video cannot be edited.
･Videos created with other devices cannot be edited.
･Videos under two seconds long cannot be edited.
Compatible lenses and accessories
526
Technical notes
Compatible lenses and accessories
The camera can be used with all Z mount lenses.
Conrm that the lens name includes “NIKKOR Z”.
ACompatible F mount lenses
F mount lenses can be mounted on Z mount cameras using an FTZ II/FTZ
mount adapter.
･Some features may not be available depending on the lens used.
Information on the F mount lenses that can be used with Z mount cameras
and on any restrictions that may apply can be found in
Compatible F Mount
Lenses,
available from the Nikon Download Center:
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
Display in the monitor
527
Display in the monitor
The monitor shows information on current settings. Other icons or
warnings may occasionally be displayed, for example when settings are
changed.
Monitor
Photo mode
❚❚
1Shooting mode (0120)
2Flexible program indicator
(0121)
3User setting mode (0128)
4AF-area brackets (092)
5Flash mode (0498)
6Interval timer indicator (0292)
1 icon (074)
“No memory card” indicator
(062, 0530)
7Release mode (0136)
8Focus point (075, 092)
9Focus mode (090)
10 AF-area mode (092)
Display in the monitor
528
11 Active D-Lighting (0165)
12 Picture Control (0147)
13 Bluetooth connection indicator
(0403)
Airplane mode (0402)
14 White balance (0109, 0153,
0244)
15 Image area (0240)
16 Image size (0162)
17 Image quality (0161)
18 i icon (0145)
19 Exposure and ash bracketing
indicator (0267)
WB bracketing indicator
(0272)
ADL bracketing indicator
(0275)
HDR indicator (0286)
Multiple exposure indicator
(0279)
20 Number of shots in exposure
and ash bracketing sequence
(0267)
Number of shots in WB
bracketing sequence (0272)
Number of shots in ADL
bracketing sequence (0275)
HDR exposure dierential
(0286)
Number of multiple exposure
(0279)
Display in the monitor
529
21 Exposure indicator
Exposure (0125)
Exposure compensation
(0134)
Auto bracketing (0266)
22 Flash-ready indicator (0494)
23 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures; 064)
24 Number of exposures
remaining (064, 0592)
25 Wi-Fi connection indicator
(0165)
Remote-control connection
indicator (0563)
26 ISO sensitivity (0131)
27 ISO sensitivity indicator (0131)
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator
(0132)
28 Exposure compensation
indicator (0134)
29 Flash compensation indicator
(0501)
30 Subject-tracking AF (0100)
31 Aperture (0123, 0124)
32 Shutter speed (0121, 0124)
33 FV lock indicator (0502)
34 Metering (0163)
35 Autoexposure (AE) lock (0142)
Display in the monitor
530
36 Battery indicator (063)
37 USB power delivery (0410)
38 Flicker detection (0261)
39 Shutter type (0350)
Silent photography (0114)
40 Exposure delay mode (0349)
41 Focus indicator (0103)
42 Vibration reduction (0168)
43 Touch shooting (042, 0101)
44 Live view preview indicator
(0352)
45 Temperature warning
DTemperature warnings
･If the camera temperature becomes elevated, a temperature warning and
count-down timer will be displayed. When the timer reaches zero, the
shooting display will turn o.
･The timer turns red when the thirty second mark is reached. In some
cases, the timer may be displayed immediately after the camera is turned
on.
DNo memory card inserted
If no memory card is inserted, a “no memory card” indicator and [–E–] will
appear in the shooting display.
Display in the monitor
531
The information display●
1Shooting mode (0120)
2Flexible program indicator
(0121)
3User setting mode (0128)
4Shutter speed (0121, 0124)
5Aperture (0123, 0124)
6Exposure indicator
Exposure (0125)
Exposure compensation
(0134)
Exposure and ash
bracketing (0267)
WB bracketing (0272)
ADL bracketing (0275)
Display in the monitor
532
7Flash compensation indicator
(0501)
8Exposure compensation
indicator (0134)
Exposure compensation value
(0134)
9Exposure and ash bracketing
indicator (0267)
WB bracketing indicator
(0272)
ADL bracketing indicator
(0275)
HDR indicator (0286)
Multiple exposure indicator
(0279)
10 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures; 064)
11 Number of exposures
remaining (064, 0592)
12 i icon (0145)
13 ISO sensitivity (0131)
14 ISO sensitivity indicator (0131)
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator
(0132)
15 FV lock indicator (0502)
16 Autoexposure (AE) lock (0142)
Display in the monitor
533
17 Bluetooth connection indicator
(0403)
Airplane mode (0402)
18 Wi-Fi connection indicator
(0165)
Remote-control connection
indicator (0563)
19 Long exposure noise reduction
indicator (0258)
20 Shutter type (0350)
Silent photography (0114)
21 Exposure delay mode (0349)
22 Interval timer indicator (0292)
1 icon (074)
23 Flash control mode (0497)
24 “Beep” indicator (0400)
25 Battery indicator (063)
26 USB power delivery (0410)
27 Wi-Fi connection (0165)
28 Release mode (0136)
29 AF-area mode (092)
30 Focus mode (090)
31 Vibration reduction (0168)
32 Active D-Lighting (0165)
33 Metering (0163)
34 Image size (0162)
35 White balance (0109, 0153,
0244)
36 Set Picture Control (0147)
37 Image quality (0161)
38 Flash mode (0498)
39 Temperature warning
Display in the monitor
534
Video mode
❚❚
1Recording indicator (080)
“No video” indicator (082)
2External recording control
(0489)
3Frame size and rate/Video
quality (0172)
4Time remaining (080)
5Timecode (0333)
6File name (0239)
7Wind noise reduction (0176)
8Release mode (still
photography; 0139)
9Sound level (0175)
10 Microphone sensitivity (0175)
11 Frequency response (0332)
12 Electronic VR indicator (0178)
13 Highlight display (0384)
Compatible ash units
535
Compatible ash units
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) supports a variety of
features thanks to improved communication between the camera and
compatible ash units.
Features available with CLS-compatible ash
units
Flash unit 0
SB-5000 535
SB-910/SB-900/SB-800 537
SB-700 539
SB-600 541
SB-500 542
Flash unit 0
SB-R200 544
SB-400 546
SB-300 547
SU-800 549
SB-5000
❚❚
Supported features
Single ash
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced ll-ash 41
Standard i-TTL ll-ash 42
qAAuto aperture 4
ANon-TTL auto -
GN Distance-priority manual 4
Compatible ash units
536
Supported features
MManual 4
RPT Repeating ash 4
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote ash control 4
i-TTL i-TTL 4
[A : B] Quick wireless ash control 4
qAAuto aperture 4
ANon-TTL auto -
MManual 4
RPT Repeating ash 4
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL 4
[A : B] Quick wireless ash control 4
qA/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto 43
MManual 4
RPT Repeating ash 4
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting -
Color Information Communication (ash) 4
Color Information Communication (LED light) -
Auto FP high-speed sync 44
FV lock 45
Compatible ash units
537
Supported features
Red-eye reduction 4
Camera modeling illumination -
Unied ash control -
Camera ash unit rmware update 4
1 Not available with spot metering.
2Can also be selected via the ash unit.
3 Choice of qA and A depends on the option selected with the master
ash.
4 Available only in i-TTL, qA, A, GN and M ash control modes.
5 Available only in i-TTL ash control mode or when the ash is congured
to emit monitor pre-ashes in qA or A ash control mode.
SB-910/SB-900/SB-800
❚❚
Supported features
Single ash
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced ll-ash 41
Standard i-TTL ll-ash 42
qAAuto aperture 43
ANon-TTL auto 43
GN Distance-priority manual 4
MManual 4
RPT Repeating ash 4
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Compatible ash units
538
Supported features
Remote ash control 4
i-TTL i-TTL 4
[A : B] Quick wireless ash control -
qAAuto aperture 4
ANon-TTL auto -
MManual 4
RPT Repeating ash 4
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL 4
[A : B] Quick wireless ash control 4
qA/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto 44
MManual 4
RPT Repeating ash 4
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting -
Color Information Communication (ash) 4
Color Information Communication (LED light) -
Auto FP high-speed sync 45
FV lock 46
Red-eye reduction 4
Camera modeling illumination -
Unied ash control -
Camera ash unit rmware update 47
Compatible ash units
539
1 Not available with spot metering.
2Can also be selected via the ash unit.
3qA/A mode selection is performed on the ash unit using custom
settings.
4 Choice of qA and A depends on the option selected with the master
ash.
5 Available only in i-TTL, qA, A, GN, and M ash control modes.
6 Available only in i-TTL ash control mode or when the ash is congured
to emit monitor pre-ashes in qA or A ash control mode.
7 Firmware updates for the SB-910 and SB-900 can be performed from the
camera.
SB-700
❚❚
Supported features
Single ash
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced ll-ash 41
Standard i-TTL ll-ash 4
qAAuto aperture -
ANon-TTL auto -
GN Distance-priority manual 4
MManual 4
RPT Repeating ash -
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote ash control 4
i-TTL i-TTL 4
[A : B] Quick wireless ash control 4
Compatible ash units
540
Supported features
qAAuto aperture -
ANon-TTL auto -
MManual 4
RPT Repeating ash -
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL 4
[A : B] Quick wireless ash control 4
qA/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto -
MManual 4
RPT Repeating ash 4
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting -
Color Information Communication (ash) 4
Color Information Communication (LED light) -
Auto FP high-speed sync 42
FV lock 43
Red-eye reduction 4
Camera modeling illumination -
Unied ash control -
Camera ash unit rmware update 4
1 Not available with spot metering.
2Available only in i-TTL, GN, and M ash control modes.
3 Available only in i-TTL ash control mode.
Compatible ash units
541
SB-600
❚❚
Supported features
Single ash
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced ll-ash 41
Standard i-TTL ll-ash 42
qAAuto aperture -
ANon-TTL auto -
GN Distance-priority manual -
MManual 4
RPT Repeating ash -
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote ash control -
i-TTL i-TTL -
[A : B] Quick wireless ash control -
qAAuto aperture -
ANon-TTL auto -
MManual -
RPT Repeating ash -
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL 4
[A : B] Quick wireless ash control 4
Compatible ash units
542
Supported features
qA/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto -
MManual 4
RPT Repeating ash 4
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting -
Color Information Communication (ash) 4
Color Information Communication (LED light) -
Auto FP high-speed sync 43
FV lock 44
Red-eye reduction 4
Camera modeling illumination -
Unied ash control -
Camera ash unit rmware update -
1 Not available with spot metering.
2 Can also be selected via the ash unit.
3 Available only in i-TTL and M ash control modes.
4 Available only in i-TTL ash control mode.
SB-500
❚❚
Supported features
Single ash
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced ll-ash 41
Standard i-TTL ll-ash 4
qAAuto aperture -
Compatible ash units
543
Supported features
ANon-TTL auto -
GN Distance-priority manual -
MManual 42
RPT Repeating ash -
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote ash control 42
i-TTL i-TTL 42
[A : B] Quick wireless ash control -
qAAuto aperture -
ANon-TTL auto -
MManual 42
RPT Repeating ash -
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL 4
[A : B] Quick wireless ash control 4
qA/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto -
MManual 4
RPT Repeating ash 4
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting -
Color Information Communication (ash) 4
Color Information Communication (LED light) 4
Compatible ash units
544
Supported features
Auto FP high-speed sync 43
FV lock 44
Red-eye reduction 4
Camera modeling illumination -
Unied ash control -
Camera ash unit rmware update 4
1 Not available with spot metering.
2Can be selected using the [Flash control] item in the camera menus.
3 Available only in i-TTL and M ash control modes.
4 Available only in i-TTL ash control mode.
SB-R200
❚❚
Supported features
Single ash
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced ll-ash -
Standard i-TTL ll-ash -
qAAuto aperture -
ANon-TTL auto -
GN Distance-priority manual -
MManual -
RPT Repeating ash -
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Compatible ash units
545
Supported features
Remote ash control -
i-TTL i-TTL -
[A : B] Quick wireless ash control -
qAAuto aperture -
ANon-TTL auto -
MManual -
RPT Repeating ash -
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL 4
[A : B] Quick wireless ash control 4
qA/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto -
MManual 4
RPT Repeating ash -
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting -
Color Information Communication (ash) -
Color Information Communication (LED light) -
Auto FP high-speed sync 41
FV lock 42
Red-eye reduction -
Camera modeling illumination -
Unied ash control -
Camera ash unit rmware update -
Compatible ash units
546
1 Available only in i-TTL and M ash control modes.
2 Available only in i-TTL ash control mode.
SB-400
❚❚
Supported features
Single ash
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced ll-ash 41
Standard i-TTL ll-ash 4
qAAuto aperture -
ANon-TTL auto -
GN Distance-priority manual -
MManual 42
RPT Repeating ash -
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote ash control -
i-TTL i-TTL -
[A : B] Quick wireless ash control -
qAAuto aperture -
ANon-TTL auto -
MManual -
RPT Repeating ash -
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL -
Compatible ash units
547
Supported features
[A : B] Quick wireless ash control -
qA/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto -
MManual -
RPT Repeating ash -
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting -
Color Information Communication (ash) 4
Color Information Communication (LED light) -
Auto FP high-speed sync -
FV lock 43
Red-eye reduction 4
Camera modeling illumination -
Unied ash control -
Camera ash unit rmware update -
1 Not available with spot metering.
2 Can be selected using the [Flash control] item in the camera menus.
3 Available only in i-TTL ash control mode.
SB-300
❚❚
Supported features
Single ash
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced ll-ash 41
Standard i-TTL ll-ash 4
qAAuto aperture -
Compatible ash units
548
Supported features
ANon-TTL auto -
GN Distance-priority manual -
MManual 42
RPT Repeating ash -
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote ash control -
i-TTL i-TTL -
[A : B] Quick wireless ash control -
qAAuto aperture -
ANon-TTL auto -
MManual -
RPT Repeating ash -
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL -
[A : B] Quick wireless ash control -
qA/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto -
MManual -
RPT Repeating ash -
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting -
Color Information Communication (ash) 4
Color Information Communication (LED light) -
Compatible ash units
549
Supported features
Auto FP high-speed sync -
FV lock 43
Red-eye reduction -
Camera modeling illumination -
Unied ash control -
Camera ash unit rmware update 4
1 Not available with spot metering.
2Can be selected using the [Flash control] item in the camera menus.
3 Available only in i-TTL ash control mode.
The SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander
❚❚
When mounted on a CLS-compatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as
a commander for SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600,
SB-500, or SB-R200 ash units. Group ash control is supported for up to
three groups. The SU-800 itself is not equipped with a ash.
Supported features
Single ash
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced ll-ash -
Standard i-TTL ll-ash -
qAAuto aperture -
ANon-TTL auto -
GN Distance-priority manual -
MManual -
RPT Repeating ash -
Compatible ash units
550
Supported features
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote ash control 4
i-TTL i-TTL -
[A : B] Quick wireless ash control 41
qAAuto aperture -
ANon-TTL auto -
MManual -
RPT Repeating ash -
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL -
[A : B] Quick wireless ash control -
qA/A Auto aperture/non-TTL auto -
MManual -
RPT Repeating ash -
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting -
Color Information Communication (ash) -
Color Information Communication (LED light) -
Auto FP high-speed sync 42
FV lock 43
Red-eye reduction -
Camera modeling illumination -
Compatible ash units
551
Supported features
Unied ash control -
Camera ash unit rmware update -
1 Available during close-up photography only.
2Disabled when RPT is selected for ash control mode.
3 Available only in i-TTL ash control mode or when the ash is congured
to emit monitor pre-ashes in qA ash control mode.
Notes and tips for optional ash units
When using an optional ash unit, be sure also to read the
documentation supplied with the unit.
･If the unit supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible
digital SLR cameras. This camera is not included in the “digital SLR”
category in the documentation for the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and
SB-50DX.
･If the ash-ready indicator (c) ashes for about three seconds after a
photograph is taken in i-TTL or non-TTL auto mode, the ash has red
at full power and the photograph may be underexposed (CLS-
compatible ash units only).
･i-TTL ash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and
12800.
･At ISO sensitivities over 12800, the desired results may not be
achieved at some ranges or aperture settings.
･In mode P, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is limited
according to ISO sensitivity, as shown below:
Maximum aperture (f-number) at ISO equivalent of:
100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800
4 5 5.6 7.1 8 10 11 13
Compatible ash units
552
* If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the
maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the
lens.
･The SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, and
SB-400 provide red-eye reduction in red-eye reduction and slow-sync
with red-eye reduction ash modes.
･“Noise” in the form of lines may appear in ash photographs taken
with an SD-9 or SD-8A high-performance battery pack attached
directly to the camera. Reduce ISO sensitivity or increase the distance
between the camera and the battery pack.
･When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for o-camera ash
photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode.
We recommend that you select standard i-TTL ll-ash. Take a test
shot and view the results in the camera display.
･In i-TTL, do not use any form of ash panel (diusion panel) other
than the ash unit’s built-in ash panel or supplied bounce adapter.
Using other panels may produce incorrect exposure.
Compatible ash units
553
DFlash photography
Flash photography cannot be combined with some camera features,
including:
･video recording,
･[Continuous H (extended)] for the release mode,
･HDR (high dynamic range), and
･silent photography.
DUsing FV lock with optional ash units
･FV lock is available with optional ash units in TTL and (where supported)
monitor pre-ash qA and monitor pre-ash A ash control modes (see
the documentation provided with the ash unit for more information).
･Note that when Advanced Wireless Lighting is used to control remote
ash units, you will need to set the ash control mode for the master or at
least one remote group to TTL, qA, or A.
DOther ash units
The following ash units can be used in non-TTL auto (A) and manual modes.
The options available do not vary with the lens used.
Flash unit Supported features
SB-80DX, SB-28DX, SB-28, SB-26,
SB-25, SB-24
Non-TTL auto, Manual, Repeating ash,
Rear-curtain sync1
SB-50DX, SB-23, SB-29, SB-21B,
SB-29S Manual, Rear-curtain sync1
SB-30, SB-272, SB-22S, SB-22, SB-20,
SB-16B, SB-15
Non-TTL auto, Manual, Rear-curtain
sync1
1 Available when the camera is used to select the ash mode.
2 Mounting an SB-27 on the camera automatically sets the ash mode to
TTL, but setting the ash mode to TTL disables the shutter release. Set
the SB-27 to A.
Compatible ash units
554
DMetering areas for FV lock
The areas metered when FV lock is used with optional ash units are as
follows:
･Stand-alone ash unit
Flash control mode Metered area
i-TTL 6-mm circle in center of frame
Auto aperture (qA) Area metered by ash exposure meter
･Remote ash units
Flash control mode Metered area
i-TTL Entire frame
Auto aperture (qA)
Area metered by ash exposure meter
Non-TTL auto (A)
DFlash compensation for optional ash units
In i-TTL and auto aperture (qA) ash control modes, the ash compensation
selected with the optional ash unit or the camera [Flash control] item is
added to the ash compensation selected with the [Flash compensation]
item in the photo shooting menu.
AStudio strobe lighting
To adjust the color and brightness of the view through the lens so that shots
are easier to frame, select [O] for Custom Setting d6 [Apply settings to live
view].
Other compatible accessories
555
Other compatible accessories
A variety of accessories are available for your Nikon camera.
DCompatible accessories
･Availability may vary with country or region.
･See our website or brochures for the latest information.
Power sources●
･EN-EL25 Rechargeable Li-ion Battery: Can be used with Nikon Z 30
digital cameras.
･MH-32 Battery Charger: Can be used to recharge EN-EL25 batteries.
･EH-7P Charging AC Adapter: The EH-7P can be used to charge batteries
inserted in the camera.
- The battery will not charge while the camera is on.
- The charging AC adapter can be used to power the camera; to do so,
select [Enable] for [USB power delivery] in the setup menu. For more
information, see “USB power delivery” (0410).
Filters●
･Neutral Color (NC) lters can be used to protect the lens.
･Filters may cause ghosting when the subject is framed against a bright
light, or when a bright light source is in the frame. Filters can be removed if
ghosting occurs.
･Matrix metering may not produce the desired results with lters with
exposure factors (lter factors) over 1× (Y44, Y48, Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-
PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8, ND8S, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). We suggest
that [Center-weighted metering] be selected instead. See the lter
documentation for details.
･Filters intended for special-eects photography may interfere with
autofocus or the in-focus indicator (I).
USB cables●
･UC-E24 USB Cable: A USB cable with a type C connector for connection to
the camera and a type A connector for connection to the USB device.
Other compatible accessories
556
･UC-E25 USB Cable: A USB cable with two type C connectors.
Hot shoe adapters●
AS-15 Sync Terminal Adapter: Mount the AS-15 on the camera hot shoe to
connect studio strobe lights or other ash equipment via a sync terminal.
Accessory shoe covers●
BS-1 Accessory Shoe Cover: A cover protecting the accessory shoe when no
ash unit is attached.
Body caps●
BF-N1 Body Cap: The body cap prevents dust entering the camera when no
lens is in place.
Mount adapters●
FTZ II/FTZ Mount Adapter: An adapter that allows NIKKOR F mount lenses
to be used with digital cameras that support interchangeable Z mount
lenses.
･For information on attaching, removing, maintaining, and using mount
adapters, refer to the documentation supplied with the device.
* If a warning message prompting you to update is displayed on the
camera when a mount adapter is mounted on the camera, update to the
latest version. For information on rmware updates, see the Nikon
website for your area.
Microphones●
･ME-1 Stereo Microphone: Connect the ME-1 to the camera microphone
jack to record stereo sound. Using an external microphone also reduces the
chance of picking up equipment noise, such as the sounds produced
during video recording when focus is achieved using autofocus.
･ME-W1 Wireless Microphone: A wireless Bluetooth microphone. Use the
ME-W1 for o-camera recording.
Remote controls●
ML-L7 Remote Control: Pair it with the camera and shoot videos and photos
remotely.
Other compatible accessories
557
DAttaching and removing the accessory shoe cover
The optional BS-1 Accessory Shoe Cover slides into the shoe as shown. To
remove the cover, hold the camera rmly, press the cover down with a thumb
and slide it in the direction shown.
Charging the camera with the charging AC
adapter
When a battery is inserted in the camera, the optional EH-7P Charging
AC Adapter can be used to charge the battery. Note that in countries or
regions where required, charging AC adapters are supplied with a plug
adapter attached; the shape of the plug adapter varies with the country
of sale.
Other compatible accessories
558
･After conrming that the camera is o, connect the charging AC
adapter (q) and plug the adapter in. The battery charges while the
camera is o. Keep the plug straight during insertion and removal.
- The camera charge lamp (w) lights amber while charging is in
progress. The lamp turns o when charging is complete.
- An exhausted battery will fully charge in about 1 hour and 40
minutes.
- Unplug the charging AC adapter and remove the cable from the
camera when charging is complete.
DThe charging AC adapter
If the battery cannot be charged using the charging AC adapter, for example
because the battery is not compatible or the temperature of the camera is
elevated, the charge lamp will ash rapidly for about 30 seconds and then
turn o. If the charge lamp is o and you did not observe the battery
charging, turn the camera on and check the battery level.
Other compatible accessories
559
APowering the camera with the charging AC adapter
･If [Enable] is selected for [USB power delivery] in the setup menu, the
charging AC adapter will power the camera when the camera is turned
on. For more information, see ““Power delivery” versus “charging”” (0411).
･The battery will not charge while the camera is powered by an outside
source.
ML-L7 Remote Control
You can operate the camera from the remote control by pairing*
(0563) the optional ML-L7 Remote Control with the camera. With this
camera, you can perform the operation in “Parts and functions of the
remote control (for Z 30)” (0560).
* Connecting the camera and remote control via Bluetooth is called
“pairing” here.
･Only one remote control can be paired per camera. When pairing
another remote control, only the last paired remote control is
enabled.
･Also see the documentation supplied with the ML-L7 Remote
Control.
DNotes when using the remote control
The remote control cannot be used in the following cases.
･When [Airplane mode] in the camera setup menu is set to [Enable]
･While the camera is connected to and exchanging data with a computer
or smartphone via USB
Other compatible accessories
560
Parts and functions of the remote control (for Z 30)
❚❚
Part Function
1－ button Same operation as the W (Q) button on the camera.
2＋ button Same operation as the X button on the camera.
3
Video-
record
button
Press to start recording, and press again to end recording.
4Power
button
When pressed, the remote control turns on and starts
searching for a paired camera. If you press and hold it for 3
seconds or longer, the remote control will start searching
for unpaired cameras. Pressing the power button while the
remote control is on will turn it o.
5 Status lamp
The remote control status and shooting operation status
are indicated by the color and behavior of the lamp
(0563).
Other compatible accessories
561
Part Function
6
Shutter-
release
button
Corresponds to the shutter-release button on the
camera.
･When using autofocus, the shutter is released after
focusing with autofocus.
･When shooting with autofocus, press the shutter-release
button on the camera halfway beforehand to focus.
･If you do not want to change the focus position when
you press the shutter-release button on the remote
control, focus with the camera beforehand, and then set
the focus mode to manual focus.
･There is no halfway press or press and hold function. You
cannot use the continuous shooting function, which
requires press and hold.
･Bulb photography is not available. If you set the camera
to bulb photography, operation works the same way as
time photography.
7Multi
selector Same operation as the multi selector on the camera.
Other compatible accessories
562
Part Function
8J (select) button Same operation as the J button on the camera.
9
Fn1 (function
1)/Fn2 (function
2) button
Use functions registered beforehand (0409).
･By default, pressing the Fn1 button on the remote
control is the same operation as the K button on
the camera, while the Fn2 button is the same
operation as the G button.
Other compatible accessories
563
AStandby timer when using the remote control
When the standby timer of the camera expires and the monitor is o, turn on
the remote control and then press and hold the shutter-release button or
video-record button on the remote control to return to the original state.
ARemote control status lamp (for Z 30)
Color Status Description
Green Flashing about every second Detecting paired camera
Green Flashing quickly (about every 0.5
seconds) Pairing
Green Flashing about every 3 seconds Connected to the camera
Orange Flashes once Start shooting photo
Orange Flashes twice End shooting photo
Red Flashes once Start recording video
Red Flashes twice End recording video
Connecting for the rst time: Pairing
❚❚
When using the remote control for the rst time, you must pair it with
the camera.
Other compatible accessories
564
1Select [Wireless remote (ML-L7) options] > [Save wireless
remote controller] in the camera setup menu and press J.
･The camera will standby for pairing.
･If the camera is connected to a smartphone or computer,
connection to those devices will be terminated.
2Press and hold the power button on the remote control (3
seconds or longer).
･The camera and remote control will start pairing. In the meantime,
the remote control status lamp ashes at about 0.5 second
intervals.
･When pairing is complete, the camera and remote control will be
connected. L and Z are displayed in the shooting display.
･If a message indicating that pairing failed is displayed, start over
from Step 1.
Other compatible accessories
565
To connect with a paired remote control
❚❚
1Select [Wireless remote (ML-L7) options] > [Wireless remote
connection] > [Enable] in the camera setup menu and press J.
2Press the power button on the remote control.
･The camera and remote control are automatically connected.
Software
566
Software
The following Nikon software can be used with the camera:
Computer software●
Nikon computer software is available from the Nikon Download Center.
Check the version and system requirements and be sure to download the
latest version.
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
･NX Tether: Use for tethered photography when the camera is connected to
a computer. Exposure, white balance, and other camera settings can be
adjusted remotely using controls in the computer display.
･NX Studio*: View and edit photos and videos shot with Nikon digital
cameras. Use NX Studio software to ne-tune photos shot in Nikon’s unique
NEF/NRW (RAW) formats or convert them to JPEG or TIFF (RAW processing).
NX Studio can be used not only with RAW pictures but also with JPEG and
TIFF photos shot with Nikon digital cameras for such tasks as editing tone
curves and enhancing brightness and contrast.
* Existing users should be sure to download the latest version, as earlier
versions may be unable to download pictures from the camera.
･Wireless Transmitter Utility: The Wireless Transmitter Utility is required if
the camera is to be connected to a network. Pair the camera with the
computer and download pictures via Wi-Fi.
･Webcam Utility: A module that allows you to connect the camera to a
computer with a USB cable and use the camera as a webcam. When you
select an external camera in web conferencing software, “Webcam Utility”
is displayed. Select it to use it as a webcam. Check the Webcam Utility page
on the Nikon Download Center for compatible cameras, usage, operating
environment, and precautions during use.
Smartphone (tablet) apps●
Smartphone (tablet) apps are available from the Apple App Store® and
Google Play™. For the latest information on our apps, visit the Nikon
website.
Software
567
･SnapBridge: Download photos and videos from the camera to your smart
device via a wireless connection.
･NX MobileAir (oers in-app purchases)*: Import pictures from a camera
connected to your smart device via USB and upload them wirelessly to an
FTP server.
* Supported features and operating systems vary by country and region.
Caring for the camera
568
Caring for the camera
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the
battery. Before removing the battery, conrm that the camera is o. Do
not store the camera in locations that:
･are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%
･are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic elds,
such as televisions or radios
･are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below −10 °C (14
°F)
Cleaning
The procedure varies with the part that requires cleaning. The
procedures are detailed below.
･Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
Camera body
❚❚
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry
cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe o sand or
salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled water and dry the camera
thoroughly.
Important:
The following are not covered under warranty:
･
damage caused by the entry of dust, sand, or other foreign matter
into the camera, and
･
damage caused by using an aerosol blower too close to the camera.
Lens
❚❚
This glass element is easily damaged: remove dust and lint with a
blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent the
Caring for the camera
569
discharge of liquid that could damage glass elements. To remove
ngerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a
soft cloth and clean with care.
Monitor
❚❚
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing ngerprints and
other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather.
Do not apply pressure, as this could result in damage or malfunction.
Manual cleaning
Dirt or dust entering the camera when lenses are exchanged or the body
cap is removed may adhere to the surface of the image sensor and
aect your photographs. The sensor can be cleaned manually as
described below. Note, however, that the sensor is extremely delicate
and easily damaged; we recommend that manual cleaning be
performed only by a Nikon-authorized service representative.
1Turn the camera o and remove the lens.
2Holding the camera so that light can enter the camera, examine
the image sensor for dust or lint.
If no foreign objects are present, proceed to Step 4.
Caring for the camera
570
3Remove any dust and lint from the sensor with a blower.
･Do not use a blower-brush. The bristles could damage the sensor.
･Dirt that cannot be removed with a blower can only be removed
by Nikon-authorized service personnel. Under no circumstances
should you touch or wipe the sensor.
4Replace the lens or supplied body cap.
Caring for the camera
571
DForeign matter on the image sensor
Foreign matter entering the camera when lenses or body caps are removed
or exchanged (or in rare circumstances lubricant or ne particles from the
camera itself) may adhere to the image sensor, where it may appear in
photographs taken under certain conditions. To prevent entry of foreign
matter when attaching the body cap or exchanging lenses, avoid dusty
environments and be sure to remove all dust and other foreign matter that
may be adhering to the camera mount, lens mount, or body cap. To protect
the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the supplied body
cap. For foreign matter adhering to the image sensor, clean the image sensor
as described in “Manual cleaning” (0569), or have the sensor cleaned by
authorized Nikon service personnel. Photographs aected by the presence of
foreign matter on the sensor can be retouched using the clean image options
available in some imaging applications.
DServicing the camera and accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing; Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected once every one to two years, and
that it be serviced once every three to ve years (note that fees apply to
these services).
･Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the
camera is used professionally.
･Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional
ash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced.
Caring for the camera and battery: Cautions
572
Caring for the camera and battery:
Cautions
Camera care
Do not drop●
Do not drop the camera or lens or subject them to blows. The product may
malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration.
Keep dry●
Keep the camera dry. Rusting of the internal mechanism caused by water
inside the camera can not only be expensive to repair but can in fact cause
irreparable damage.
Avoid sudden changes in temperature●
If you bring the camera from a cold place to a warm place, or from a warm
place to a cold place, water droplets may form inside and outside the camera
and cause damage. When you bring the camera to a place with a
temperature dierence, place the camera in a carrying case or plastic bag
and seal it beforehand. When the camera has adapted to the ambient
temperature, take it out from the bag and use it.
Keep away from strong magnetic elds●
Static charges or the magnetic elds produced by equipment such as radio
transmitters could interfere with the monitor, corrupt data stored on the
memory card, or aect the product’s internal circuitry.
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun●
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light source. Intense
light may damage the image sensor or cause fading or “burn in”. Photographs
taken with the camera may exhibit a white blur eect.
Lasers and other bright light sources●
Do not direct lasers or other extremely bright light sources toward the lens,
as this could damage the camera’s image sensor.
Caring for the camera and battery: Cautions
573
Cleaning●
When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove dust and lint,
then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or
seaside, wipe o any sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in fresh
water and then dry the camera thoroughly.
Cleaning the lens●
This glass element is easily damaged: remove dust and lint with a blower. If
using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of
liquid that could damage glass elements. To remove ngerprints and other
stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and
wipe the lens carefully.
Do not touch the image sensor●
Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the image sensor, poke
it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower.
These actions could scratch or otherwise damage the sensor.
Cleaning the image sensor●
For information on cleaning the image sensor, see “Manual cleaning” (0569).
The lens contacts●
Keep the lens contacts clean. Avoid touching them with your ngers.
Store in a well-ventilated area●
To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. Do
not store the camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls, next to
equipment that produces strong electromagnetic, or where it will be
exposed to extremely high temperatures, for example near a heater or in an
Caring for the camera and battery: Cautions
574
enclosed vehicle on a hot day. Failure to observe these precautions could
result in product malfunction.
Long-term storage●
To prevent damage caused by, for example, leaking battery uid, remove the
battery if the product will not be used for an extended period. Store the
camera in a plastic bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the
leather camera case in a plastic bag, as this may cause the material to
deteriorate. Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Note that desiccant
gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be replaced at
regular intervals. To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage
at least once a month, insert the battery, and release the shutter a few times.
Turn the product o before removing the battery●
Removing the battery while the camera is on could damage the product.
Particular care should be taken not to remove or disconnect the power
source while images are being recorded or deleted.
Notes on the monitor●
･The monitor is constructed with extremely high precision; at least 99.99%
of pixels are eective, with no more than 0.01% being missing or defective.
Hence while the monitor may contain pixels that are always lit (white, red,
blue, or green) or always o (black), this is not a malfunction. Images
recorded with the device are unaected. Your understanding is requested.
･Images in the monitor may be dicult to see in a bright light.
･Do not apply pressure to the monitor. The monitor could malfunction or
suer damage. Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower.
Stains can be removed by wiping the monitor lightly with a soft cloth or
chamois leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid
injury from broken glass. Be careful that liquid crystal from the monitor
does not touch the skin or enter the eyes or mouth.
･The display may rapidly icker on and o during burst photography.
Watching the ickering display could cause you to feel unwell. Discontinue
use until your condition improves.
Caring for the camera and battery: Cautions
575
Bright lights and back-lit subjects●
Noise in the form of lines may in rare cases appear in pictures that include
bright lights or back-lit subjects.
Battery care
Precautions for use●
･If improperly handled, batteries may rupture or leak, causing the product to
corrode. Observe the following precautions when handling batteries:
- Turn the product o before replacing the battery.
- Batteries may be hot after extended use.
- Keep the battery terminals clean.
- Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
- Do not short or disassemble batteries or expose them to ame or
excessive heat.
- When the battery is not inserted in the camera, insulate the terminals. If
there is a terminal cover, attach the terminal cover to the battery. If there
is no terminal cover, keep the battery separate in a plastic bag or other
non-conductive container.
･If the battery is hot, for example immediately after use, wait for it to cool
before charging. Attempting to charge the battery while its internal
temperature is elevated will impair battery performance, and the battery
may not charge or charge only partially.
･If the battery will not be used for some time, remove it from the camera for
storage. The battery should be stored in a cool, dry location with an
ambient temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F). Avoid hot or
extremely cold locations.
･Batteries should be charged within six months of use. During long periods
of disuse, charge the battery once every six months before returning it to a
cool location for storage.
･Remove the battery from the camera when not in use. The camera and
charger draw minute amounts of charge even when o and could draw the
battery down to the point that it will no longer function.
Caring for the camera and battery: Cautions
576
･Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0 °C (32 °F) or above
40 °C (104 °F). Failure to observe this precaution could damage the battery
or impair its performance. Charge the battery indoors at ambient
temperatures of 5 °C–35 °C (41 °F–95 °F). The battery will not charge if its
temperature is below 0 °C (32 °F) or above 60 °C (140 °F).
･Capacity may be reduced and charging times increase at battery
temperatures from 0 °C (32 °F) to 15 °C (59 °F) and from 45 °C (113 °F) to 60
°C (140 °F).
･Batteries in general exhibit a drop in charging capacity at low ambient
temperatures.
･Batteries in general exhibit a drop in available capacity at low ambient
temperatures. The change in capacity with temperature is reected in the
camera battery-level display. As a result, the battery display may show a
drop in capacity as the temperature drops, even if the battery is fully
charged.
･Batteries may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing
batteries from the camera.
Charge batteries before use●
Charge the battery before use. The supplied battery is not fully charged at
shipment.
Ready spare batteries●
Before taking photographs, ready a spare battery and keep it fully charged.
Depending on your location, it may be dicult to purchase replacement
batteries on short notice.
Have fully-charged spare batteries ready on cold days●
Partially-charged batteries may not function on cold days. In cold weather,
charge one battery before use and keep another in a warm place, ready to be
exchanged as necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of
its charge.
Caring for the camera and battery: Cautions
577
Battery level●
･Turning the camera on or o repeatedly when the battery is fully
discharged will shorten battery life. Batteries that have been fully
discharged must be charged before use.
･A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when
used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement. Purchase
a new rechargeable battery.
Do not attempt to charge fully-charged batteries●
Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery
performance.
Recycling used batteries●
Recycle rechargeable batteries in accord with local regulations, being sure to
rst insulate the terminals with tape.
Specications
578
Specications
Nikon Z 30 digital camera
Type
Type Digital camera with support for interchangeable lenses
Lens mount Nikon Z mount
Lens
Compatible
lenses
･Z mount NIKKOR lenses
･F mount NIKKOR lenses (mount adapter required;
restrictions may apply)
Eective pixels
Eective
pixels 20.9 million
Image sensor
Type 23.5 × 15.7 mm CMOS sensor (Nikon DX format)
Total pixels 21.51 million
Dust-
reduction
system
Image Dust O reference data (NX Studio software
required)
Specications
579
Storage
Image size
(pixels)
･[DX (24×16)] selected for image area:
- 5568 × 3712 (Large: 20.7 M)
- 4176 × 2784 (Medium: 11.6 M)
- 2784 × 1856 (Small: 5.2 M)
･[1:1 (16×16)] selected for image area:
- 3712 × 3712 (Large: 13.8 M)
- 2784 × 2784 (Medium: 7.8 M)
- 1856 × 1856 (Small: 3.4 M)
･[16:9 (24×14)] selected for image area:
- 5568 × 3128 (Large: 17.4 M)
- 4176 × 2344 (Medium: 9.8 M)
- 2784 × 1560 (Small: 4.3 M)
･Photographs taken while recording videos at a
frame size of 3840 × 2160: 3840 × 2160
･Photographs taken while recording videos at other
frame sizes: 1920 × 1080
File format
(image
quality)
･NEF (RAW): 12 or 14 bit
･JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with ne (approx. 1:4),
normal (approx. 1:8), or basic (approx. 1:16)
compression
･NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both
NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats
Picture
Control
System
Auto, Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait,
Landscape, Flat, Creative Picture Controls (Dream,
Morning, Pop, Sunday, Somber, Dramatic, Silence,
Bleached, Melancholic, Pure, Denim, Toy, Sepia, Blue, Red,
Pink, Charcoal, Graphite, Binary, Carbon); selected Picture
Control can be modied; storage for custom Picture
Controls
Media SD (Secure Digital) and UHS-I compliant SDHC and SDXC
memory cards
Specications
580
Storage
File system DCF 2.0, Exif 2.31
Monitor
Monitor
7.5-cm/3.0-in., approx. 1040k-dot vari-angle TFT touch-
sensitive LCD with 170° viewing angle, approximately
100% frame coverage, and color balance and 11-level
manual brightness controls
Shutter
Type
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane
mechanical shutter; electronic front-curtain shutter;
electronic shutter
Speed 1/4000 – 30 s (step sizes of 1/3 EV), bulb, time
Flash sync
speed
Synchronizes with shutter at X=1/200 s or slower;
supported with auto FP high-speed sync
Release
Release mode Single frame, Continuous L, Continuous H, Continuous H
(extended), Self-timer
Approximate
frame advance
rate
･Continuous L: Approx. 1 – 4 fps
･Continuous H: Approx. 5 fps
･Continuous H (extended): Approx. 11 fps
* Maximum frame advance rate as measured by in-
house tests.
Self-timer 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures at intervals of 0.5, 1, 2, or 3
s
Specications
581
Exposure
Metering
system TTL metering using camera image sensor
Metering
mode
･Matrix metering
･Center-weighted metering: Weight of 75% given to 8
mm circle in center of frame; weighting can instead be
based on average of entire frame
･Spot metering: Meters 3.5 mm circle (about 2.5% of
frame) centered on selected focus point
･Highlight-weighted metering
Range –4 – +17 EV
* Figures are for ISO 100 and f/2.0 lens at 20 °C/68 °F
Mode
･b: Auto, P: programmed auto with exible program, S:
shutter-priority auto, A: aperture-priority auto, M:
manual
･U1, U2 and U3: user settings modes
Exposure
compensation Range: –5 – +5 EV, Increment: 1/3 step
Exposure lock Luminosity locked at detected value
ISO sensitivity
(Recommende
d Exposure
Index)
ISO 100–51200 (step sizes of 1/3 EV); can also be set to
approx. 1 EV above ISO 51200 (ISO 102400 equivalent) or
to approx. 2 EV above ISO 51200 (ISO 204800 equivalent);
auto ISO sensitivity control available
Active D-
Lighting Auto, Extra high, High, Normal, Low, and O
Multiple
exposure Add, average, lighten, darken
Other options HDR (high dynamic range), photo mode icker reduction
Specications
582
Autofocus
Type Hybrid phase-detection/contrast AF
Detection
range
−4.5 – +19 EV
* Without low-light AF: −3 – +19 EV
* Measured in photo mode at ISO 100 and a temperature
of 20 °C/68 °F using single-servo AF (AF-S) and a lens with
a maximum aperture of f/1.8
Lens servo
･Autofocus: Single-servo AF (AF-S), continuous-servo AF
(AF-C), AF mode auto-switch (AF-A, photo mode only),
full-time AF (AF-F, video mode only), predictive focus
tracking
･Manual focus (M): Electronic rangender can be used
Focus points
209 focus points
* Number of focus points available in photo mode with
single-point AF selected for AF-area mode and DX
selected for image area
AF-area mode
Pinpoint AF (photo mode only), single-point AF, dynamic-
area AF (photo mode only), wide-area AF (S), wide-area AF
(L), wide-area AF (L-people), wide-area AF (L-animals),
auto-area AF, auto-area AF (people), auto-area AF
(animals)
Focus lock Press the A (g) button or press shutter-release button
halfway (single-servo AF/AF-S)
Flash
Flash control
TTL: i-TTL ash control; i-TTL balanced ll-ash is used
with matrix, center-weighted, and highlight-weighted
metering, standard i-TTL ll-ash with spot metering
Flash mode Front-curtain sync, slow sync, rear-curtain sync, red-eye
reduction, red-eye reduction with slow sync, o
Specications
583
Flash
Flash
compensation
–3 – +1 EV (step size of 1/3 EV) available in modes P, S, A,
and M
Flash-ready
indicator
Lights when optional ash unit is fully charged; ashes as
underexposure warning after ash is red at full output
Accessory
shoe
ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and safety
lock
Nikon Creative
Lighting
System (CLS)
i-TTL ash control, optical Advanced Wireless Lighting, FV
lock, Color Information Communication, auto FP high-
speed sync
White balance
White balance
Auto (3 types), natural light auto, direct sunlight, cloudy,
shade, incandescent, uorescent (3 types), ash, choose
color temperature (2500 K–10,000 K), preset manual (up to
6 values can be stored), all with ne-tuning except choose
color temperature
Bracketing
Bracketing Exposure and/or ash, white balance, and ADL
Video
Metering
system TTL metering using camera image sensor
Metering
mode Matrix, center-weighted, or highlight-weighted
Specications
584
Video
Frame size
(pixels) and
frame rate
･3840 × 2160 (4K UHD): 30p (progressive)/25p/24p
･1920 × 1080: 120p/100p/60p/50p/30p/25p/24p
･1920 × 1080 slow-motion: 30p (×4)/25p (×4)/24p (×5)
* Actual frame rates for 120p, 100p, 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and
24p are 119.88, 100, 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and 23.976 fps
respectively
* Quality selection (normal/m) available at all sizes except
3840 × 2160, 1920 × 1080 120p/100p, and 1920 × 1080
slow-motion, when quality is xed at m
File format MOV, MP4
Video
compression H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding
Audio
recording
format
Linear PCM (for videos recorded in MOV format) or AAC
(for videos recorded in MP4 format)
Audio
recording
device
Built-in stereo or external microphone with attenuator
option; sensitivity adjustable
Exposure
compensation Range: –3 – +3 EV, Increment: 1/3 step
ISO sensitivity
(Recommende
d Exposure
Index)
･M: Manual selection (ISO 100–25600; step size of 1/3
EV); auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO 100–25600)
available with selectable upper limit
･P, S, A: Auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO 100–25600) with
selectable upper limit
･b: Auto ISO sensitivity control (ISO 100–25600)
Active D-
Lighting
Same as photo settings, Extra high, High, Normal, Low, and
O
Specications
585
Video
Other options Time-lapse video recording, electronic vibration reduction,
time codes, with REC lamp
Playback
Playback
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images or calendar)
playback with playback zoom, playback zoom cropping,
video playback, photo and/or video slide shows,
histogram display, highlights, photo information, location
data display, auto image rotation, and picture rating
Interface
USB Type C USB connector (SuperSpeed USB); connection to
built-in USB port is recommended
HDMI output Type D HDMI connector
Audio input Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter; plug-in power
supported)
Specications
586
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Wi-Fi
･Standards:
- IEEE 802.11b/g/n (Africa, Asia, Bolivia, Europe, and
Oceania)
- IEEE 802.11b/g/n/a/ac (U.S.A., Canada, Mexico)
- IEEE 802.11b/g/n/a (other countries in the Americas)
･Operating frequency:
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11; Africa, Asia, Bolivia,
Europe, and Oceania)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11), 5180–5825 MHz (5180–
5580 MHz, 5660–5700 MHz, and 5745–5825 MHz)
(U.S.A., Canada, Mexico)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11), 5180–5805 MHz (5180–
5320 MHz and 5745–5805 MHz) (other countries in the
Americas)
･Maximum output power (EIRP):
- 2.4 GHz band: 4.5 dBm
- 5 GHz band: 6.8 dBm (countries in the Americas)
･Authentication: Open system, WPA2-PSK
Bluetooth
･Communication protocols: Bluetooth Specication
Version 4.2
･Operating frequency:
- Bluetooth: 2402–2480 MHz
- Bluetooth Low Energy: 2402–2480 MHz
･Maximum output power (EIRP):
- Bluetooth: –1.0 dBm
- Bluetooth Low Energy: –2.5 dBm
Power source
Battery One EN-EL25 rechargeable Li-ion battery
Specications
587
Power source
Charging AC
adapter EH-7P charging AC adapter (available separately)
Tripod socket
Tripod socket 0.635 cm (1/4 in., ISO 1222)
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions Approx. 128 × 73.5 × 59.5 mm/5.1 × 2.9 × 2.4 in. (width ×
height × depth)
Weight
Approx. 405 g (14.3 oz.) with battery and memory card but
without body cap; approx. 350 g/12.4 oz. (camera body
only)
Operating environment
Temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Humidity 85% or less (no condensation)
･Unless otherwise stated, all measurements are performed in conformity
with Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standards or
guidelines.
･All gures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery.
･The sample images displayed on the camera and the images and
illustrations in this document are for expository purposes only.
･Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specications of
the hardware and software described in this document at any time and
without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may
result from any mistakes that this document may contain.
Specications
588
EN-EL25 Rechargeable Li-ion Battery
❚❚
Type Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated capacity 7.6 V/1120 mAh
Operating temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Dimensions Approx. 34 × 50.5 × 18 mm/1.4 × 2.0 × 0.8 in.
Weight Approx. 53 g (1.9 oz)
Specications
589
DDisposing of data storage devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data
storage devices does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted
les can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using
commercially available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of
personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s
responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another
person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the
device and then completely rell it with images containing no private
information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Care should be taken to
avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices. Before
discarding the camera or transferring ownership to another person, you
should also use the [Reset all settings] item in the camera setup menu to
delete network settings and other personal information.
DSupported standards
･DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF) is a
standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure
compatibility among dierent makes of camera.
･Exif version 2.31: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File
Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.31, a standard introduced with
the goal of improving the interoperability of printers and digital cameras,
making it easier to produce high-quality prints. Information stored with
photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are
output on Exif-compliant printers. See the printer manual for details.
･HDMI: High-Denition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia
interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices. This standard
ensures that audiovisual data and control signals can be transmitted to
HDMI-compliant devices via a single cable connection.
Approved memory cards
590
Approved memory cards
･The camera can be used with SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards.
･UHS-I is supported.
･Cards rated UHS Speed Class 3 or better are recommended for video
recording and playback. Slower speeds may result in recording or
playback being interrupted.
･When choosing cards for use in card readers, be sure they are
compatible with the device.
･Contact the manufacturer for information on features, operation, and
limitations on use.
AThe write protect switch
･SD memory cards are equipped with a write-protect switch. Sliding the
switch to the “lock” position write-protects the card, protecting the data it
contains.
･A “–––” indicator and a [Card] warning appear in the shooting display
when a write-protected card is inserted.
･If you attempt to release the shutter while a write-protected card is
inserted, a warning will be displayed and no picture will be recorded.
Unlock the memory card before attempting to take or delete pictures.
Portable chargers (power banks)
591
Portable chargers (power banks)
Portable chargers can be used to power the camera or charge the
camera battery. The following table lists the portable chargers that have
been tested and approved for use, together with the approximate
number of shots that can be taken with, and the approximate number of
times the camera battery can be charged using, each device.
Manufacturer Model number Number of
shots1
Number of
charges2
Anker PowerCore III Elite 25600
87W 2750 8
1 Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standard. Measured at
23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with a NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR
lens under the following test conditions: one photograph taken at default
settings once every 30 s. The “number of shots” is the number of shots
that can be taken using a fully-charged portable charger to supply power
to a camera with a fully-charged battery (EN-EL25).
2 The number of times the camera battery (EN-EL25) can be fully charged
using a portable charger at full charge.
･See the documentation provided with the portable charger for
information on use.
･Use a USB cable with two Type-C connectors supplied with the
portable charger when employing the device to power the camera or
charge the camera battery.
･Up-to-date information on portable chargers is available on the
website of the manufacturers. Availability may vary with country or
region.
Memory card capacity
592
Memory card capacity
The following table shows buer capacity and the approximate number
of pictures that can be stored on a 32 GB1 card at dierent image
qualities and sizes when [DX (24×16)] is selected for [Choose image
area]. Actual capacity varies with shooting conditions and the type of
card.
Image qualityImage size File size
Number of
exposures
remaining
Buer
capacity2
RAW (12-bit) Large Approx. 21.4 MB 873 frames 44 frames
RAW (14-bit) Large Approx. 26.8 MB 764 frames 36 frames
JPEG ne
Large Approx. 10.4 MB 2100 frames 82 frames
Medium Approx. 7.2 MB 3400 frames 100 frames
Small Approx. 3.8 MB 6400 frames 100 frames
JPEG normal
Large Approx. 6.0 MB 4100 frames 100 frames
Medium Approx. 3.7 MB 6800 frames 100 frames
Small Approx. 2.1 MB 12,300 frames 100 frames
JPEG basic
Large Approx. 2.6 MB 8000 frames 100 frames
Medium Approx. 1.9 MB 12,800 frames 100 frames
Small Approx. 1.1 MB 22,100 frames 100 frames
1 Figures are for a SanDisk SD memory card (SDSDXVE-032G-JNJIP,
measured in December 2021).
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buer at
ISO 100. If [Auto distortion control] is set to [On], the number of
exposures may drop.
Available recording time
593
Available recording time
Depending on the [Frame size and rate/Video quality] (0172) setting,
the available recording time on a 32 GB memory card when [Video le
type] is [MOV] is as follows1. The available recording time is the total
time when multiple videos are recorded. However, the actual available
recording time varies with shooting conditions and the type of card. If
the battery is fully discharged or the temperature inside the camera
rises, recording may end before the maximum length is reached or
before the memory card is full.
[Frame size/frame rate] Available recording time
High quality Normal
[3840×2160; 30p]2Approx. 28 min. —
[3840×2160; 25p]2Approx. 28 min. —
[3840×2160; 24p]2Approx. 28 min. —
[1920×1080; 120p]2Approx. 28 min. —
[1920×1080; 100p]2Approx. 28 min. —
[1920×1080; 60p]2Approx. 72 min. Approx. 141 min.
[1920×1080; 50p]2Approx. 72 min. Approx. 141 min.
[1920×1080; 30p]2Approx. 141 min. Approx. 271 min.
[1920×1080; 25p]2Approx. 141 min. Approx. 271 min.
[1920×1080; 24p]2Approx. 141 min. Approx. 271 min.
[1920×1080; 30p ×4 (slow-motion)]3Approx. 29 min. —
[1920×1080; 25p ×4 (slow-motion)]3Approx. 29 min. —
[1920×1080; 24p ×5 (slow-motion)]3Approx. 29 min. —
Available recording time
594
1 Figures are for a SanDisk SD memory card (SDSDXVE-032G-JNJIP,
measured in December 2021).
2 Each shot can be up to 125 minutes in length.
3 Each shot can be up to 3 minutes in length.
Battery endurance
595
Battery endurance
The video footage or number of shots that can be recorded with a fully-
charged EN-EL25 rechargeable Li-ion battery is given below. Actual
endurance varies with such factors as the condition of the battery, the
interval between shots, and the options selected in the camera menus.
Photo mode (number of shots): Approx. 330 shots1
Video mode (length of footage): Approx. 75 minutes2
Actions such as the following can reduce battery endurance:
･Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway
･Repeated autofocus operations
･Taking RAW photographs
･Slow shutter speeds
･Using camera Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) and Bluetooth features
･Using the camera with optional accessories connected
･Repeatedly zooming in and out
･Taking pictures at low ambient temperatures
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL25
batteries:
･Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery
performance.
･Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their
charge if left unused.
1 Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standard. Measured at
23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with a NIKKOR Z DX 16–50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR
lens and a SanDisk SDSDXVE-032G-JNJIP memory card under the
following test conditions: one photograph taken at default settings once
every 30 s.
2 Actual battery endurance as measured under conditions specied by
CIPA. Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with a NIKKOR Z DX 16–
50mm f/3.5–6.3 VR lens and a SanDisk SDSDXVE-032G-JNJIP memory
card. Measurement performed at default settings.
Battery endurance
596
･Each shot can be up to 125 minutes in length.
･If the temperature inside the camera rises, recording may end before
the maximum length is reached or before the memory card is full.
Trademarks and licenses
597
Trademarks and licenses
･The SD, SDHC, and SDXC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
･Windows is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
･Apple®, App Store®, the Apple logos, iPhone®, iPad®, Mac, and macOS
are trademarks of Apple Inc. registered in the U.S. and/or other
countries.
･Android, Google Play and the Google Play logo are trademarks of
Google LLC. The Android robot is reproduced or modied from work
created and shared by Google and used according to terms
described in the Creative Commons 3.0 Attribution License.
･IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc., in
the United States and/or other countries and is used under license.
･HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
･The Bluetooth® word mark and logo are registered trademarks owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Nikon is under
license.
･Wi-Fi and the Wi-Fi logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of
the Wi-Fi Alliance.
･All other trade names mentioned in this document or the other
documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective holders.
･Use of the Made for Apple badge means that an accessory has been
designed to connect specically to the Apple products identied in
the badge, and has been certied by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of
this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with an Apple product may
aect wireless performance.
Trademarks and licenses
598
DFreeType License (FreeType2)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2012 The FreeType Project (https://
www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
DMIT License (HarfBuzz)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2018 The HarfBuzz Project (https://
www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz). All rights reserved.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR
DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION,
EVEN IF THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE. THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE
SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS ON AN “AS IS” BASIS, AND THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS NO OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE,
SUPPORT, UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS.
DUnicode® Character Database License (Unicode® Character
Database)
The software for this product uses the Unicode® Character Database License
open-source software. The terms of the software license are as follows:
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright © 1991-2022 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved.
Distributed under the Terms of Use in
https://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy
of the Unicode data les and any associated documentation (the “Data Files”)
or Unicode software and any associated documentation (the “Software”) to
deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or
sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that either
Trademarks and licenses
599
(i) this copyright and permission notice appear with all copies of the Data
Files or Software, or
(ii) this copyright and permission notice appear in associated
Documentation.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS
NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not
be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of
the copyright holder.
DAVC Patent Portfolio License
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE
FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”)
AND/OR
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM
A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.
SEE https://www.mpegla.com
Notices
600
Notices
Notices for customers in the U.S.A.●
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency
Interference Statement
Z 30
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses,
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment o and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
･Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
･Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
･Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dierent from that
to which the receiver is connected.
･Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for
help.
CAUTIONS
Modications
The FCC requires the user to be notied that any changes or
modications made to this device that are not expressly approved by
Notices
601
Nikon Corporation may void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Interface cables
Use the interface cables sold or provided by Nikon for your equipment.
Using other interface cables may exceed the limits of Class B Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York 11747-3064,
U.S.A.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
Notice for customers in Canada●
CAN ICES-003 (B) / NMB-003 (B)
Notices for customers in Europe●
CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT
TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
This symbol indicates that electrical and electronic equipment is to be
collected separately.
The following apply only to users in European countries:
･This product is designated for separate collection at an appropriate
collection point. Do not dispose of as household waste.
･Separate collection and recycling helps conserve natural resources
and prevent negative consequences for human health and the
environment that might result from incorrect disposal.
･For more information, contact the retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
Notices
602
This symbol on the battery indicates that the battery is to be collected
separately.
The following apply only to users in European countries:
･All batteries, whether marked with this symbol or not, are designated
for separate collection at an appropriate collection point. Do not
dispose of as household waste.
･For more information, contact the retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (wireless LAN)
603
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (wireless LAN)
This product is controlled by the United States Export Administration
Regulations (EAR). The permission of the United States government is
not required for export to countries other than the following, which as
of this writing are subject to embargo or special controls: Cuba, Iran,
North Korea, Sudan, and Syria (list subject to change).
The use of wireless devices may be prohibited in some countries or
regions. Contact a Nikon-authorized service representative before using
the wireless features of this product outside the country of purchase.
The Bluetooth transmitter in this device operates in the 2.4 GHz band.
Notice for customers in the U.S.A. and Canada●
This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules and Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
The FCC requires the user to be notied that any changes or
modications made to this device that are not expressly approved by
Nikon Corporation may void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Compliance with FCC requirement 15.407(c)
Data transmission is always initiated by software, which is the passed
down through the MAC, through the digital and analog baseband, and
nally to the RF chip. Several special packets are initiated by the MAC.
These are the only ways the digital baseband portion will turn on the RF
transmitter, which it then turns o at the end of the packet. Therefore,
the transmitter will be on only while one of the aforementioned packets
is being transmitted. In other words, this device automatically
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (wireless LAN)
604
discontinue transmission in case of either absence of information to
transmit or operational failure.
Frequency Tolerance: ±20 ppm
There are models that support only 2.4GHz or models that support
2.4GHz / 5GHz. The Guam sales model is only compatible with 2.4GHz.
FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If
this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment o and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
･Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
･Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
･Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dierent from that
to which the receiver is connected.
･Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Co-location
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with
any other antenna or transmitter.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York 11747-3064,
U.S.A.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
FCC/ISED RF Exposure Statement
The available scientic evidence does not show that any health
problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (wireless LAN)
605
no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely
safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency
energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high
levels of RF can produce health eects (by heating tissue), exposure of
low-level RF that does not produce heating eects causes no known
adverse health eects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not
found any biological eects. Some studies have suggested that some
biological eects might occur, but such ndings have not been
conrmed by additional research. This product has been tested and
found to comply with FCC/ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines and RSS-102 of the ISED radio frequency (RF)
Exposure rules. Please refer to the SAR test report that was uploaded to
FCC website.
Compliance with RSS-247 Issue 2 §6.4
Data transmission is always initiated by software, which is the passed
down through the MAC, through the digital and analog baseband, and
nally to the RF chip. Several special packets are initiated by the MAC.
These are the only ways the digital baseband portion will turn on the RF
transmitter, which it then turns o at the end of the packet. Therefore,
the transmitter will be on only while one of the aforementioned packets
is being transmitted. In other words, this device automatically
discontinue transmission in case of either absence of information to
transmit or operational failure.
Notice for customers in Canada●
For indoor use only (5150-5350MHz).
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (wireless LAN)
606
Notice for customers in Europe and in countries complying with
the Radio Equipment Directive
●
Hereby, Nikon Corporation declares that the radio equipment type Z 30
is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the
following internet address:
https://imaging.nikon.com/support/pdf/DoC_N2121.pdf
Wi-Fi
･Operating frequency:
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11; Africa, Asia, Bolivia, Europe, and
Oceania)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11), 5180–5825 MHz (5180–5580 MHz,
5660–5700 MHz, and 5745–5825 MHz) (U.S.A., Canada, Mexico)
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11), 5180–5805 MHz (5180–5320 MHz
and 5745–5805 MHz) (other countries in the Americas)
･Maximum output power (EIRP):
- 2.4 GHz band: 4.5 dBm
- 5 GHz band: 6.8 dBm (countries in the Americas)
Bluetooth
･Operating frequency:
- Bluetooth: 2402–2480 MHz
- Bluetooth Low Energy: 2402–2480 MHz
･Maximum output power (EIRP):
- Bluetooth: –1.0 dBm
- Bluetooth Low Energy: –2.5 dBm
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (wireless LAN)
607
Notice for customers in the UK●
Hereby, Nikon Corporation declares that the radio equipment type Z 30
is in compliance with Radio Equipment Regulations 2017.
The full text of the UKCA declaration of conformity is available at the
following internet address:
https://imaging.nikon.com/support/pdf/UKCA_DoC_N2121.pdf
Wi-Fi
･Operating frequency:
- 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11)
･Maximum output power (EIRP):
- 2.4 GHz band: 4.5 dBm
Bluetooth
･Operating frequency:
- Bluetooth: 2402–2480 MHz
- Bluetooth Low Energy: 2402–2480 MHz
･Maximum output power (EIRP):
- Bluetooth: –1.0 dBm
- Bluetooth Low Energy: –2.5 dBm
Notice for customers in Singapore●
Z 30
This device complies with radio-frequency regulations. The content of
certication labels not axed to the device is given below.
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (wireless LAN)
608
Notice for customers in Nigeria●
Notice for customers in Thailand●
Notice for customers in Oman●
Security●
Although one of the benets of this product is that it allows others to
freely connect for the wireless exchange of data anywhere within its
range, the following may occur if security is not enabled:
･Data theft: Malicious third-parties may intercept wireless
transmissions to steal user IDs, passwords, and other personal
information.
･Unauthorized access: Unauthorized users may gain access to the
network and alter data or perform other malicious actions. Note that
due to the design of wireless networks, specialized attacks may allow
unauthorized access even when security is enabled.
･Unsecured networks: Connecting to open networks may result in
unauthorized access. Use secure networks only.
AConformity marking
Some of the information related to standards with which the camera
complies can be viewed using the [Conformity marking] option in the setup
menu.
609
Index
Symbols
b (Auto) .......................................................... 75, 80
P (Programmed auto) ...................................121
S (Shutter-priority auto) .............................. 121
A (Aperture-priority auto) ..........................123
M (Manual) .......................................................... 124
U1, U2, U3 (User setting mode) ..............128
U (Single frame) ....................................136, 139
V (Continuous L) .........................................137
W (Continuous H) ........................................137
X (Continuous H (extended)) ............137
E (Self-timer) .....................................................137
c (Continuous) ...............................................140
L (Silent photography) .............................. 114
x (Electronic front-curtain shutter) .....350
P (Mechanical shutter) ...............................350
3 (Pinpoint AF) ..................................................93
d (Single-point AF) ........................................93
e (Dynamic-area AF) .................................... 94
f (Wide-area AF (S)) .....................................95
g (Wide-area AF (L)) .....................................95
1 (Wide-area AF (L-people)) .....................95
2 (Wide-area AF (L-animals)) ....................95
h (Auto-area AF) ..............................................96
5 (Auto-area AF (people)) ..........................96
6 (Auto-area AF (animals)) ........................ 96
L (Matrix metering) ......................................164
M (Center-weighted metering) ............. 164
N (Spot metering) ..........................................164
t (Highlight-weighted metering) ..... 164
G button ........................................................... 52
i button ........................................................56, 145
K button ................................................................86
O button ..................................................................89
S button ................................................. 37, 131
E (Exposure compensation) button
........................................................................38, 134
c (Release mode) button ........................ 136
E (Self-timer) button ....................................136
A (g) button ............................... 51, 118, 142
W button .............................................................. 50
X button ..................................................................50
d Help ......................................................................56
i menu ..........................................................56, 145
A
Access-point mode .............................452, 454
Active D-Lighting ............................................165
ADL bracketing .................................................275
AE & ash bracketing ....................................267
AE bracketing .................................................... 267
AE lock ....................................................................142
AF activation ...................................................... 342
AF ne-tuning options ................................ 392
AF speed ...............................................................383
AF tracking sensitivity .................................. 384
AF-A (AF mode auto-switch) ......................90
AF-area mode .......................................................92
AF-C (Continuous AF) ......................................91
AF-C priority selection ................................. 338
610
AF-F (Full-time AF) .............................................91
AF-S (Single AF) ...................................................91
AF-S priority selection ..................................338
Airplane mode ..................................................402
All pictures ...........................................................209
Animal-detection AF ....................................... 99
Aperture .....................................................123, 124
Aperture-priority auto ..................................123
Apply settings to live view ........................ 352
Attaching a lens ..................................................68
Attenuator ...........................................................332
Auto (Set Picture Control) ..........................148
Auto (White balance) ................................... 110
Auto bracketing ...............................................266
Auto bracketing (mode M) ....................... 356
Auto c ISO sensitivity control ..................356
Auto distortion control .....................261, 329
Auto ISO sensitivity control .......................132
Auto upload ....................................................... 470
Auto-area AF .........................................................96
Auto-area AF (animals) ...................................96
Auto-area AF (people) .....................................96
Available recording time ............................ 593
B
Battery ...............................................................62, 65
Beep options ......................................................400
Bluetooth ............................................................. 475
Bracketing order .............................................. 357
Brightness (Set Picture Control) .............152
Built-in microphone .........................................81
Bulb ..........................................................................126
C
Calendar playback ..........................................181
Camera-mounted ash units ...................493
Center-weighted area .................................. 346
Center-weighted metering .......................164
Charging AC adapter ....................................557
Choose color temperature (White
balance) ........................................................... 111
Choose image area ........................................240
Choose start/end point ...............................201
CL mode shooting speed .......................... 349
Clarity (Set Picture Control) .......................151
Cloudy (White balance) .............................. 111
Color space ......................................................... 258
Color temperature .................... 113, 156, 246
Command dial .....................................................37
Conformity marking ......................................409
Connect to computer .................................. 405
Connect to smart device ...... 403, 474, 476
Continuous ......................................................... 140
Continuous AF .....................................................91
Continuous H .................................................... 137
Continuous H (extended) .......................... 137
Continuous L ......................................................137
Contrast (Set Picture Control) ..................152
Control ring .........................................................103
Copyright information .................................399
Creative Picture Control ..............................149
Custom controls .............................................. 375
Custom controls (playback) ......................369
Custom controls (shooting) ......................359
Custom Settings menu ............................... 335
611
Customize command dials .......................370
Customize i menu ....................57, 358, 374
D
D-Lighting ........................................................... 431
Delete .................................................. 88, 208, 229
Detaching lenses ............................................... 69
Diraction compensation ...............260, 329
Direct connection to computer .............455
Direct sunlight (White balance) .............111
DISP button ........................................................... 48
Distortion control ............................................433
Dynamic-area AF ................................................94
E
Easy Connect ..................................................... 461
Easy exposure compensation ................. 345
Eect level (Set Picture Control) ............151
Electronic VR ............................................178, 331
Encryption key ....................................... 455, 463
Energy saving (photo mode) ...................412
Error (wireless connection) ....................... 483
Exposure comp. for ash ............................355
Exposure compensation .............................134
Exposure delay mode ...................................349
Exposure indicator ..........................................125
Eye-detection AF ................................................97
F
Face-detection AF .............................................97
File information ................................................ 184
File naming ...............................................239, 325
File number sequence .................................350
Fill ash ....................................................... 163, 498
Filter eects (Set Picture Control) ......... 152
Fine-tune optimal exposure .....................346
Firmware version .............................................417
Flange-back distance ....................................105
Flash (White balance) ...................................111
Flash bracketing ...............................................267
Flash compensation ........................... 265, 501
Flash control .......................................................263
Flash control mode ........................................497
Flash mode ...............................................163, 498
Flash o ...................................................... 163, 500
Flash shutter speed ........................................355
Flash sync speed ..............................................354
Flat (Set Picture Control) .............................148
Flexible program ............................................. 121
Flicker reduction ..............................................329
Flicker reduction shooting ........................261
Fluorescent (White balance) ....................111
Fn1 button ...................................................59, 109
Fn2 button ......................................................59, 90
Focal plane mark .............................................105
Focus indicator ................................................. 104
Focus lock ............................................................142
Focus mode .....................................90, 170, 179
Focus peaking ........................................ 106, 353
Focus point options .......................................344
Focus point wrap-around ..........................343
Focus points used ...................................96, 339
Focus ring ............................................................ 103
Focus shift shooting ......................................314
Focus tracking with lock-on .....................339
612
Format memory card ....................................387
Frame size/frame rate ........................172, 325
Framing grid display ......................................353
Frequency response ......................................332
Full-frame playback ........................................180
Full-time AF ............................................................91
FV lock ....................................................................502
H
HDMI ............................................................ 402, 489
HDR (high dynamic range) ....................... 285
Hi (ISO) ................................................................... 132
High ISO NR ............................................. 259, 329
High sensitivity (Hi) ........................................132
Highlight display ...................................185, 384
Highlight-weighted metering .................164
Histogram .......................................................49, 50
Hue (Set Picture Control) ............................152
I
Image comment ..............................................398
Image Dust O ref photo ...........................395
Image quality .......................................... 161, 241
Image size ................................................. 162, 241
Incandescent (White balance) ................111
Information display ........................................391
Infrastructure mode ............................453, 460
Interval timer shooting ................................292
IP address .............................................................464
ISO sensitivity .....................................................131
ISO sensitivity settings .......................242, 326
L
Landscape (Set Picture Control) ............ 148
Language .............................................................388
Limit AF-area mode selection .................343
Location data .....................................................193
Long exposure NR ..........................................258
Long time-exposures ................................... 126
Low-light AF .......................................................344
M
MAC address ......................................................408
Main command dial .........................................37
Manage Picture Control ...................253, 328
Manual (Shooting mode) ...........................124
Manual focus ..............................................91, 103
Manual focus ring in AF mode ............... 345
Matrix metering ............................................... 164
Maximum shots per burst ......................... 349
Memory buer ..................................................139
Memory card ..............................................62, 590
Memory card capacity .................................592
Metering ...............................................................163
MF (Manual focus) .............................................91
Microphone sensitivity ..................... 175, 331
Mid-range sharpening (Set Picture
Control) ............................................................151
Mode dial ..................................................... 36, 120
Monitor .....................................................................39
Monitor brightness ........................................ 389
Monitor color balance ..................................389
Monochrome .....................................................435
Monochrome (Set Picture Control) ......148
613
Multiple exposure ...........................................277
My Menu .............................................................. 444
N
Natural light auto (White balance) .......110
Network settings ........................406, 454, 460
Neutral (Set Picture Control) ....................148
Non-CPU lens data .........................................394
O
Overlay pictures ...............................................436
Overview .............................................................. 194
P
Pairing (Bluetooth) ......................................... 403
Perspective control ........................................434
Photo information ..........................................183
Photo shooting menu ..................................234
Photo/video selector ...............................75, 80
Picture review ....................................................231
Pictures shot on selected dates .............210
PIN-entry WPS ...................................................461
Pinpoint AF ............................................................93
Pixel mapping ................................................... 398
Playback display options ............................230
Playback folder ..................................................230
Playback menu ................................................. 229
Portrait (Set Picture Control) .................... 148
Power o delay .........................................64, 348
Preset manual (White balance)
...........................................................112, 156, 248
Press the shutter-release button all the
way down ..........................................................77
Press the shutter-release button halfway
...................................................................................77
Programmed auto ..........................................121
Protect ....................................................................118
Push-button WPS ............................................461
Q
Quick crop ........................................................... 196
Quick sharp (Set Picture Control) ..........151
R
Rating ...........................................................116, 233
RAW processing ...............................................423
RAW recording ..................................................242
Rear-curtain sync ..................................163, 499
REC lamp brightness .....................................390
Recent settings .................................................450
Rechargeable Li-ion battery ........................65
Red-eye correction .........................................432
Red-eye reduction ............................... 163, 498
Release button to use dial .........................373
Release mode ...............................136, 167, 265
Release mode (save frame) ............ 139, 330
Remote ash photography .......................505
Remote photography ...................................475
Reset all settings ..............................................417
Reset custom settings ..................................337
Reset photo shooting menu ....................235
Reset user settings ...............................129, 388
Reset video recording menu ................... 325
614
Resize ......................................................................427
Retouch menu ..................................................419
Reverse indicators ...........................................374
RGB histogram ..................................................186
Rotate tall .............................................................231
S
Saturation (Set Picture Control) ..............152
Save current frame .........................................204
Save focus position ........................................395
Save user settings .................................128, 387
Save/load menu settings ........................... 413
Search for Wi-Fi network ............................ 461
Select for upload ............................................. 199
Select for upload (Bluetooth) .................. 403
Select for upload to computer ...............469
Selected pictures .............................................209
Self-portrait mode .................................. 40, 402
Self-timer .........................................137, 140, 348
Set Picture Control ...............................147, 251
Set the clock ..........................................................71
Setup menu ........................................................386
Shade (White balance) ................................ 111
Sharpening (Set Picture Control) ...........151
Shooting data ....................................................189
Shutter speed ......................................... 121, 124
Shutter type ........................................................350
Shutter-priority auto ..................................... 121
Shutter-release button AE-L .....................347
Silent photography .............................114, 322
Single AF ..................................................................91
Single frame .............................................136, 139
Single-point AF ................................................... 93
Slide show ........................................................... 231
Slot empty release lock ............................... 412
Slow sync ...................................................163, 499
Slow-motion video ........................................ 174
SnapBridge ..........................................................474
Spot metering ...................................................164
SSID ...............................................................455, 462
Standard (Set Picture Control) ................ 148
Standby timer .......................................................64
Storage folder ....................................................235
Store points by orientation .......................340
Straighten ............................................................ 433
Sub-command dial ...........................................37
Subject-tracking AF ....................................... 100
T
Thumbnail ........................................................... 181
Time .........................................................................126
Time zone and date .......................................388
Time-lapse video .............................................305
Timecode ............................................................. 333
Toning (Set Picture Control) ..................... 152
Touch controls .......................................... 42, 401
Touch shutter .....................................................101
Trim ..........................................................................426
Trim video ............................................................443
U
Upload while o ..............................................405
USB cable ...................................................................4
USB power delivery ........................................410
615
User setting mode ..........................................128
V
Vibration reduction ........................................168
Video le type ................................................... 326
Video quality ............................................172, 325
Video recording menu .................................324
Video-record button ........................................81
View all in continuous mode ...................354
Vignette control .................................... 260, 329
Virtual horizon ..............................................49, 50
Vivid (Set Picture Control) ..........................148
W
WB bracketing ...................................................272
White balance ..............................109, 153, 244
Wi-Fi connection ............. 165, 177, 404, 406
Wi-Fi mode ..........................................................478
Wide-area AF (L) ................................................. 95
Wide-area AF (L-animals) ...............................95
Wide-area AF (L-people) ................................95
Wide-area AF (S) ................................................. 95
Wind noise reduction ...................................333
Wireless remote (ML-L7) options ...........408
Wireless Transmitter Utility ........................452
Z
Zoom ......................................................................206
CT2F03(11)
6MO03811-03
No reproduction in any form of this document, in whole or in
part (except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews),
may be made without written authorization from NIKON
CORPORATION.
… 4 …


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Nikon Z30 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Nikon Z30 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 28.31 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Nikon Z30

Nikon Z30 User Manual - English - 2 pages

Nikon Z30 User Manual - German - 2 pages

Nikon Z30 User Manual - Dutch - 2 pages

Nikon Z30 User Manual - French - 2 pages

Nikon Z30 User Manual - French - 680 pages

Nikon Z30 User Manual - Spanish - 2 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info